ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR E550 Series 2

ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR
Electricity Meters IEC/MID

Industrial and Commercial E550 Series 2
Functional Description
Electricity Meters IEC/MID

Industrial and Commercial
ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR
E550 Series 2
Functional Description
Date: 13.05.2013
Filename: D000029785 E550 ZxG Series 2 Functional Description en k.docx
© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k
2/390 Revision History
Revision History
Version Date Comments
a 03.03.2010 First edition
b 30.03.2010 General review
c 29.07.2010 Layout adaptations for MAP120 online help
d 10.08.2010 All references to the security switch position changed to its status.
Section 27.3.1 updated: push button security switch for access to
security level 4.
e 01.12.2011 Firmware version P06 update and new document template
f 23.01.2012 Section 1.2: Added footnote about extension boards 060 and 240.
Section 1.4: Added information about extension boards 060 and 240.
Added footnote about extension boards 060 and 240.
Section 5.4.2: Added examples .240x and .060x.
Section 26.2: Added footnote about extension boards 060 and 240.
g 08.03.2012 Minor corrections, layout changes and some improved figures.
h 16.04.2013 Updates related to firmware version P07.
Inserted warning about connecting 3rd party devices to powered RS232
port.
k 13.05.2013 Adaptation to changed parameter representation of electrical interface in
MAP120. Layout adaptations for MAP120 online help.
Nothing in this document shall be construed as a representation or guarantee in respect of the

performance, quality or durability of the specified product. Landis+Gyr accepts no liability
whatsoever in respect of the specified product under or in relation to this document.
Subject to change without notice.
© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description
Nothing in this document shall be construed as a representation or guarantee in respect of the

performance, quality or durability of the specified product. Landis+Gyr accepts no liability
Table of contents 3/390
Table of contents
Revision History ..................................................................................................................................... 2

Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 3
About this Document ......................................................................................................................... 12
1 Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 14
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 14
1.2 Configuration of Measuring Unit .............................................................................................. 15
1.3 Configuration of Tariff Functions .............................................................................................. 21
1.4 Configuration of the Extension Board ...................................................................................... 23
1.5 Configuration ID ....................................................................................................................... 25
2 Mains............................................................................................................................................ 28
2.1 Primary Data ............................................................................................................................ 28
2.1.1 Influence of Transformer Ratio .......................................................................................... 28
2.1.2 Secondary Data ................................................................................................................ 28
2.1.3 Individual Primary Data ..................................................................................................... 29
2.2 Choice of Correct Register Resolution .................................................................................... 30
2.2.1 Energy Registers............................................................................................................... 30
2.2.2 Ampere-Hour Register ...................................................................................................... 34
2.2.3 Demand Registers ............................................................................................................ 35
2.3 Transmission of Valency Pulses .............................................................................................. 36
2.4 Optical Test Outputs ................................................................................................................ 38
2.5 Parameterisation of Measuring System ................................................................................... 39
2.5.1 Meters for Secondary Data ............................................................................................... 39
2.5.2 Meter for Primary Values .................................................................................................. 40
2.5.3 Format of Registers ........................................................................................................... 42
3 Measured Quantities .................................................................................................................. 43
3.1 Measuring System ................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.1 Block Schematic Diagram ................................................................................................. 43
3.2 Measuring Principle ................................................................................................................. 46
3.2.1 Signal Generation ............................................................................................................. 46
3.2.2 Signal Processing ............................................................................................................. 47
3.2.3 Measured Quantities ......................................................................................................... 48
3.3 Individual Measuring Quantities ............................................................................................... 51
3.3.1 Energy Recording ............................................................................................................. 51
3.3.2 Active Energy .................................................................................................................... 51
3.3.3 Reactive Energy ................................................................................................................ 54
3.3.4 Apparent Energy ............................................................................................................... 56
3.3.5 Power Factor ..................................................................................................................... 57
3.3.6 Instantaneous Values of Voltage and Current .................................................................. 58
3.3.7 Mains Frequency............................................................................................................... 59
3.3.8 Phase Angles .................................................................................................................... 59
3.3.9 Total Distortion Level (TDL) .............................................................................................. 63
3.3.10 Losses (ZMG400 only) .................................................................................................... 64
3.4 Parameterisation of Measured Quantities ............................................................................... 65
D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

4/390 Table of contents
4 Ampere-Hour Registers ............................................................................................................. 69

5 Terminals .................................................................................................................................... 71
5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 71
5.2 Terminal Layout ....................................................................................................................... 72
5.3 Terminal Designations ............................................................................................................. 76
5.4 Connection Diagrams .............................................................................................................. 77
5.4.1 Current and Voltage Terminals ......................................................................................... 77
5.4.2 Control Inputs, Output Contacts and Electrical Interfaces ................................................ 79
5.5 Further Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 81
5.6 Parameterisation of Terminals ................................................................................................ 81
5.6.1 Output Pulse Length ......................................................................................................... 81
5.6.2 Pulse Output ..................................................................................................................... 82
5.6.3 Static Output ..................................................................................................................... 83
5.6.4 Energy Direction Output ................................................................................................... 84
5.6.5 Control Input ..................................................................................................................... 85
6 Calendar Clock ........................................................................................................................... 86
6.1 Clock Structure ........................................................................................................................ 86
6.2 Calendar Clock ........................................................................................................................ 86
6.2.1 Time Functions ................................................................................................................. 86
6.2.2 Synchronisation and Time-Setting .................................................................................... 90
6.2.3 Synchronisation via Control Input SY ............................................................................... 90
6.2.4 Synchronisation by Remote Readout ............................................................................... 92
6.2.5 Setting the Time ................................................................................................................ 92
6.2.6 Handling the Deviations .................................................................................................... 92
6.2.7 Synchronisation Output .................................................................................................... 94
6.3 Time Stamp ............................................................................................................................. 95
6.3.1 Time Stamp Format .......................................................................................................... 95
6.3.2 Clock Status ...................................................................................................................... 95
6.4 Battery Status .......................................................................................................................... 96
6.5 Parameterisation of Calendar Clock ........................................................................................ 97
6.5.1 Time Base ......................................................................................................................... 97
6.5.2 Daylight Saving Time ........................................................................................................ 98
6.5.3 Synchronisation Output .................................................................................................. 101
6.5.4 Clock Synchronisation .................................................................................................... 102
6.5.5 Date and Time after Recover from Total Loss Power Reserve ...................................... 103
7 Time of Use (Time Switch) ....................................................................................................... 104
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 104
7.2 Switching Tables ................................................................................................................... 104
7.2.1 Day Table ....................................................................................................................... 105
7.2.2 Annual Table ................................................................................................................... 105
7.2.3 Special Day Table ........................................................................................................... 105
7.2.4 Time Switch Signals with Fault ....................................................................................... 106
7.2.5 Active and Passive Switching Tables ............................................................................. 106
7.2.6 Example of a Rate Control .............................................................................................. 107
7.3 Parameterisation of TOU ....................................................................................................... 110
7.3.1 Creating a New Set of Switching Tables ........................................................................ 110
7.3.2 Defining a Special Day ................................................................................................... 112
7.3.3 Defining the Emergency Settings ................................................................................... 113

7.3.4 Activating the Passive TOU Settings .............................................................................. 113

7.3.5 Changing Existing TOU Settings ..................................................................................... 114
8 Control Table............................................................................................................................. 115
8.1 Rate Control........................................................................................................................... 115
8.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 115
8.1.2 Signal Sources ................................................................................................................ 116
8.1.3 Signal Assignment .......................................................................................................... 118
8.2 Determination of Rate Control ............................................................................................... 120
8.2.1 Necessary Control Signals .............................................................................................. 120
8.2.2 Use of Control Table ....................................................................................................... 121
8.2.3 Example of a Rate Control .............................................................................................. 122
8.2.4 Example of a Combined Rate Control ............................................................................. 123
8.2.5 Further Signal Assignments ............................................................................................ 124
8.3 Parameterisation of Control Tables ....................................................................................... 125
8.3.1 Logic Operations ............................................................................................................. 125
8.3.2 How to Set Up the Control Table for Tariff Control ......................................................... 126
8.3.3 Active Control Sources .................................................................................................... 126
8.3.4 Control Table................................................................................................................... 127
8.3.5 Example .......................................................................................................................... 129
8.4 Communication Inputs ........................................................................................................... 131
8.4.1 Setting via .MAP110 ........................................................................................................ 131
8.4.2 Technical Description of Communication Inputs ............................................................. 132
9 Integration Period ..................................................................................................................... 133
9.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 133
9.2 Controlling the Integration Period .......................................................................................... 134
9.2.1 Type of Control................................................................................................................ 134
9.2.2 Internally Controlled Integration Period ........................................................................... 134
9.2.3 Externally Controlled Integration Period .......................................................................... 135
9.2.4 New Start of Integration Period and Demand Measurement .......................................... 137
9.3 Demand Inhibition .................................................................................................................. 141
9.3.1 External Control .............................................................................................................. 141
9.3.2 Internal Control................................................................................................................ 143
9.3.3 Transfer of Integration Period or Demand Inhibition ....................................................... 143
9.3.4 Summary ......................................................................................................................... 145
9.4 Parameterisation of Integration Period .................................................................................. 146
9.4.1 Defining the Integration Period ........................................................................................ 146
9.4.2 Examples of Integration Period Definitions ..................................................................... 148
10 Energy Registration .............................................................................................................. 150
10.1 Tariffication Overview .......................................................................................................... 150
10.1.1 Formation of Measured Quantities ................................................................................ 150
10.1.2 Signal Utilisation............................................................................................................ 150
10.2 Energy Registers ................................................................................................................. 152
10.2.1 Structure........................................................................................................................ 152
10.2.2 Types of Recording ....................................................................................................... 153
10.2.3 Energy Recording as Status ......................................................................................... 154
10.2.4 Energy Consumption..................................................................................................... 154
10.2.5 Energy Advance ............................................................................................................ 155
10.2.6 Sum of Rated Registers ................................................................................................ 156

10.2.7 Primary and Secondary Data ........................................................................................ 156

10.2.8 Rate Control .................................................................................................................. 156
10.2.9 Format of the Energy Registers .................................................................................... 156
10.2.10 Display ........................................................................................................................ 157
10.3 Parameterisation of Energy Registers ................................................................................. 158
10.3.1 Energy Register Definition ............................................................................................ 158
10.3.2 Energy Pulse Count Registers (functional range “South Korea”) ................................. 160
11 Demand Registration ............................................................................................................ 161
11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 161
11.2 Demand Registers ............................................................................................................... 162
11.2.1 Structure ....................................................................................................................... 162
11.2.2 Sliding Maximum .......................................................................................................... 163
11.2.3 Integration Period ......................................................................................................... 164
11.3 Running Average Value Prunning ........................................................................................... 164
11.3.1 Simple Average Value .................................................................................................. 164
11.3.2 Sliding Average Value .................................................................................................. 165
11.3.3 Residual Value Processing ........................................................................................... 167
11.3.4 Load Profile Entries ...................................................................................................... 167
11.4 Prunning of Last Integration Period ......................................................................................... 167
11.5 Maximum Demand .............................................................................................................. 168
11.5.1 Power Comparison ....................................................................................................... 168
11.5.2 Power Comparison Procedure ...................................................................................... 170
11.6 Format of the Demand Registers ........................................................................................ 170
11.7 Display and Readout ........................................................................................................... 171
11.8 Parameterisation of Demand Registers .............................................................................. 172
11.8.1 Register Definition for Average Values of Demand ...................................................... 172
11.8.2 Register Definition for Maximum Values of Demand .................................................... 172
11.8.3 Register Definition for Maximum Values of Coincidental Demand ............................... 174
12 Power Factor Registration ................................................................................................... 176
12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 176
12.2 Power Factor during the Integration Period ......................................................................... 177
12.2.1 Average Power Factor .................................................................................................. 177
12.3 Power Factor During the Billing Period ............................................................................... 178
12.3.1 Minimum Power Factor ................................................................................................. 178
12.3.2 Average Power Factor .................................................................................................. 179
12.4 Instantaneous Power Factor ............................................................................................... 180
12.5 Display and Readout ........................................................................................................... 180
12.6 Power Factor Register Parameters ..................................................................................... 181
12.6.1 Power Factor Energy Direction ..................................................................................... 181
12.6.2 Threshold for Power Factor Calculation ....................................................................... 181
12.6.3 Rate Register Definition for Minimum Values of Power Factor ..................................... 182
12.6.4 Power Factor Monitor Threshold .................................................................................. 183
13 Operating Time and Status Registers ................................................................................. 184
13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 184
13.2 Terminal Status Information C.3.x ....................................................................................... 184
13.3 Internal Control Signal Status Register C.4.0 ...................................................................... 186
13.3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 186
13.3.2 Significance of Individual Bits ....................................................................................... 188

13.4 Internal Operating Status Register C.5.0 ............................................................................. 190

13.4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 190
13.4.2 Significance of Individual Bits ........................................................................................ 193
13.5 Operating Time Register ...................................................................................................... 195
13.6 Parameterisation of Operating Time Registers .................................................................... 196
14 Instantaneous Values ........................................................................................................... 198
14.1 Averaged Instantaneous Values .......................................................................................... 198
14.2 Reference for Phase Current Angle ..................................................................................... 199
14.3 Calculation of Phase Current Angle ..................................................................................... 199
14.4 Format of Instantaneous Power ........................................................................................... 200
15 Arrows in Display .................................................................................................................. 201
15.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 201
15.2 Parameterisation of Display Arrows ..................................................................................... 203
16 Resetting ................................................................................................................................ 204
16.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 204
16.2 Types of Resetting ............................................................................................................... 205
16.2.1 Manually ........................................................................................................................ 205
16.2.2 Internally by Calendar Clock ......................................................................................... 205
16.2.3 With a Formatted Command ......................................................................................... 206
16.3 Reset Procedure .................................................................................................................. 206
16.4 Reset Displays ..................................................................................................................... 207
16.5 Parameterisation of Billing Period Reset ............................................................................. 208
16.5.1 Specific billing period reset for functional range “South Korea” .................................... 209
17 Stored Value Profile .............................................................................................................. 210
17.1 Overview Stored Values ...................................................................................................... 210
17.2 Structure of the Stored Value Profile ................................................................................... 211
17.3 Memory Requirement .......................................................................................................... 211
17.4 Numbering of Stored Values ................................................................................................ 212
17.5 Sequence of Stored Values ................................................................................................. 213
17.6 Deleting Stored Values ........................................................................................................ 213
17.7 Parameterisation of Stored Values ...................................................................................... 213
17.7.1 Format of the Stored Value Profile Entries .................................................................... 213
17.7.2 Registers Captured in the Stored Value Profile ............................................................ 214
18 Load Profiles ......................................................................................................................... 216
18.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 216
18.1.1 Capture Period .............................................................................................................. 216
18.1.2 Controlling the Capture Period ...................................................................................... 217
18.2 Structure of a Load Profile ................................................................................................... 217
18.2.1 Structure of Entries ....................................................................................................... 217
18.2.2 Time Stamp ................................................................................................................... 218
18.2.3 Measured Values .......................................................................................................... 218
18.2.4 Memory Depth............................................................................................................... 219
18.2.5 Dynamic Memory Management .................................................................................... 220
18.2.6 Status Code .................................................................................................................. 221
18.3 Status Code Entries ............................................................................................................. 224
18.3.1 Status Code in IEC Readout and dlms Protocols ......................................................... 224
18.3.2 Summer/Winter Time Change ....................................................................................... 224

18.3.3 Power Down ................................................................................................................. 227

18.3.4 Setting Date/Time ......................................................................................................... 229
18.3.5 Rate Switching .............................................................................................................. 231
18.3.6 Resetting....................................................................................................................... 233
18.3.7 Midnight Time Stamp .................................................................................................... 236
18.4 Display of a Load Profile ..................................................................................................... 237
18.4.1 Display Control ............................................................................................................. 237
18.4.2 Display Example ........................................................................................................... 238
18.5 Communication ................................................................................................................... 239
18.5.1 Search Algorithm .......................................................................................................... 239
18.5.2 Readout for each Channel with R5/R6 Commands ...................................................... 240
18.6 Deleting a Load Profile ........................................................................................................ 240
18.7 Parameterisation of Load Profiles ....................................................................................... 241
18.7.1 Load Profile Entries ...................................................................................................... 241
18.7.2 Registers Captured in Load Profiles ............................................................................. 242
19 Monitoring Functions ........................................................................................................... 245
19.1 Event Recognition ............................................................................................................... 245
19.2 Assignment of Events .......................................................................................................... 245
19.3 Monitoring Functions ........................................................................................................... 246
19.3.1 Principle ........................................................................................................................ 246
19.3.2 Monitoring Sequence .................................................................................................... 247
19.3.3 Measures for an Event .................................................................................................. 248
19.3.4 Effect of Delay Time ..................................................................................................... 248
19.3.5 Thresholds .................................................................................................................... 250
19.3.6 Counters ....................................................................................................................... 250
19.4 Fraud Detection ................................................................................................................... 251
19.4.1 Strong Magnetic Field Detection ................................................................................... 251
19.4.2 Front Cover Removal .................................................................................................... 253
19.4.3 Terminal Cover Removal .............................................................................................. 253
19.4.4 Phase Sequence Reversed .......................................................................................... 254
19.4.5 Negative Active Energy Flow ........................................................................................ 254
19.4.6 Current with Undervoltage ............................................................................................ 255
19.4.7 Open or Short-Circuited Current Transformer (ZxG400) .............................................. 256
19.4.8 Overcurrent in Neutral Conductor ................................................................................. 257
19.4.9 Undercurrent ................................................................................................................. 257
19.5 Power Quality Monitoring .................................................................................................... 258
19.5.1 Voltage Monitor ............................................................................................................. 258
19.5.2 Under and Overvoltages ............................................................................................... 259
19.5.3 Phase Failure ................................................................................................................ 260
19.5.4 Behaviour with Total Voltage Failure (Power Down) .................................................... 261
19.5.5 Voltage Quality ............................................................................................................. 263
19.6 Power Quality Monitoring .................................................................................................... 264
19.6.1 Current Monitor ............................................................................................................. 264
19.6.2 10 Highest Maximum Demands .................................................................................... 265
19.6.3 Demand Monitor ........................................................................................................... 267
19.6.4 Power Factor Monitor ................................................................................................... 269
19.7 Stored Values ...................................................................................................................... 270
19.8 Event Log for Parameter Changes ...................................................................................... 270
19.9 Parameterisation of Diagnostic Events ............................................................................... 271

19.9.1 Fraud Detection............................................................................................................. 271

19.9.2 Power Quality Monitoring .............................................................................................. 273
19.9.3 Demand Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 276
19.9.4 Format of Snapshot Buffer ............................................................................................ 279
19.9.5 Registers Captured in Dedicated Log ........................................................................... 279
20 Event Log ............................................................................................................................... 280
20.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 280
20.2 Characteristics ..................................................................................................................... 280
20.3 Structure of an Event Log Entry ........................................................................................... 281
20.4 Triggers................................................................................................................................ 282
20.4.1 Appearance and Disappearance of Events ................................................................... 282
20.4.2 Event and Error Register ............................................................................................... 282
20.4.3 Memory Requirement .................................................................................................... 285
20.4.4 Clearing Registers......................................................................................................... 286
20.5 Display ................................................................................................................................. 286
20.5.1 Structure of Display ....................................................................................................... 286
20.5.2 Display Examples .......................................................................................................... 286
20.6 Communication .................................................................................................................... 286
20.7 Parameterisation of Event Log ............................................................................................ 287
21 Alerts ...................................................................................................................................... 289
21.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 289
21.2 Recording of Alerts .............................................................................................................. 289
21.3 Use of Alerts ........................................................................................................................ 291
21.4 Sending an SMS Message .................................................................................................. 293
21.4.1 SMS Controller .............................................................................................................. 293
21.4.2 Meter Configurations ..................................................................................................... 294
21.4.3 AT Commands .............................................................................................................. 295
21.4.4 Test SMS Message ....................................................................................................... 296
21.4.5 Status Report of SMS Message .................................................................................... 296
21.5 Parameterisation of Alerts ................................................................................................... 297
21.5.1 Setting and Clearing of Alerts ....................................................................................... 297
21.5.2 Short Message System (SMS) ...................................................................................... 297
22 Display Lists and Protocols ................................................................................................. 299
22.1 Display of Data .................................................................................................................... 299
22.2 Types of Display .................................................................................................................. 299
22.2.1 Operating Display.......................................................................................................... 300
22.2.2 Display Check ............................................................................................................... 301
22.3 Display Menu ....................................................................................................................... 302
22.3.1 Display List .................................................................................................................... 303
22.3.2 Load Profiles ................................................................................................................. 305
22.3.3 Readout Protocol .......................................................................................................... 307
22.3.4 Readout Without Voltage .............................................................................................. 307
22.3.5 Readout to IEC 62056-21 ............................................................................................. 307
22.3.6 Readout to dlms ............................................................................................................ 309
22.4 Service Menu ....................................................................................................................... 310
22.4.1 Service List.................................................................................................................... 312
22.5 Parameterisation of Display Lists ........................................................................................ 312

23 Display ................................................................................................................................... 314

23.1 Display Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 314
23.1.1 Basic Layout ................................................................................................................. 314
23.1.2 Individual Symbols ........................................................................................................ 315
23.1.3 Index System ................................................................................................................ 316
23.1.4 Display Identification Symbols ...................................................................................... 317
23.1.5 Format of Date .............................................................................................................. 318
23.2 Menus .................................................................................................................................. 318
23.2.1 Display Menu ................................................................................................................ 318
23.2.2 Service Menu ................................................................................................................ 319
23.3 Display Character Set ......................................................................................................... 320
23.4 Arrows in Display ................................................................................................................. 321
23.5 Parameterisation of Display ................................................................................................ 322
23.5.1 Display List and IEC Readout Identification Number .................................................... 322
23.5.2 Data Format .................................................................................................................. 322
23.5.3 Display Indicators ......................................................................................................... 323
23.5.4 Display Timers .............................................................................................................. 323
23.5.5 Menu Entries ................................................................................................................. 324
23.5.6 Test Mode ..................................................................................................................... 324
24 Error Messages ..................................................................................................................... 325
24.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 325
24.2 Structure of the Error Code ................................................................................................. 325
24.3 Degree of Severity of Errors ................................................................................................ 326
24.4 Error Groups ........................................................................................................................ 327
24.4.1 Time-Base Errors (Clock) ............................................................................................. 327
24.4.2 Write/Read Access Errors ............................................................................................ 328
24.4.3 Checksum Errors .......................................................................................................... 329
24.4.4 Other Errors .................................................................................................................. 331
24.5 Resetting Errors .................................................................................................................. 332
24.6 Parameterisation of Error Messages ................................................................................... 332
25 Identification Numbers ......................................................................................................... 333
25.1 Parameterisation of Identification Numbers ........................................................................ 335
26 Communication ..................................................................................................................... 336
26.1 Optical Interface .................................................................................................................. 336
26.2 Electrical Interfaces ............................................................................................................. 337
26.2.1 RS232 Interface ............................................................................................................ 339
26.2.2 Powered RS232 Interface ............................................................................................. 339
26.2.3 RS485 Interface ............................................................................................................ 340
26.2.4 RS422 Interface ............................................................................................................ 341
26.2.5 CS Interface .................................................................................................................. 341
26.3 Addressing the Meters ........................................................................................................ 342
26.3.1 Readout to dlms ............................................................................................................ 343
26.4 Monitoring of Password Input .............................................................................................. 344
26.5 External Modem Connected to an RS232 Interface ............................................................ 347
26.5.1 Communication Time Window for Modems .................................................................. 347
26.5.2 Calling Line Identification .............................................................................................. 348
26.6 Parameterisation of Communication ................................................................................... 348
26.6.1 General Communication Parameters ........................................................................... 348

26.6.2 Password Input Monitoring ............................................................................................ 349

26.6.3 Return Time to Sleep Mode .......................................................................................... 349
26.6.4 Data Format of R6 Command ....................................................................................... 350
26.6.5 Optical Interface ............................................................................................................ 350
26.6.6 Electrical Interface(s) .................................................................................................... 352
26.6.7 External Modem Configuration ...................................................................................... 355
26.6.8 Call Identifiers ............................................................................................................... 356
26.6.9 PIN Code Handling ....................................................................................................... 357
26.6.10 PIN Profile ................................................................................................................... 357
26.6.11 Initialisation Strings ..................................................................................................... 357
26.6.12 Check Modem Strings ................................................................................................. 358
26.6.13 Modem Answers ......................................................................................................... 358
26.6.14 Time Window for Modems Connected to RS232 Interface ......................................... 358
26.6.15 Time Window for Modems Connected to Powered RS232 Interface .......................... 360
27 Security System .................................................................................................................... 361
27.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 361
27.2 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 361
27.3 Security Levels .................................................................................................................... 362
27.3.1 Security Switch Protected by the Certification Seal ...................................................... 364
27.4 Security System Parameters ............................................................................................... 365
27.4.1 Security Attributes ......................................................................................................... 365
27.4.2 Allocation of Access Rights to Data and Parameter Groups ......................................... 368
27.4.3 Data Groups (Registers and Profiles) ........................................................................... 369
27.4.4 Parameter Groups......................................................................................................... 370
27.4.5 Access to Commands ................................................................................................... 372
27.4.6 Modification of Passwords ............................................................................................ 373
27.5 Parameterisation of Security System ................................................................................... 373
28 OBIS Identification Codes .................................................................................................... 374
28.1 Identification Code Structure ............................................................................................... 374
28.2 Individual Elements .............................................................................................................. 376
28.2.1 Medium ......................................................................................................................... 376
28.2.2 Channel ......................................................................................................................... 376
28.2.3 Measured Quantity ........................................................................................................ 376
28.2.4 Type of Measurement ................................................................................................... 378
28.2.5 General Data ................................................................................................................. 380
28.2.6 Service Data.................................................................................................................. 382
28.2.7 Example Combimeter .................................................................................................... 383
28.3 dlms Address ....................................................................................................................... 384
29 Index ....................................................................................................................................... 385

About this Document 12/390
About this Document
Range of Validity This Functional Description applies to the following E550 meters (Series 1
up to firmware version P04 and Series 2 with firmware version P05 or
higher):
 ZMG310AR/CR
 ZMG400AR/CR
 ZFG400AR/CR (firmware version P04 only)
Purpose This document describes the detailed functionality of the Landis+Gyr

industrial and commercial electricity meter E550 ZMG310/400 Series 2. It
also contains information concerning E550 ZxG310/400 Series 1 meters.
The document serves as both a functional description and as on-line help

for the MAP120 Parameter Editor, using the same data source.
 The functional description of the meter is a paper-based

document, which can be used, e.g. for the specification of a
metering system and training.
 The online help for the MAP tool is an electronic document and is
an integral part of the MAP tool.
Target Group The target group of this document are persons who perform the following
tasks:
 Specification of a metering system

 System integration of the meter with a data acquisition system
 Specification of the meter for orders and the processing of orders
 Re-parameterisation at the customer’s facilities or on site
 Answering customer service requests
The reader must have advanced knowledge of E550 meters and their
functionality as well as knowledge of Industrial and Commercial metering
applications.
Reference Documents The technical data and the use of the meters are explained in the following
separate documents:
 D000029781 “User Manual E550 Series 2 ZMG310AR/CR”

 D000029744 “Technical Data E550 Series 2 ZMG310AR/CR”
 D000029783 “User Manual E550 Series 2 ZMG400AR/CR”
 D000029746 “Technical Data E550 Series 2 ZMG400AR/CR”
Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this document:

conventions
Font Description
Courier Font for file names, paths and code examples.
Font style used for menu items and buttons in user interface and for
Bold
keys on keyboard.
Font style for new terminology and for references to other documents
Italics or other parts within this document. For example: For more informa-
tion on measured quantities, see section 3 “Measured Quantities”.
 Symbol for additional information, hints and other important

notifications.
The following conventions are employed in this document for representing

type designations:
 The lower case letter “x” can be used as a wildcard character to

indicate different versions (e.g. ZMG310xR for the ZMG310AR and
ZMG310CR meters).
 The following collective terms are also sometimes used instead of
the type designation:
– “Active energy meters” for the ZMG310AR/ZxG400AR meters
– “Combimeters” for the ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR meters

14/390 Configuration
1 Configuration
1.1 Introduction
The configuration of the meter is defined at the manufacturing plant. The
hardware and software configuration parameters are set prior to the
manufacturing process of the meter in order to specify the process.
Therefore, the configuration parameters cannot be modified at the utility
using the MAP120 Parameter Editor.
Hardware Hardware configuration parameters specify the physical meter hardware,

Configuration such as the number of measuring elements (M or F circuit), the type of
measurement (active only or active/reactive energy), the connection type
(directly connected or transformer-operated), the interfaces with which the
meter communicates, etc.
Software Software configuration parameters define the functional range of the meter,
Configuration i.e. the various software functions of the meter can be activated or
deactivated according to the customer’s requirements.
The hardware/software configuration cannot be altered in the field by

 the utility.
All configuration parameters are write-protected and cannot be changed
with the MAP120 Parameter Editor.
The configuration ID that reproduces the configuration settings is displayed

in the tree of the MAP120 Parameter Editor.

Configuration 15/390
1.2 Configuration of Measuring Unit

The configuration of the measuring unit defines the basic measuring
functions of the E550 meters.
Measurement Base Measurement base is determined by the basic type of measurement.
Active energy consumption ZMG310AR and ZxG400AR

only
Active and reactive energy ZMG310CR and ZxG400CR
consumption combimeters additionally permit the
calculation of apparent energy and power
factor

Network Type The type of network the meter is connected to.
Four-wire network M Three-phase four-wire network

ZMG310xR – ZMG400xR
Three-wire network F Three-phase three-wire network
ZFG400xR
Only available for firmware version P04.
Firmware Version For re-parameterisation, the firmware version must correspond to that of
the meter.
Connection Type The maximum current, on the one hand, and the voltage level, on the other
hand, are decisive for direct or transformer connection.
Transformer connection ZxG400xR

Direct connection ZMG310xR
Accuracy (IEC) The measuring accuracy class of the meter for active and reactive energy
consumption.
Active energy meter Class 1.0 – ZMG310AR, ZxG410AR

Combimeter Active class 1.0 – Reactive class 2.0
ZMG310CR, ZxG410CR
Active class 0.5 – Reactive class 1.0
ZxG405CR
Only the combimeters for transformer connection are also available in the
higher accuracy class 0.5S.
Accuracy (MID) The measuring accuracy class of the meter for active energy consumption.
Active energy meter Class B – ZMG310AR, ZxG410AR

Combimeter Class B – ZMG310CR, ZxG410CR
Class C – ZxG405CR
Only the combimeters for transformer connection are available in the higher
accuracy class C.

Functional Range The functional range setting allows selecting a predefined setting for
specific markets (not available for firmware versions P01 to P04).
With firmware version P06, four additional functional range settings are
available (Extended, SME, TNB and South Korea) in addition to the
Standard (default) functional range. With firmware version P05, only two
additional functional range settings are available (SME and TNB).
Extended functional range increases the number of energy registers to up

to 48.
SME is a subset of Standard (with fixed settings, e.g. combimeter,

frequency: 50 Hz, Interface 1: powered RS232, tariffication: energy and
demand, tariff control: control inputs and TOU, etc.).
TNB is a modification of Standard (with maximum load recording (see

section 19.4.1 “Strong Magnetic Field Detection”).
South Korea allows you to restrict the functionality to this region.
Nominal Voltage The following nominal voltages are available:

Range
ZMG310xR
 3 x 110/190…133/230 V (firmware version ≥P05)

 3 x 220/380…240/415 V
ZMG400xR
 3 x 58/100…69/120 V (firmware versions ≥P04)

 3 x 120/208…240/415 V (firmware versions P03 and P04 only)
 3 x 220/380…240/415 V
ZFG400xR
 3 x 100…120 V (firmware version P04 only)

The actual nominal value of secondary voltage is determined by the
parameters of the measuring system (see section 2.1.2 “Secondary Data”).

In, Ib, Imax The following nominal and maximum currents can be selected for meters
(firmware version ≥P05) with transformer connection (Note for MID: Iref = In):
ZxG410xR 1(1.2, 2, 6) – 5(6, 10) A

ZxG405CR 1(1.2, 2, 6) – 5(6, 10) A
The following basic and maximum currents can be selected for meters with
direct connection (Note for MID: Iref = Ib):
ZMG310xR Basic current Ib 5 – 10 – 20 – 40 A

Max. current Imax 40 – 60 – 80 – 100 – 120 – 125 A
Starting Current For the ZxG400 meters, the starting current depends on the nominal
current (In) and the accuracy class. For MID: Iref = In.
ZxG410xR typical 0.2% In 2 mA for 1 A

4 mA for 2 A
10 mA for 5 A
ZxG405CR typical 0.1% In 5 mA for 5 A
The starting current can be selected within the following ranges:
In: 1 A 1 to 15 mA
In: 2 A 2 to 15 mA
In: 5 A 4 to 15 mA
For the ZMG310xR meters, the basic current Ib determines the starting
threshold. For MID: Iref = Ib.
ZMG310xR typical 0.5% Ib 25 mA
The starting current can be selected between 15 and 200 mA.

Electrical Interface 1 In principle, any one of the following interface combinations (1 and 2) can
be selected. In this case, however, only interface 1 can be specified and
selection is made between RS232 or RS485 or neither of these. Interface 2
is selected under the heading Extension Board.
.00 No interface
.02 RS232 on interface 1 (transparent/intelligent)
.03 RS485 on interface 1
.07***) Powered RS232 alone on interface 1
*)
.37 Powered RS232 on interface 1 and RS485 on interface 2
**)
.40 CS alone on interface 2
.42**) RS232 on interface 1 with CS on interface 2
**)
.43 RS485 on interface 1 with CS on interface 2
*)
.60 RS422 (twin jack connector) on interface 2
.62*) RS232 on interface 1 with RS422 (twin jack connector) on
interface 2
.63*) RS485 on interface 1 with RS422 (twin jack connector) on
interface 2
*) Only available for extension boards 041, 240 and 060
**) Only available for extension boards 260 and 440
***) Only available for extension board 020
The details are specified in section 26.2 “Electrical Interfaces”.
Un The nominal value of the secondary voltage is determined by the

parameters of the measuring system (see section 2.1.2 “Secondary Data”).
Frequency E550 meters are designed for mains frequencies of 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
The choice of frequency of the network to which the meter is connected is

important because:
 The frequency affects metering accuracy

 The calendar clock can be synchronised with the network frequency
(50 Hz or 60 Hz)
LED Pulse Length Pulse length of the optical test output in normal operating mode (2 ms,
20 ms or 40 ms, depending on connection type and maximum current).

Meter Constant R2 The meter constants available depend on the nominal values of the meters,
i.e. nominal voltage, nominal or basic current and the pulse length of the
test diode.
The pulse length of 2 ms is compatible with all constants listed, while 40 ms

is only compatible with those with a pulse frequency up to a programmed
specific number of imp/s.
Examples:
The grey values in the following table exceed the programmed limit and are
therefore not selectable with a pulse length of 40 ms.
Type Un In (Imax) Meter constant [imp/Unit*],

Max. pulse frequency [imp/s]
ZMG310 3 x 220…240 V 5(40) A 500 1000 2000
4 8 16
ZMG310 3 x 220…240 V 5(100) A 500 1000 2000
10 20 40
ZxG410 3 x 220…240 V 1(2) A 2000 5000 10000
1 2 4
ZxG410 3 x 220…240 V 5(6) A 2000 5000 10000
3 6 12
*) The table shows the relevant constant in imp/kWh, imp/kvarh or imp/kVAh
with the maximum pulse frequency underneath. The latter refers to the
maximum current of the meter indicated in parenthesis.
The constant for the ZxG400 meter for transformer connection is the
secondary constant R2. If the primary data are known, the primary constant
R1 results from this according to section 2.1 “Primary Data”.

1.3 Configuration of Tariff Functions

The configuration of tariff functions determines the range of functions
(including monitoring functions) of the E550 meter. The selections made on
this page, together with the configuration of the measuring part, determine
which parameter groups are available.
Tariff Control The following settings are possible:
 Control inputs only

Rate control is implemented exclusively through the control inputs.
The time switch is not available.
 Control inputs and time of use
Rate control can be performed exclusively through the time switch.
However, a combination with the control inputs is possible. This can
be achieved by using the control table or via the activated signal
sources.
Tariffication E500 meters can be provided with:
 Energy register alone (energy) or

 Energy and maximum demand registers (energy and demand)
If “energy” has been selected, the maximum demand registers, demand
monitoring and minimum power factor are not available in the combimeter.

Meter Functions The following meter functions can be switched on or off according to the
required specifications. The corresponding parameter groups are switched
on or off accordingly:
 Load Profile
Load profile records the relevant registers for each integration or
capture period.
 Stored Values
With each reset, the stored values profile records the registers for
which the meter forms stored values (capture period = billing
period).
 Demand Monitoring
The demand monitor uses the mean values of demand to determine
the maximum; therefore, the demand measurement must be
activated here. For access to all power factor features, demand
monitoring has to be selected in the configuration.
 Short Message System (alerts with SMS)
The alert is intended to indicate a critical condition of the meter at
the central station to the utility. An electrical interface must be
available, so that the meter can send this alert with an SMS to the
central station.
 Alert LED (warning diode)
A warning diode on the front of the meter can indicate a critical
condition of the meter to the utility or customer.
 Total Distortion Level (TDL %)
The calculation of the total and per phase values of the distortion
level. Total and per phase diagnostic values can be captured in the
load profiles and in the display and readout lists.
 Load Profile 2
Load profile 2 records the relevant registers for each integration or
capture period.
 Coincidental Demand
It is possible to capture two maximum demand values at the same
time in two additional registers for coincidental maximum.
 Power Quality Monitoring (mains quality)
The meter has various monitoring functions such as voltage
monitoring, detection of voltage failures and voltage quality for
determination of the mains quality.
 Fraud Detection
Various functions are possible for fraud detection:
0/7 No functions
3/a Software functions only
4/b Hardware and software functions
The three hardware functions “Front Cover Removal”, “Terminal
Cover Removal” and “Strong DC Field Detection” can be switched
on or off separately. A detailed determination of the functions and
their evaluation are described in section 19.4 “Fraud Detection”.

 Losses (ZMG400 only)

Line losses of active energy: On Load Active (OLA) line losses are
caused by the copper resistance RCu of the transmission line.
Transformer losses of active energy: No Load Active (NLA)
transformer losses represent all losses of the transformer.
Current square hours (I2h).
Voltage square hours (U2h)
For more information on losses, see section 3.3.10 “Losses
(ZMG400 only)”.
 Extended Reactive Energy Calculation
Vectorial calculation of reactive energy: calculate reactive power Q
using the values of active power and apparent power. This
calculation method includes harmonics. However, it is limited to IEC
Class 2. After enabling “Extended Reactive Energy Calculation” in
the Configuration dialog, you cannot use a wide voltage power
supply. Power Factor and Total Distortion Level calculations are not
available when this method is used.
 Calendar Base
Most countries use the Gregorian calendar. Some countries in the
Middle and Near East require the Persian calendar (Jalaali).
1.4 Configuration of the Extension Board

The configuration of the extension board determines the number of inputs
and outputs and the availability of a CS, RS422 or RS485 interface.
Extension Board The following combinations of inputs and outputs can be selected:
000 No inputs and outputs
020 No inputs 2 outputs
041 No inputs 4 outputs with 1 load control output
060 No inputs 6 outputs
240 2 control inputs 4 outputs
If extension board 020 is used, it is not possible to use the electrical

interfaces listed below.
The assignment of control signals for the inputs and allocation and type of
output signals are determined in section 5 “Terminals”.

Electrical Interface 2 The following possibilities are available together with the RS232 or RS485
interface selected above as “Electrical Interface 1”, where applicable:
.00 No interface
***)
.07 Powered RS232 alone on interface 1
*)
.37 Powered RS232 on interface 1 and RS485 interface on
interface 2
.40**) CS alone on interface 2
**)
*)
.60 Dual jack RS422 on interface 2
.62*) RS232 on interface 1 with dual jack RS422 on interface 2
*)
.63 RS485 on interface 1 with dual jack RS422 on interface 2
Note that with P04, in the options .42 and .43, only one of the two
interfaces can be active. The active interface can be defined or changed
with the MAP120 Parameter Editor. The details are specified in section
26.2 “Electrical Interfaces”. From firmware version P05, interface 1 and 2
are independent.

1.5 Configuration ID
Configuration ID is a code that is generated automatically by the MAP tool
based on the configuration entries made. The ID is stored in the meter
together with the parameterisation data and will be read by the MAP tool
when the meter is reparameterised.
The following table allows you to interpret the configuration ID:
Pos. Name Code Description

1 Device Type P ZxG 300/400
2 Separator . (dot)
3 Network Type M Four-wire network
F Three-wire network
4 Connection Type 3 Direct connected
4 Transformer operated
5 Accuracy 0 Class 1
1 Class 0.5S
B Class B
C Class C
6 Measurement Base A Active energy
C Active and reactive energy
7 Tariffication E Energy
P Energy and demand
8 Tariff Control I Control inputs only
T Control inputs and time of
use
X Control inputs or time of use
9 Stored Value Profile s Disabled
S Enabled
10 Control Table c Disabled
C Enabled
11 Demand Monitor m Disabled
M Enabled
12 Instantaneous Values d Disabled
D Enabled


13 Power Factor o Disabled
O Enabled
14 Separator . (dot)
15 Extension Board, Number of Inputs 0 No inputs
2 Two inputs
4 Four inputs
16 Extension Board, Number of Outputs 0 No outputs
2 Two outputs
4 Four outputs
6 Six outputs
17 Additional Function 0 -
1 1 relay 5A
18 Load Profile 0 Without load profile
7 With load profile
19 Separator . (dot)
20 LCD Backlight l Without backlight
L With backlight
21 Electrical Interface 2 0 No interface on extension
board
C CS
M M-Bus
4 RS485
T RS485 (Twin RJ45)
6 RS422
22 Electrical Interface 1 0 Interface on base meter not
active
1 RS232 (external modem
supported)
2 RS232 (direct connection
only)
3 RS485
4 Powered RS232
23 SMS, Short Message System s Disabled
S Enabled
24 Power Quality Monitoring v Disabled
V Enabled
25 Fraud Detection t Disabled
T Enabled


26 String DC Field Detection s Disabled
S Enabled
27 Front Cover Removal f Disabled
F Enabled
28 Terminal Cover Removal t Disabled
T Enabled
29 Protocols (Tianyou variant only) I IEC62056-46 and IEC
62056-21
30 Alert LED l Disabled
L Enabled
31 Infrared communication Interface r Not available
(Tianyou variant only)
32 Sound Buzzer (Tianyou variant only) b Not available
33 Calendar Base G Gregorian
J Jalaali (Persian)
34 Device Sub Type F ZxG
35 Total Distortion Level h Disabled
H Enabled
36 Load Profile 2 l Disabled
L Enabled
37 Coincidental Demand c Disabled
C Enabled
38 CT / VT Error Correction (Not in use v Disabled
yet)
39 Customer Magnitude Adjustment (Not a Disabled
in use yet)
40 Functional Range S Standard
E Extended
M SME
T Tedas
N TNB
K South Korea
41 Load Profile Memory Management % Two digits representing the
memory usage of load
profile 1 in % (HEX)
43 Losses l Disabled
L Enabled
44 Extended Reactive Energy r Disabled
Calculation
R Enabled

28/390 Mains
2 Mains
2.1 Primary Data
All ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection can be adjusted for
primary data.
2.1.1 Influence of Transformer Ratio

ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection basically only “recognise” the
secondary data of the series connected transformer. The utility, however,
wants the primary data for billing. This can take place in two ways:
 Meter for secondary data

In this case the utility must multiply the meter data with the relevant
transformer factor or ratio to obtain the primary billing data. On the
other hand, it can connect the same meter to different transformers
without having to change anything on the meter itself.
 Meter with primary data
In this case the meter supplies the primary data that can be used for
billing directly. The utility does not have to make any further
adjustment to the data in this case. On the other hand, it must adapt
every meter individually to the series connected transformer, which
can be performed today with software for electronic meters by
parameterisation.
2.1.2 Secondary Data

The meter data for display and readout refer exclusively to the secondary
data of the meter. This permits the same meters to be connected together
with different current and voltage transformers. The relevant transformer
data and the transformer factor (by which the meter data must be
multiplied) must be noted on the rating plate of the meter. This factor must
also be registered in the utility, which makes the bill for the relevant
customer.
Meters for secondary data are common, for example, in Germany and
Austria.
Example:
ZxG410xR 3 x 230/400 V /5 A
Current transformer 300/5 A
Transformer ratio x 60

Mains 29/390
2.1.3 Individual Primary Data

Electronic meters allow the individual transformers to be stated with the
help of the parameterisation. No factor is therefore required for
multiplication of the data of the display and readout. The meter directly
supplies the data matched to the transformer connected.
This has effects, however, as shown in the following examples:
 On the meter constants

 On the resolution of the energy and demand registers
 On the significance of the transmission contacts
Examples for low voltage:
Transformer 100 / 5 A 500 / 5 A 1500 / 5 A
Transformer ratio
Voltage 1 1 1
Current 20 100 300
Meter constant
R2 secondary 10,000 10,000 10,000
imp/kWh imp/kWh imp/kWh
R1 primary 500 imp/kWh 100 imp/kWh 33.3 imp/kWh
Maximum current Imax 120 A 600 A 1800 A
Maximum demand 85 kW 420 kW 1360 kW

Pmax
Demand register 000.0 kW 000.0 kW 0000 kW
Energy register 0,000,000 kWh 0,000,000 kWh 00,000,000

kWh
While the primary constant R1 changes in every case, other resolutions can
result for the energy and demand registers.
Not included in the above examples are the valences of the fixed valency
pulses, which the meter can pass on via the output contacts. This valency
must likewise be adapted to the primary data, by which they are increased
by the transformer factor.
At medium voltage and, above all, high voltage, it is recommended that you
match, i.e. parameterise, the meters to the relevant primary data using the
unit M (W or Wh).

30/390 Mains
2.2 Choice of Correct Register Resolution
Validity The following description of determination of register resolution only applies

to the format of the register in the display and readout according to IEC
62056-21.
Readout to dlms (IEC 62056-46, Device Language Message Specification)

always gives the total register contents, i.e. 13 digits with 5 decimal places.
2.2.1 Energy Registers
Structure Energy part I

I - X . 0.01 Wh Pre-register
example:
0.001 up to over 20.000 Wh X
0 0 6 3 4 5 4 7 5 6 2 8 kWh
up to 4
decimal places
totally 12 digits
The energy register has a total of 12 digits, 4 of which are decimal places.
Two basic energy units are available:
 kWh
This unit is provided for low voltage for all applications in the
residential, commercial and industrial fields, since here the utility
usually charges for kWh.
 MWh
This unit is for applications in the medium and high voltage measuring
field together with primary data, since here MWh is usually the billing
unit.
The value of the final digit therefore depends on the choice of the unit of the
energy and is as follows
For kWh 0.01 Wh

MWh 0.01 kWh
Several energy proportions are required at low power in comparison to the
rated power before this value is achieved and is increased by 1. For this
purpose a value register accepts the incoming energy proportion values
and subtracts from value 1 the highest possible integral multiple X of this.
This figure X appears as the last digit of the energy register.

Mains 31/390
Display/readout A window of 5 to 8 digits lies over the register for the display and readout
and thereby defines the visible range.
The following illustration shows a 7-digit display at the top without decimal
place as normal for the meter selected. The same display is shown below
in test mode with two decimal places.
Display (example)
7 digits
0 0 2 6 3 4 5 4 7 5 6 2 kWh without decimal places
Normal mode Display (example)
7 digits
Test mode with
0
0 0 2 6
0 2 6 3
3 4
4 5
5 4
4 7
7 5 6 2
5 6 2 kWh
kWh without
2 decimaldecimal
placesplaces
Normal mode
Test mode
Test mode with

0 0 2 6 3 4 5 4 7 5 6 2 kWh 2 decimal
A so-called test mode is provided for test purposes, which uses aplaces
higher
resolution for the registers and therefore shortens the testing time
accordingly (measuring unit test).
E550 meters cut off the concealed digits, so that an exact test of the
metering unit is not possible. For the display in test mode therefore the
meter shifts the visible range by 1, 2 or 3 digits to the right and thus
displays the otherwise invisible digits (higher resolution).
Overflow The overflow of the energy register takes place at the highest digit set by
the parameterisation, i.e. higher digits remain at zero. If the energy register
has 7 digits without decimal place, 10,000,000 units (kWh or MWh) are
required for an overflow from 9,999,999 to 0,000,000. The 8th digit then
remains at zero and is not increased by 1.
Overflow (example) 7 digits

without decimal place
0 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 kWh
Display
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8th digit remains zero
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 9 2

32/390 Mains
Energy Status The resolution of the energy registers (significance of last visible digit) is
basically dependent on the minimum overflow time. This is the time
between two zero passages or overflows, resulting from the capacity of the
register and the maximum power of the meter. It is defined and long familiar
in most countries. Any deviations specific to the country are noted however.
The resolution of the energy registers adapted to the maximum demand of

the meter can be seen from the following table.
Maximum Demand The maximum demand Pmax is calculated as follows for three-phase
Pmax meters:
Pmax = 3 . 1.15 . Up-n . Imax
or
Pmax = √3 . 1.15 . Up-p . Imax
Where Up-n = phase-zero voltage

Up-p = phase-phase voltage (linked)
Imax = maximum current of transformer, usually 120% In
Example:
ZxG410.. 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A

Pmax = 3 . 1.15 . 230 V . 120 A = 95 kW
Register resolution 0,000,000 kWh
Pmax Energy Decadic Demand Decadic

reading reading
Resolution constant Resolution constant
50 ... 500 W 0'000.000 kWh No 0.0000 kW No
500 W ... 5 kW 00'000.00 kWh No 0.000 kW No

5 ... 50 kW 000'000.0 kWh No 00.00 kW No
50 ... 500 kW 0'000'000 kWh No 000.0 kW No
500 kW ... 5 MW 00'000'000 kWh No 0000 kW No
(0'000'000 kWh) (x10)
5 ... 50 MW 000'000.0 MWh No 00.00 MW No
50 ... 500 MW 0'000'000 MWh No 000.0 MW No
500 ... 2500 MW 00'000'000 MWh No 0000 MW No
Instead of .W. also for .var. and .VA.

Mains 33/390
Energy Unit The resolution also applies to reactive and apparent energy, i.e. to
 kvarh/Mvarh
 kVAh/MVAh
Register Resolution Register resolution is produced from the minimum overflow time with
and Overflow Time maximum demand at the meter. This overflow time is specified in most
countries and in Germany for example lies between 1 and 10 years, in
Switzerland between 2 and 20 years. The upper limit prevents a too low
resolution.
Version P max Register resolution Overflow time
10(40) A single-ph. 10 kW 000'000.0 kWh 11.5 years
10(60) A 48 kW 000'000.0 kWh 2.5 years
5(100) A 80 kW 0'000'000 kWh 14 years
100/5 A 95 kW 0'000'000 kWh 12 years
500/5 A 485 kW 0'000'000 kWh 2.5 years
1500/5 A 1450 kW 00'000'000 kWh 8 years
Nominal voltage Register content

Overflow time = in years
230/400 V P max 8760 h/a
The register contents necessary for the calculation is obtained by placing a

1 before the digits for the register:
e.g. 10,000,000 kWh for a register with 0,000,000 kWh
As can be seen from the above diagram, the 7-digit energy register can
cover the majority of low voltage applications. Exceptions are current
transformers with 600 or 800 A nominal primary current, for which an 8-digit
register is necessary.
Energy Consumption Also with energy consumption (recording over the billing or reset period)
the minimum transit time must basically be noted. This corresponds to the
billing period, however, usually one month and is therefore significantly
shorter than the several years for recording as status.
The utility could therefore suitably adapt the register resolution,

corresponding to an approx. 10 times higher resolution.
The accuracy of the meter, however, makes a too high resolution pointless.
If, e.g. the meter records 12,000 kWh per year, it measures an average
1,000 kWh per month. A meter of class 1 (IEC) or class B (MID) has a
measuring uncertainty of around ±0.2%. It can therefore only accurately
record the 1,000 kWh per month to an accuracy ±2 kWh, i.e. an additional
decimal point is not ensured.

34/390 Mains
For energy consumption over one month, it is recommended that you select
the same register resolution as for the energy status.
For energy consumption for a week a 10 times greater resolution makes

sense. In the example above, this would be one decimal point
(0000.0 kWh).
Energy Advance Energy advance takes place during the capture period of a load profile,
which can lie between 1 and 60 minutes. In this case, the resolution should
be adjusted to the max. demand at the meter as for the demand registers.
The maximum possible content of the advance register is calculated from
Energy advance = maximum demand x capture period.
On the other hand, the accuracy must also be taken into account here,
which limits the length of the register (number of digits). Since the
measuring uncertainty of the meters is of the order of ±0.1%, it requires at
least 4 to maximum 6 digits.
Example:
ZxG410xR 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A

Caption period 15 min
Maximum demand 3 x 1.15 x 230 V x 120 A = approx. 95 kW
Energy advance 95 kW x 0.25 h = approx. 25 kWh
Measuring uncertainty maximum ±0.025 kWh
Register resolution recommended 00.000 kWh
2.2.2 Ampere-Hour Register

The resolution of the ampere-hour register (significance of last visible digit)
basically depends on the maximum current of the meter. The capacity of
the register must be sufficiently large to prevent overflow within the reading
period. The resolution of the register, however, should also not be too high.

Mains 35/390
2.2.3 Demand Registers
Structure
The demand register has a total of 8 digits, 4 of which are decimal places.
Two demand units are then available as for energy:
 kWh
For all applications at the low voltage level in the fields of commerce
and industry.
 MWh
For applications at medium and high voltage together with primary
data.
Register Resolution The resolution of the demand registers (significance of last visible digit)
basically depends on the maximum power at the meter. The capacity of the
register must be sufficiently large to ensure no overflow. The resolution of
the register should also not be too small. In most countries it is defined and
long familiar. Any deviations specific to the country are noted however.
The register resolution matched to the maximum power of the meter can be
seen from the following table. The number of digits of the register for Prunning
and Pmax 4 is taken as example.
Display/readout The registers for Prunning and Pmax comprise 4 digits, the register Pmax
cumulated 6 digits. Of these up to 3, with 5 digits up to 4, decimal places
can usually be present. The value of the last digit, i.e. the register
resolution, depends on the maximum demand of the meter and on the
choice of power unit (kW or MW), as shown below.
The 4 digits for Prunning and Pmax are matched to the accuracy of the meter.
A meter measuring uncertainty of 0.1% already limits the value of the 4th
digit and makes the 5th digit useless. An uncertainty of this kind, however,
is entirely possible with electronic meters.

36/390 Mains
The 5-digit register is mainly provided for transformer meters with /100 V
and /1 A. Their maximum secondary output is around 200 W, which can be
displayed with a sufficiently high resolution with 5 digits and 4 decimal
places.
Overflow with The overflow of the Pmax cumulated register takes place at the highest digit
Pmax Cumulated set by the parameterisation, i.e. higher digits remain at zero. If the register
has 3 digits and 1 decimal place, for example, 1,000 units (kW or MW) are
required for an overflow from 999.9 to 000.0. The 4th place then remains at
zero and is not increased by 1.
2.3 Transmission of Valency Pulses

E550 meters have 2, 4, 6 or none output contacts. The utility can
parameterise these freely as
 Pulse output: transmission contact for valency pulses of a measured

quantity
 Static output: output of an internally generated control signal
 Energy direction output: energy direction contact
For transmission of valency pulses the utility determines
 The measured quantity, whereby it concerns one of the

parameterised measured quantities, and
 The pulse constant or pulse weight (valency)
Pulse Constant The pulse constant or pulse valency must be adapted to the maximum
possible pulse frequency, which results in turn from the pulse length and
from the conditions of the pulse receiver.
While the conditions of the pulse receiver must be taken into account
individually and therefore for the specific case, the pulse length represents
a calculable limit. Since the pulse interval (between 2 pulses) must be
equal to or greater than the pulse length, the maximum pulse frequency
results from the reciprocal of double the pulse length.
Examples:
Pulse length Min. pulse interval Max. pulse frequency

20 ms 20 ms 25 Hz
40 ms 40 ms 12.5 Hz
80 ms 80 ms 6.25 Hz
200 ms 200 ms 2.5 Hz
The pulse length can vary between 20 ms and 200 ms, but is usually 40 or
80 ms.

Mains 37/390
Calculation of The maximum pulse constant Ki max is calculated as follows:

Constant Ki
fmax x 3600
Ki max = ———————
Pmax
Where fmax Maximum pulse frequency

Pmax Maximum power at the meter
Example:
ZxG410 3 x 230/400 V 100/5 A

Pulse length 40 ms fmax = 12.5 Hz
Pmax = 3 x 1.15 x 230 V x 120 A = approx. 95 kW
Ki max = 12.5 x 3600/95 = 474 imp/kWh
Selected 200 imp/kWh
Significance 5 Wh/imp

38/390 Mains
2.4 Optical Test Outputs

The optical test outputs are located on the face plate below the LCD. They
are used to test the meter and send visible red pulses for active energy and
in combimeters also for reactive energy.
Active energy meters are equipped with one optical test output for active
energy only. Combimeters are equipped with two optical test outputs, one
for active and one for reactive energy.
Normal Mode In the normal operating mode, the optical test output on the right signals
active energy while the optical test output on the left signals reactive
energy (combimeters only).
Test Mode The right-hand test diode, which usually indicates the pulses of active
energy, can be changed over to one of the parameterised measured
quantities with the aid of a formatted command. This permits meter testing
to be performed with only one scanning head and in an automatic
sequence.
The formatted commands can be used both with IEC as well as with dlms
communication. They switch on the test mode simultaneously, unless this is
already switched on.
Depending on the parameter setting of the behaviour of the pulse LED, test
mode allows you to select which measuring value (active, reactive, I², U²) is
shown on the optical test output.

Mains 39/390
In the display, values for active, reactive and apparent energy are available.
Depending on the parameter setting, the resolution of the display register
can be increased for faster testing. In the test mode, the resolution is
increased by one decimal point compared to the normal mode. A maximum
of 4 decimal points is possible.
2.5 Parameterisation of Measuring System

2.5.1 Meters for Secondary Data
Meters for secondary data automatically take over the secondary values for
voltage and current from the software configuration parameters. The
maximum current, however, can be modified according to the maximum
current of the current transformer, if required.
Imax From the drop-down list, select the maximum current Imax.
Measurement The MAP tool calculates the measurement system data on the basis of the
System Data configuration data and of the secondary data.
After the voltage and current data entries have been completed, the
software calculates the nominal and maximum power which you need for
the definition of the register resolution.
The secondary meter constant R2 must be set in the configuration (see

section 1.2 “Configuration of Measuring Unit”).

40/390 Mains
2.5.2 Meter for Primary Values

The primary value adaptation parameters describe the primary and
secondary values of the voltage/current transformers the meter is
connected to.
The primary data must only be defined if a transformer-connected meter

(ZxG400) has been selected in the configuration (see section 1.2
“Configuration of Measuring Unit”).
Primary values according to transformers

 If meters for primary values are used, these data must be entered
according to the values of the current and voltage transformers.
Voltage Ratio To define the voltage ratio set the tick and enter the primary voltage U1 and
the secondary voltage U2 of the voltage transformer. The entered values
always represent the phase-to-phase voltage.
To obtain the phase voltage, the phase-to-phase voltage must be divided

by √3.
Enter the primary voltage with a maximum value of 999,999 V. The primary
power must not exceed 10,000 MVA.
For the secondary voltage, select a value from the drop-down list or enter a
value within the voltage range selected in the hardware configuration menu
(see section 1.2 “Configuration of Measuring Unit”).
The voltage transformer ratio U1/U2 is calculated automatically.
Current Ratio

Mains 41/390
Enter the nominal value of the primary current I1 and select the maximum
current Imax (6 or 10 A at I2 = 5 A). The secondary current I2 of the current
transformer is defined by the configuration.
The available primary current range is 100 A to 65,535 A. Note that primary
currents higher than 1500 A are rare.
The current transformer ratio I1/I2 is calculated automatically.
Imax Select the maximum current Imax from the drop-down list.
Primary /Secondary Generally, meter for primary values display the billing relevant data always
Data related to the primary transformer values.
The only exception to this is a limited amount of energy tariff registers and
the instantaneous values for voltage and current which are always related
to the secondary values.
Measurement System The MAP120 calculates the measurement system data according to the
Data entered primary and secondary data.
Once you have entered the current data, the software calculates the
transformer ratio, the nominal and maximum primary power as well as the
primary meter constant.
If primary values have been entered, MAP120 calculates the primary meter
constant R1. The secondary meter constant R2 must be set in the
configuration (see section 1.2 “Configuration of Measuring Unit”).

42/390 Mains
2.5.3 Format of Registers

In order to ensure correct energy registration (e.g. no early overflow of
energy register), the register resolution must be set according to the
maximum primary power.
The register resolution may be set independently for the following registers:
 Cumulated energy register in normal operating mode

 Cumulated energy register in test mode
 Delta energy register in normal operating mode
 Delta energy register in test mode
 Ampere-hour register in normal operating mode
 Ampere-hour register in test mode
 Current average demand and maximum demand register
 Cumulative maximum demand
To define the register resolution, select the scaler, the number of digits and
the decimal places for the corresponding register (see also section 2.2
“Choice of Correct Register Resolution”).

Measured Quantities 43/390
3 Measured Quantities
3.1 Measuring System
3.1.1 Block Schematic Diagram
Inputs The left-hand side shows the E550 inputs:
 Connections for phase voltages (U1, U2, U3), phase currents

(I1, I2, I3) and for neutral connector N:
– For the processing by the measuring system and
– For the three-phase power supply
A voltage monitor ensures correct operation and reliable data recovery
in the event of a voltage interruption and correct restarting when the
voltage is restored.
 2 or 4 control inputs for changeover of energy and maximum rates,
for external resetting and demand limiting or synchronisation of the
calendar clock.
 Opto-couplers protect by galvanic isolation the following circuit from
interference, which could otherwise penetrate via the control inputs.
 Remote control signals for tariffication or for passing on to devices
outside the meter.
 Buttons for the control of the display (display button, optical
interface) as well as the reset or execution of service functions
(reset key).
Measuring System Three measuring elements in the proven DFS technology (Direct Field
Sensor based on the Hall Effect) generate digital signals per phase from
the phase voltage applied and the phase current flowing and multiply these
to digital signals proportional to the power in each phase.

44/390 Measured Quantities
Signal Processing The digital voltage, current and power signals are passed to the following
signal processor, which from these produces the digital output signals and
mean values over one second:
 Active energy per phase

 With combimeters also reactive energy per phase
 Phase voltages (RMS values)
 Phase currents (RMS values)
 Phase angles
 Mains frequency
 Power factors cosφ
 Etc.
Signal Exploitation For signal exploitation purposes, the microprocessor calculates the
following measured quantities every second:
 Active energy (sum and individual phases, separated according to

energy direction)
 Phase voltages as RMS values
 Phase currents as RMS values
 Neutral current as RMS values vectorially from the phase currents
 Phase angles: voltage-voltage and voltage-current
 Direction of phase sequence
 Mains frequency
 Total distortion level (TDL in %) per phase and for all phases
 Energy losses (line and transformer)
In addition, for the combimeters ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR:
 Reactive energy (sum and individual phases, separated according

to energy direction, assigned to the 4 quadrants)
 Apparent energy (sum and individual phases, separated according
to energy direction from active and reactive energy or from RMS
values)
 Power factors cosφ, individual phases and average value
 Measurement method for reactive power: Q2=S2-P2 (Class 2 only)
For the test outputs, it forms pulses of fixed energy corresponding to the
meter constant.
Tariffication For the subsequent tariffication, E550 meters form up to 15 (P05) or 19

(P06) measuring values from the various measured quantities and
processes these in the following registers for tariffication and billing:
 15 total registers, 12 for total energy, 3 for total ampère-hours or 19

total registers (ZMG400 only), 12 for total energy, 3 for total
ampère-hours and 4 for losses.
 24 energy rate registers to form energy rates (firmware version P05)
(only 8 for active energy meters and 16 for combimeters with
firmware versions up to P04) or up to 48 energy registers (Extended
Functional range in firmware version P06)

 8 registers for average demand in the last integrating period

 8 (firmware version P05) or 24 (firmware version P06) maximum
registers to form demand rates
 2 registers for power factor minimum (combimeters only)
 1 register for power factor average during the billing period
(combimeters only)
Rate Control Rate control is performed:
 Externally via control inputs (up to 4)

 Externally via remote control signals (up to 8)
 Internally by time switch (tariff control, demand inhibition). A
combined internal and external control is possible if suitably
configured.
 Internally by event signals from fraud detection and monitoring
functions.
Outputs The right-hand side of the diagram shows the meter outputs:
 LCD, controlled by the display key or via the optical interface

(torch/flashlight)
– For local reading of billing data
– With an 8-digit display of data and additional information, such
as energy direction, presence of phase voltages and currents,
phase sequence, alert signals, present rates, etc.
 Optical (serial) interface
– For automatic local data acquisition by suitable acquisition unit
– For performance of service functions including setting operating
data
– For re-parameterisation of the meter
 One or two independent interfaces for remote data transmission:
– Electrical Interface 1: none, RS232, RS485 or powered RS232
(with power on same connector for power supply to an external
modem located under the terminal cover)
– Electrical Interface 2: none, CS, RS485 or RS422
 Up to 6 output contacts (solid-state relays) for transmission of
– Fixed valency pulses or
– Control signals and status messages
 Optionally one non-latching 5 A relay for load control
 1 or 2 test (LED) outputs for meter testing

Power Supply The supply voltages for the meter electronics are derived from the three-
phase network. The phase voltages can vary over the entire voltage range
(3 x 58/100 ... 3 x 277/480 V) without having to adjust the supply voltage. A
voltage monitor ensures correct operation and reliable data recovery in the
event of a voltage interruption and correct restarting when the voltage is
restored.
A non-volatile memory secures the device software, as well as the billing

data in the event of voltage failure.
Fraud Detection If released in the configuration, the meter has various functions with regard
to fraud detection:
 Hardware-specific, e.g. terminal cover opened, strong magnetic field

present, etc.
 firmware-specific, e.g. current without voltage, phase failure, etc.
3.2 Measuring Principle

3.2.1 Signal Generation
Current Sensor E550 meters utilise the Hall effect directly for current measurement. For
this purpose, a corresponding element is incorporated in the measuring
chip of the DFS (Direct Field Sensor), which detects the magnetic field of
the phase current and from this generates a signal proportional to the
current. The magnetic field itself is produced by the current loop through
which the phase current flows. The following analogue-digital converter
then generates a digital current signal. A magnetic screen protects the
measuring system from extraneous fields.
Voltage Sensor The DFS accepts the phase voltage applied from a voltage divider. Its
output voltage is similarly immediately converted to a digital voltage signal
by the following analogue-digital converter.
Signal Generation

The signals proportional to active and reactive power in the individual

phases are then generated by the digital signal processor (DSP), which
takes as inputs the digital signals of voltage and current. The instantaneous
active and reactive powers Px and Qx are then fed to the signal processing
module, together with the instantaneous values of voltage and current, for
further processing. The DSP provides very fast output of the power values,
which reduces meter testing times significantly compared with earlier
versions.
3.2.2 Signal Processing
The microprocessor first calculates from active power Px, reactive power
Qx, voltage Ux and current Ix the following:
 Apparent power Sx.

 True RMS values of voltages Ux and currents Ix.
 Mains frequency fn.
 Phase angles: voltage–voltage and voltage–current.
It then forms energy units (pulses) from the powers with fixed clock
frequency and variable amplitude proportional to power, and the mean
values of the remaining quantities, such as voltage, current, mains
frequency, etc. by integration over one second. These form the measured
quantities of the meter, from which the measuring values are then obtained.

3.2.3 Measured Quantities

The signal processing supplies the following measured quantities:
Sum values:
Active energy AΣ
Active power Instantaneous value P
Reactive energy R
Reactive power Instantaneous value Q
Reactive energy per quadrant +Ri/–Ri and +Rc/–Rc
Apparent energy VA
Apparent power Instantaneous value S
Line losses of active energy OLA (firmware version P06

ZMG400 only)
Transformer losses of active energy NLA (firmware version P06

ZMG400 only)
Current square hours I2h (firmware version P06 ZMG400

only)
Voltage square hours U2h (firmware version P06

ZMG400 only)
Mean value of phases:
Power factor cosφ (mean value of phases)
Values of the individual phases:
Active energies A1, A2, A3
Active powers Instantaneous value P1, P2, P3
Reactive energies R1, R2, R3
Reactive powers Instantaneous value Q1, Q2, Q3
Reactive energies per quadrant +Rix/–Rix and +Rcx/–Rcx
Apparent energies VA1, VA2, VA3
Apparent powers Instantaneous value S1, S2, S3
Power factors cosφ1, cosφ2, cosφ3
Phase voltages U1, U2, U3
Phase currents I1,I2, I3

Neutral current IN
Mains frequency fn
Phase angles voltage-voltage φu1-u1, φu1-u2, φu1-u3
Phase angles voltage-current φu1-i1, φu1-i2, φu1-i3 or

φu1-i1, φu2-i2, φu3-i3
Ampere-hours Ah1, Ah2, Ah3
The possible measured quantities differ with regard to type of consumption

(active only or active and reactive) as shown in the following tables.
Active Energy Meters Normal measured quantities with regard to active energy.
ZMG310AR/ZxG400AR
Measured quantity
Active energy import +A Sum/Phases
Active energy export –A Sum/Phases
Power factor cosφ Phases/Mean value
Active power P Sum/Phases
Phase voltages U L1 – L2 – L3
Phase currents I L1 – L2 – L3
Neutral current IN Yes
Mains frequency fn Yes
Phase angle voltages φu-u U1 – U1/U2/U3
Phase angle voltage-current φu-i U1 – I1/I2/I3 or
U1 – I1, U2 – I2, U3 –
I3
Direction of phase sequence Yes
Ampère-hours Ah L1, L2, L3
Line losses of active energy
OLA
(ZMG400 only)
Transformer losses of active energy
NLA
(ZMG400 only)
Current square hours (ZMG400 only) I2h
Voltage square hours (ZMG400 only) U2h
Total distortion level (TDL) TDL [%] Sum/Phases

Combimeters Normal measured quantities with regard to active, reactive and apparent
ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR energy.
Measured quantity
Active energy import +A Sum/Phases
Active energy export –A Sum/Phases
Reactive energy positive +R Sum/Phases
Reactive energy negative –R Sum/Phases
Reactive energy 1st quadrant +Ri Sum/Phases
Reactive energy 2nd quadrant –Rc Sum/Phases
Reactive energy 3rd quadrant –Ri Sum/Phases
Reactive energy 4th quadrant +Rc Sum/Phases
Apparent energy import +VA Sum/Phases
Apparent energy export –VA Sum/Phases
Power factor cosφ Phases/Mean value
Active energy P Sum/Phases
Reactive energy Q Sum/Phases
Apparent energy S Sum/Phases
Phase voltages U L1 – L2 – L3
Phase currents I L1 – L2 – L3
Neutral current IN Yes
Mains frequency fn Yes
Phase angle voltages φu-u U1 – U1/U2/U3
Phase angle voltage-current φu-i U1 – I1/I2/I3 or
U1 – I1, U2 – I2, U3 –
I3
Direction of phase sequence Yes
Ampère hours Ah L1, L2, L3
Line losses of active energy
OLA
(ZMG400 only)
Transformer losses of active energy
NLA
(ZMG400 only)
Current square hours (ZMG400 only) I2h
Voltage square hours (ZMG400 only) U2h
Total distortion level (TDL) TDL [%] Sum/Phases
Since the ZMG meter measures each phase independently with one
measuring element each, it can record the sum of the three phases and the
individual phases themselves.

3.3 Individual Measuring Quantities

3.3.1 Energy Recording
Recording of the single-phase energy is performed in two stages:
The instantaneous, single-phase values of power Px are produced by

multiplying the instantaneous, single phase values of voltage and current.
An integrator then forms energy components during an integration interval

of 1 second from the single-phase demand values.
The resulting values are energy portions with a fixed interval (one second)
and varying amount (e.g. Wh).
Energy parts
Height of example ZMG400
energy parts 0.01 A 0.002 Wh
dependent on 0.1 A 0.02 Wh
power
1A 0.2 Wh
fixed step
6A 1.2 Wh
frequency
Time between 2 parts : 1 s
1s
3.3.2 Active Energy
Input Micro- Signal

signals
A
A L1
A L2
processor A L3 processing
+A
A1
Calculation
P1 -A R / VA
Signal scanning every second
of sum
for quadrants
Apparent power
Integration
P2 A2 Power factor
to energy
parts Ax
Calculation
of phases
P3 A3
The single-phase active powers Px are produced directly in the sensor of

the measuring system. This is followed by integration to active energy
components for one second.
For the following signal processing, the processor forms the sum of the
individual phases according to the selected calculation method:
 Vectorial summation +A/–A

 Summation by quantity Σ |+A Lx|/Σ |–A Lx|
 Summation of amounts Σ |A Lx|

 Addition (import + export) |+A| + |–A|

 Subtraction (import – export) |+A| – |–A|
It can also separate the individual phase values into +A Lx and –A Lx or
record over all 4 quadrants (addition/subtraction).
Calculation of Sum ΣA E550 meters have various forms of summation:
Vectorial +A/–A As in Ferraris meters, the meter summates the values of the individual
phases taking account of the sign. With differing signs (energy directions)
the sum corresponds to the difference between the positive and negative
values (see following example).
A1
A2
A3
wrongly connected
real consumption
+A
-A
If one phase is connected wrong (input and output exchanged), the meter
measures only about one third of the real energy consumption.
In the following example, phase 3 is connected inversed. The sum remains

positive as long as phase L1 and L2 can compensate phase L3.

By Quantity Σ+A/Σ–A Summation by quantity separates the positive from the negative values of
the individual phases. +A therefore only includes the positive values (+A1
and +A3 in example 1), –A only the negative values (–A2 in example 1),
provided any are present.
A1
A2
A3
wrongly connected
real consumption
+A
-A
In case of a connection error the meter measures correctly the real energy
consumption. It also measures a real export in the correct way.
The same example as above gives a clearly different result here. The sum
from  +A and  –A corresponds to the actual consumption, but is only
produced outside the meter.
Individual Amounts
Σ |A Lx|
A1
A2
A3
wrongly connected
real consumption
A Lx
This method summates the quantity of the individual phases independent of

the energy direction. A connection error – however – has no effect to the
result of measurement.
But if there occurs a real export in one phase, the measurement result of
the meter would be wrong with this method.

Addition |+A| + |–A| With this method the meter adds an exported energy to the imported. It
prevents the meter recording negative energy (sum of the 3 phases) and
subtracting it from the import. Also this method cannot detect a connection
error.
It primarily serves to determine the energy direction.
A1
A2
A3
real consumption in case

+A + - A
of wrong connection
+A
+A - - A
-A
Subtraction |+A| – |–A| With this method the meter subtracts an exported energy from the
imported. It cannot detect a connection error.
3.3.3 Reactive Energy

To permit the formation of energy components of the reactive energy Qx,
the processor rotates the instantaneous values of the voltage u and current
i before multiplication by +45° and -45°, calculates from this the reactive
energy per phase and integrates this over 1 second.
For the following signal processing, the processor forms the sum of the
individual phases according to the selected calculation method:
 Per quadrant +Ri (QI), –Rc (QIV), –Ri (QIII), +Rc (QII)
 Positive reactive energy +R from quadrant I and II
Negative reactive energy –R from quadrant III and IV
 Addition (positive + negative) |+R| + |–R|
 Subtraction (positive – negative) |+R| + |–R|
 Related to active energy +A +R from quadrant I and IV
Related to active energy –A –R from quadrant II and III

Whenever possible, the meter should record reactive energy separately for
the 4 quadrants. Only in this way is a correct billing of the reactive energy
possible (ratio of reactive to active energy). +R records quadrants I and II
together, –R quadrants III and IV. Quadrants I and IV, however, belong to
the import +A, quadrants II and III to the export –A.
+R and –R are useful for passing on the valency pulses.
The addition is mainly used for the detection of the energy direction.
F-circuit
 With F-circuit (only available with firmware version P04), only the sums of
+R and -R are calculated.
Allocation to the Four Based on the signs of A and R the microprocessor allocates the active and
Quadrants reactive energy to the four quadrants:
4 Quadrant measurement
+R
+ kvarh +Rc +Ri + kvarh
Quadrant II Quadrant I
Export Import
-A +A
- kWh Quadrant III Quadrant IV + kWh
-Ri -Rc
- kvarh - kvarh
-R

Calculated vectorial The instantaneous value of reactive power is calculated using the values of
(not recommended) active power and apparent power. Reactive power is the square root of the
square value of apparent power minus the square value of active power:
3.3.4 Apparent Energy

The processor can calculate the apparent energy in the following two ways:
 By multiplication of the single-phase RMS values of current and

voltage I1RMS x U1RMS, I2RMS x U2RMS and I3RMS x U3RMS
 By vectorial addition from active and reactive energy Px and Qx
Calculation of apparent energy is only provided with combimeters
ZMG310CR and ZxG400CR.
Calculation from RMS Input Micro-

signals
+VA
+VA1
+VA2
+VA3
- VA1
- VA
- VA2
- VA3
Values processor
U1 U2 I2 VA1 Signal scanning every second +-

I1
+/-VA1
S = U rms. Irms
U2 VA2
Integration +-
I2 
to energy +/-VA2
parts VAx
U3 VA3
+-
I3
+/-VA3
For the following signal processing the processor forms the sum of the
individual phases separately according to energy direction +VA and –VA
and also separates the individual phase values to +VAx and –VAx.
F-circuit
+VA and -VA are calculated.

Calculation from Input Micro-

signals
+VA
+VA3
+VA1
+VA2
- VA
- VA3
- VA1
- VA2
Active and Reactive processor
Energy
Calculation A1
U1
from P and Q A2

I1 
S = A2 + R 2
IQ I
A3
S1 = A12 + R12
U2  R1
IP U R2
S2 = A2 2 + R2 2
I2

P = U.I.cos R3
S3 = A3 2 + R3 2
U3 Q = U.I.sin
I3
Integration
to energy
parts
Ax and Rx
Further possible measured quantities for reactive energy:
Quadrant 1 VA QI
Quadrant 3 VA QIII
F-circuit
+VA and -VA are calculated.
3.3.5 Power Factor
Input Micro-
signals
cos 1
cos 2
cos 3
processor
cos
A1
U1 P = U. I.cos A1
A2
I1 Q = U.I.sin  A2
IQ A3
I A3
Mean value
U2  A
R1 cos  =
I2 VA
IP U
R2 A
VA =
S = Urms . Irms A2+ R 2 VA1
R3
U3 VA2
oder
I3 Integration VA1 VA3
to energy A
parts VA2 VA =
Urms .Irms
Ax, Rx and VAx VA3
The processor determines the power factor from active and reactive
energy. It uses the apparent energy according to the method of calculation
defined. The minimum power factor can be selected with respect to energy
direction, either import with +A and +VA or export with –A and –VA.

Measurement of power factor is only possible with combimeters. The meter

provides the following values:
 Instantaneous values for each phase and as mean value of all

phases
 Mean value and minimum value of integration period
 Mean value of billing period
The instantaneous values of power factor are only available on the display
and in the readout. The mean value of integration period, however, can be
saved in a load profile, the minimum value and the mean value of billing
period in the stored values profile.
F-circuit
 With F-circuit (only available with firmware version P04), only the mean
values are provided.
3.3.6 Instantaneous Values of Voltage and Current
URMS, IRMS For the instantaneous values of current and voltage the processor
multiplies the relevant values with themselves and then extracts the root.
This provides the corresponding single-phase RMS values URMS and IRMS.
The voltages and currents of the individual phases are available as

diagnosis values on the display and in the readout. In addition, the utility
can record them in a load profile as mean values during the capture period.
Neutral Current The measurement processor calculates the instantaneous value for the
(Only M-Circuit) neutral current i0 by adding the instantaneous phase currents i1, i2 and i3.

3.3.7 Mains Frequency

The measurement processor measures the time between two passages
through zero (change from a negative to a positive value of voltage U1) and
from this calculates the mains frequency. The time between two zero
passages also serves as a reference with a phase angle of 360°.
U1
T fn
Load profile
monitoring
1 Display
fn = Readout
T fn
3.3.8 Phase Angles

The meter calculates phase angles between voltages and between currents
and voltages.
Phase Angle U-U The phase angles between voltages are determined clockwise by the times
between the zero passage of phase voltage U1 and those of the other
phase voltages U2 and U3. All phase angles are shown as positive values.
The angles are shown as U1-U1 = 0°, U2-U1 = 120° and U3-U1 = 240°.
From Series 2, it is possible to determine the phase angle U-U clockwise

(see section 14.3 “Calculation of Phase Current Angle”, according to the
ANSI standard) as shown above, but also counter clockwise according to
the IEC standard).
Phase Angle U-U according to the IEC standard (Series 2 only)
In the latter case, the phase angles between voltages are determined
counter clockwise by the times between the zero passage of phase voltage
U1 and those of the other phase voltages U2 and U3. All phase angles are
shown as positive values.

In this case, the angles are shown as U1-U1 = 0°, U2-U1 = 240° and U3-U1
= 120°.
Phase Angle U-I The phase angles between voltage and current are calculated based on the
times between the zero passage of the phase voltage and the phase
currents. Voltage U1 is used as reference.
Depending on the parameterisation (see section 14.2 “Reference for Phase

Current Angle”), the phase angle between voltage and current may be
calculated in different ways.
All current angles The angles can be calculated according to ANSI (clockwise) or IEC
referenced to U1 (counter clockwise) depending on the parameterisation (see section 14.3
“Calculation of Phase Current Angle”).
According to ANSI
All current angles are displayed clockwise using the phase voltage U1 as
reference. The values of the angles are always positive and are between 0°
and 360°.
In this case, the angles are shown as I1-U1 = 30°, I2-U1 = 150° and I3-U1
= 270°.

According to IEC (Series 2 only)
All current angles are displayed counter clockwise using the phase voltage
U1 as reference. The values of the angles are always positive and are
between 0° and 360°.
In this case, the angles are shown as I1-U1 = 30°, I2-U1 = 270° and I3-U1
= 150°.
All current angles The angles can be calculated according to ANSI (clockwise) or IEC
referenced to their (counter clockwise) depending on the parameterisation (see section 14.3
phase voltages “Calculation of Phase Current Angle”).
According to ANSI
The phase angles between current and voltage always refer clockwise to
the voltage of the corresponding phase, i.e. I1-U1, I2-U2, I3-U3. The values
of the angles are always between -180° and +180°.
Reference: U of corresponding phase
In this case, the angles are shown as I1-U1 = 30°, I2-U2 = 30° and
I3-U3 = 30°.

According to IEC (Series 2 only)
The phase angles between current and voltage always refer counter
clockwise to the voltage of the corresponding phase, i.e. I1-U1, I2-U2, I3-
U3. The values of the angles are always between -180° and +180°.
In this case, the angles are shown as I1-U1 = 30°, I2-U1 = 30° and I3-U1 =
30°.
Installation Check Together with phase voltages, phase currents and instantaneous active
for ZMG and reactive power, phase angles provide valuable data for the installation
check when adding a meter to the network. The utility can also request this
meter data at any time later on to gain an impression of the situation at the
measuring point. The vector diagram produced with .MAP110 serves this
purpose.
Note: ZFG meters do not feature this function to display angles.
Direction of Phase The direction of phase sequence is calculated based on the phase angles
Sequence between voltages. If the phase angle between voltages U1 and U2 is larger
than the angle between voltages U1 and U3, the phase sequence has a
positive direction of rotation, otherwise the direction of rotation is negative.

3.3.9 Total Distortion Level (TDL)

Total distortion level provides the following functions (from firmware version
P06):
 The calculation of the total and per phase values of the distortion
level in percent.
 Total and per phase diagnostic values can be captured in the load
profiles and in the display and readout lists.
In P06, we support the calculation of the total and per phase values of the
distortion power level in percentage according to the equation:
Total Power TDL is only

calculated for
Distortion Power
values >10%.
Distortion Level Zero will be shown
for values <10%.
Total Distortion Level (TDL) indicates the differences in harmonics between
the V and I channel. In typical applications, it more or less corresponds to
|THD_I − THD_V|. These differences in the harmonics of the measurement
channels are typically caused by the end-user, whereas equal harmonics
are usually supplied from the mains to a resistive load.
n= number of harmonics
THD = Total Harmonic Distortion
Total and per phase TDL values are available. They can be captured in the
load profiles as well as in the display and readout lists.

3.3.10 Losses (ZMG400 only)

Depending on the metering point in the network, the meter does not only
measure the net energy that is transferred from the power station to the
user but also the line losses (caused by copper resistance RCu) and the
transformer losses (caused by iron resistance RFe).
Line losses are caused by the copper resistance RCu of the transmission
line. Copper resistance only occurs when there is a load and therefore
current is actually flowing.
 On Load Active (OLA) for line losses of active energy

Transformer losses represent all losses of the transformer. They are mainly
caused by the iron core of the transformer. Transformer losses (equivalent
resistance RFe) are present whenever the transformer is connected to the
network.
 No Load Active (NLA) for transformer losses of active energy
Based on the IRMS and URMS values, the microprocessor generates the
following measured quantities:
OLA On Load Active. Line (copper) losses of active energy.

OLA = I2h x RCu. The value of RCu can be set by
parameterisation.
NLA No Load Active. Transformer (iron) losses of active
energy.
NLA = U2h / RFe. The value of RFe can be set by
parameterisation.
I2h (Cu) Ampere square hours (with RCu = 1)
U2h (Fe) Voltage square hours (with RFe = 1 M)

3.4 Parameterisation of Measured Quantities
Calculation of Select whether the apparent energy is calculated based on geometric

Apparent Energy addition of active and reactive energy (vectorial) or by multiplying the true
RMS values of voltage and current.
Rotating Field Select the correct sense of rotation of the rotating field: rotating right
Direction (clockwise) or rotating left.
If the rotating field does not comply with the direction defined here, the
display indicator flashes.
Power Factor Select whether the power factor minimum is related to import (+A and +VA)
Energy Direction or export (–A und –VA). For this parameter setting, you have to set a tick at
“Power Factor Energy Direction”.
Automatic allocation
If the power factor measurement has been activated in the configuration,
the MAP120 allocates the measured quantities in the following way:
 +A ME1, –A ME2, +VA or –VA ME8.
Moreover, the MAP tool does not allow an additional allocation of the same
measured quantity to another ME number.

Ampere-Hour Register The measured quantities ME13, ME14 and ME15 only appear if fraud
detection has been activated in the configuration.
Losses ME16 OLA and ME17 NLA are only available in ZMG400 meters. ME18 I2
(Cu) and ME19 U2 (Fe) are only available in ZMG400 meters.
Calculation of Select whether the instantaneous value of reactive power Q is calculated

Reactive Energy using the values of active power and apparent power (“calculated
vectorial”) or whether measured values are used (“measured”).
If calculated vectorial is chosen, apparent power is forced to be calculated

as RMS.
After enabling “Extended Reactive Energy Calculation” in the Configuration

dialog, you cannot use a wide voltage power supply. In the Measured
Quantities pane, you can then choose to use calculated vectorial values or
not. Power Factor and Total Distortion Level calculations are not available
when this method is in use.
Defining a Measured Activate all measured quantities that you would like to have available for
Quantity the display, the communication, the transmitting contact and for tariffication.
In the MAP tool, each measured quantity is represented by an ME number.
You may select a maximum of 15 (P05) or 19 (P06) measured quantities to
be processed by the meter. ME1 to ME12 are freely parameterisable for
active, reactive or apparent energy, ME13 to ME15 are permanently
assigned to Ampère-hours Ah1, Ah2, Ah3, and ME16 to ME19 measure
losses.
To define a measured quantity, set a tick at the required ME number to

activate it and set the following parameters:

Processing From the drop-down list, select the type of energy to be processed: active
energy, reactive energy or apparent energy.
Quadrants From the drop-down list, select the quadrant(s) that are taken into
consideration:
 +A (QI + QIV)
 –A (QII + QIII)
 |+A| + |–A| (|QI + +QIV| + |QII + +QIII|
 |+A| – |–A| (|QI + +QIV| – |QII + +QIII|
 |AL1| + |AL2| + |AL3|
4 Quadrant measurement
+R
+ kvarh +Rc +Ri + kvarh
Quadrant II Quadrant I
Export Import
-A +A
- kWh Quadrant III Quadrant IV + kWh
-Ri -Rc
- kvarh - kvarh
-R
Phases From the drop-down list, select which phase(s) are taken into consideration
for this measured quantity: L1, L2, L3 or all phases.
Reverse Stop This point is only shown if the energy type is set to active energy. Select
the type of reverse stop from the drop-down list:
 Over all phases (as Ferraris)

This corresponds to the vector addition +A/–A and can be selected
for +A from QI + QIV and for –A from QII + QIII.
 Per phase
This corresponds to the addition of the absolute values Σ |+A| / Σ |–
A| and can be selected for +A from QI + QIV and for –A from QII +
QIII.
 None
Only to be selected with |+A| + |–A| or |+A| – |–A|.

dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is a numerical code that serves as identification of
and ID String the measured value according to the OBIS standard. When defining a
measured value, a dlms logical name is automatically assigned to the
following measured values (registers):
 Energy Total (ETx)

 Current Average Demand (CADx)
 Last Average Demand (LADx)
With the left button, you can use this name also as a display code for the
display and read-out or you can enter a different one.
The display code appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC
readout. By default the display code corresponds to the dlms logical name
according to the OBIS standard. However, the users can set their own
display code for each register.

Ampere-Hour Registers 69/390
4 Ampere-Hour Registers
The three measured quantities Ah1, Ah2 and Ah3 for the individual phases
form the measured values ME13, ME14 and ME15. No change is possible
here.
Total Registers Each measured value is likewise assigned a fixed total register, which
continuously records the Ampère-hours corresponding to the phase current
present. The registers can be displayed and read out.
Voltage-Dependent Additionally, each measured value has a voltage-dependent register which

Registers only records the Ampère-hours if the associated phase voltage drops below
the undervoltage threshold and there is still a phase current (event current
without voltage).
These registers are mainly used to permit determination of the energy

consumption in the relevant phase in the event of current without voltage.
The case of current without voltage can occur above all in the ZxG400xR
meters for transformer connection if a fault or fraudulent intervention
interrupts the phase voltage. The meter can no longer measure the energy
in this phase.
This case can also occur in the directly connected ZMG310xR meters, if
the voltage input is interrupted by an internal fault or by fraudulent opening
of the voltage jumper.
The registers can likewise be displayed and read out.
Recording with Total With the aid of battery 1 the meter can also record the ampere-hours if the
Loss of Voltage meter is switched off owing to total loss of voltage (all phase voltages).
The meter no longer registers the currents each second but in longer
intervals to save battery power.

70/390 Ampere-Hour Registers
Display Examples Some examples of ampere-hour register displays are given below. The
identification codes for the individual data correspond with the energy data
identification system OBIS.
31: Current phase 1

8: Hours status
0: Total
51: Current phase 2
8: Hours status
1: with undervoltage
Parameterisation No parameterisation is possible for ampere-hour registers.

Terminals 71/390
5 Terminals
5.1 Overview
The terminals of E550 meters provide the connection for all input and
output signals. Terminal connections for the following inputs and outputs
are available:
Voltage and Current The terminal block for the voltage and current inputs are either designed for
Input direct connection (ZMG310) or for transformer connection (ZxG400).
Voltage Output The voltage output terminals may be used to link a phase voltage or the
neutral conductor to the common of the output contacts or the control
inputs.
Control Inputs The E550 control inputs mainly control the tariff functions of the meter with
external devices, e.g. rate control, reset, external synchronisation, etc.
The meter has 0, 2 or 4 control inputs (100 ... 277 V), depending on
configuration and extension board used.
Output Contacts The E550 output contacts transmit meter information to external devices by
pulses or control signals. Various parameters define the behaviour of the
output contacts of the meter. The contacts may be used as:
 Pulse output contacts to transmit energy pulses with a fixed pulse

value
 Energy direction contacts to indicate the energy direction
 Static output contact to indicate internal control signals or operating
conditions of the meter
Selectable function
 The pulse output contacts, the energy flow contacts and the static output
contacts are physically the same contacts. The user can select which
contact is to transmit which signal.
The meter has 0, 2, 4 or 6 output contacts depending on configuration and

extension board used.

72/390 Terminals
Communication The communication interfaces of the meter are factory configured and not
Interface changeable in the field. Various combinations of RS232, powered RS232,
RS485, RS422 and CS interfaces are supported.
5.2 Terminal Layout

The following examples illustrate the terminal layouts of various meter
types.
Examples
 The following illustrations of meter terminal layouts are examples. For
details please refer to the connection diagram of the corresponding meter.
ZMG310xR Terminal layout for ZMG310xR meters for direct connection with CS
interface on extension board and RS232 or RS485 interface on base board
(Series 1 and 2):
Terminal layout for ZMG310xR meters for direct connection with powered
RS232 and RS485 interface or two RS422 interfaces on extension board
and RS232 or RS485 interface on base board (Series 2 only):

Terminals 73/390
The top row of terminals consists of screw terminals and comprises
 Voltage outputs U1, U2, U3 and N, tapped from the relevant phase
input. These outputs may carry a maximum current of 1 A.
 Control inputs for external rate control and reset, if the meter is
configured for external control.
 Output contacts for fixed valency pulses, control signals or status
 Communication interfaces according to configuration
The lower row of terminals comprises the phase connections with input and
output per phase and neutral conductor. These are provided as cage type
terminals, in which a rectangular casing terminal presses the outer
conductor against the current loop in the meter from below (see following
section). The opening enables external conductors of up to 35 mm2 cross-
section to be fitted. This makes it possible to carry a maximum current of
125 A.
Current Terminals of The ZMG310xR uses a cage type terminal instead of the former pillar type
ZMG310xR terminal, in which the outer conductor is pressed against the current loop of
the meter from above. This presses the outer conductor against the current
loop from below by means of the casing terminal as shown in the following
picture. This ensures a satisfactory contact for every outer conductor cross-
section. In particular with small cross-sections a lateral deviation of the
outer conductor by the pressure screw of the pillar type terminal is not
possible.

74/390 Terminals
Variants Casing terminals of steel or brass can be selected for ZMG310xR meters.
ZxG400xR meters always have brass terminals.
Version Imax Casing terminal Opening Conductor

ZMG310 Up to 80 A Steel 9 x 9 mm 25 mm2
ZMG310 Up to 125 A Brass 9.5 x 9.5 mm 35 mm2
ZxG400 Up to 10 A Brass 5.2 x 5.2 mm 10 mm2
ZxG400xR Terminal layout for ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection with CS
interface on extension board and RS232 or RS485 interface on base board
(Series 1 and 2):
Terminal layout for ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection with

powered RS232 and RS485 interface or two RS422 interfaces on extension
board and RS232 or RS485 interface on base board (Series 2 only):

Terminals 75/390
The top row of terminals consists of screw terminals and comprises
 Voltage outputs U1, U2, U3 and N, tapped from the relevant phase
input. These outputs may carry a maximum current of 1 A.
 Control inputs for external rate control and reset, if the meter is
configured for external control.
 Communication interfaces according to configuration
The lower row of terminals comprises of the phase connections with input
and output of the circuit for each phase with the voltage connection in
between and neutral conductor at far right.

76/390 Terminals
5.3 Terminal Designations

A terminal number is defined for every terminal of the meter. This is always
shown on the connection diagram and possibly also printed at the lower
edge of the face plate.
In the Landis+Gyr MAP190 meter specification and parameterisation

software, the terminals are provided with the following symbolic
designation:
 T0-1 to T0-11 for terminals of the voltage outputs

 T1-1 to T1-14 for terminals of the extension board
Standardisation The table below shows typical terminal designations for the input terminals
as used according to VDEW/DIN or selected by Landis+Gyr.
Function Landis+Gyr VDEW/DIN

Common connection G 40 15
Energy rate input E1 41 13
Energy rate input E2 42 33
Integration period control mB 45 17
Time-of-day synchronisation SY 50 16
Reset control KA 43 18
Reset control KB 44 19
Demand rate input P1 46 14
Demand rate input P2 47 34
There is no standardisation for the arrangement and designation of the

output contacts.

Terminals 77/390
5.4 Connection Diagrams
Examples
 The following illustrations of connection diagrams are examples. For
details please refer to the connection diagram of the corresponding meter.
5.4.1 Current and Voltage Terminals

The designations for the current and voltage input terminals (numbers
1 - 12) are engraved on the terminal block and cannot be altered.
The voltage outputs have basically the same numbers as the voltage inputs
(2, 5, 8 and 11).
ZMG310xR
ZMG400xR for Low

Voltage

78/390 Terminals
ZFG400xR (Only With

Firmware Version P04)
2 5 8
1 2 3 5 7 8 9
uv uv k l k l
UV UV K L K L
L1
x
L2 x
x
L3
ZMG400xR For
Transformers in
Aron Circuit
2 5 8 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11
uv uv k l k l
UV UV K L K L
L1
x
L2 x
x
L3
ZMG400xR for
Medium Voltage
2 5 8 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11
uv u v uv k l k l k l
UV U V UV K L KL K L
L1
L2 x
L3 x x x
x
N x

Terminals 79/390
5.4.2 Control Inputs, Output Contacts and Electrical Interfaces
Example .260x K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6
CS
G E1 P1
+ –
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14
150...300 V
Example .240x
Example .440x K1 K2 K3 K4
CS
G E1 E2 G P1 SY
+ –
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14
150...300 V

80/390 Terminals
Example .060x
Examples .041x
Example .020x

Terminals 81/390
5.5 Further Inputs and Outputs

Further meter inputs and outputs are the optical interface (see section 26.1
“Optical Interface”) and the optical test outputs (see section 2.4 “Optical
Test Outputs”).
5.6 Parameterisation of Terminals

5.6.1 Output Pulse Length
Select the pulse length of the pulse output contact.
The maximum frequency of the output contact is limited by the selected

pulse length. If the frequency of the output contact is too high for the
selected pulse length, shorten the output pulse length or select a higher
output pulse value (primary output pulse constant).
The output pulse length can be set to a value between 20 and 200 ms. The
selected output pulse length applies for all output contacts (see section
5.6.2 “Pulse Output”).
If the output pulse length is between 20 and 80 ms the no-pulse period is at

least as long as the pulse length.
If the output pulse length is between 100 and 200 ms the no-pulse period is
at least 80 ms.

82/390 Terminals
5.6.2 Pulse Output
To define a transmitting contact as pulse output, perform the following

steps:
1. Activate the contact you intend to define as pulse output (the meter
must be equipped with an extension board with output contacts).
2. Select “pulse output”.
3. Define the following parameters.
Measured Quantity Select the measured quantity that is transmitted via the contact.
Primary Output Pulse Enter the pulse constant of the transmitting contact output pulses.
Constant
When you select an appropriate transmitting contact pulse constant take
note of the maximum value shown on the right of the input field. This value
depends on the maximum primary power and the maximum acceptable
frequency of the transmitting contacts.
Landis+Gyr recommend a pulse constant which is between 30 and 70% of

the maximum value in order to ensure the resolution of the output contact is
sufficient.
You can calculate the maximum output pulse constant in the following way:
 imp  f max Hz   3600

Output pulse constant   P1max kW 
 kWh
P1max = maximum primary power
fmax = maximum frequency of the transmitting contact
Because the maximum frequency of the transmitting contact is limited the

MAP tool states the maximum possible pulse constant.

Terminals 83/390
5.6.3 Static Output
To define a transmitting contact as static output, perform the following:
1. Activate the contact you intend to define as static output (the meter
must be equipped with an extension board with output contacts).
2. Select “static output”.
3. Define the parameter “Output Control Signal”.
Output Control Signal Select the signal that is used to activate the static output. The following
control signals are available (partly depending on the configuration, the
defined measuring quantities and diagnostic events):
Control signals of the control table CS1 … CS16

Reset signals KA, KB
Integration period output Output logic “open to reset” or
“close to reset” selectable.
Synchronisation output
Clock not valid
Control signals of the time switch TOU-E1 … TOU-S
Communication inputs 1…8
Demand monitor 1…6
Power factor threshold 1, 2
Overvoltage L1, L2, L3
Undervoltage L1, L2, L3
Overcurrent L1, L2, L3, N
Current with undervoltage L1, L2, L3
Undercurrent L1, L2, L3
Communication locked
Phase sequence reversed
Strong DC field detection
Front cover removed
Terminal cover removed
Negative active energy flow L1, L2, L3
Phase fail L1, L2, L3

84/390 Terminals
Complete power down

Open/shortened current transformer L1, L2, L3
Alert occurred
5.6.4 Energy Direction Output
To define a transmitting contact as energy direction output contact, perform

the following steps:
1. Activate the contact you intend to define as energy direction output

contact (the meter must be equipped with an extension board with
output contacts).
2. Select “energy direction output”.
Measured Quantity Select the measured quantity |+A| – |–A|, if the contact is supposed to
indicate the direction of the active energy.
Select the measured quantity |+R| – |–R|, if the contact is supposed to

indicate the direction of the reactive energy.
Measured quantities with predefined direction

Measured quantities with a predefined direction (e.g. +A, R(QII), etc.)
 cannot be selected as a control signal for the energy direction contact.
Therefore, you have to enter the measured quantities |+A| – |–A| for the
direction of the active energy and, if necessary, |+R| – |–R| for the direction
of the reactive energy.
Indication Select whether a closed contact indicates positive energy (import, +A or

+R) or negative energy (export, –A or –R).

Terminals 85/390
5.6.5 Control Input
1. Activate the terminal you intend to define as control input (the meter
must be equipped with an extension board with control inputs).
Input Signal Select the signal that is applied to this static input. All input control signals
that are allocated to one of the static inputs may be used in the control
table.
The following input control signals are available:
Energy rate control signals E1, E2

Demand rate control signals P1, P2
Clock synchronisation signal SY
Integration period new start signal mB
Debouncing of the The new state of a control input is accepted as valid after it has been stable
Control Inputs for at least 150 ms.

86/390 Calendar Clock
6 Calendar Clock
6.1 Clock Structure
The clock structure comprises the calendar clock and the time switch with
their switching tables:
Base: Calendar clock

Integrating
Internal integration period
period
Time base: Quartz synchronous
integration period
Mains frequency Internal reset
Date, time for P max,.
Synchronisation
Reset, etc.
input SY
Extension:
Time switch Energy rate control
Demand rate control
Time switch
Inhibition P max
tables
Relays control KXx
SYNC
Synchronisation output
The calendar clock generates the time-of-day and date and for this purpose
uses either its own high-precision quartz crystal or the mains frequency as
time base. The meter can record various recurring events, such as a reset,
Pmax, etc. with time and date for later evaluation.
In addition to time and date, the internal integration period for the maxi-
mum formation is also based on the quartz frequency.
The time switch generates the “independent” time switch signals TOU-xx
with the aid of various control tables. These can be linked by the meter for
control signals CSx or used directly for rate control.
6.2 Calendar Clock

6.2.1 Time Functions
E550 meters are always fitted with a calendar clock with the following
functions:
 Formation of date and time from internal quartz

 Synchronisation of integration period, if necessary
 Resetting – if controlled internally
 Provision of date and time for various events
 Generation of signal to synchronise external devices

Calendar Clock 87/390
The time function comprises the following elements with associated range
Element Range
– Year 0000 … 9999

– Month 01 … 12
– Days per month 01 … 31
– Days per week 1 … 7 (1 = Monday)
– Hours 00 … 23
– Minutes 00 … 59
– Seconds 00 … 59
Local time can vary between -12 and +12 hours from GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time in winter). It takes into account leap years until 2060.
Accuracy The internal quartz with a very high accuracy of <0.5 second deviation per
day (<6 ppm) serves as time base. Its temperature stability is also very
high.
The quartz frequency can be tuned if necessary to the mains frequency of

50 or 60 Hz, provided this is sufficiently accurate. Tuning is performed after
every full wave of the mains frequency, i.e. after 20 ms at 50 Hz or 16.67
ms at 60 Hz. The meter also checks the mains frequency with regard to
deviation from the quartz frequency. If a difference is more than 5% it
switches the tuning of the quartz frequency automatically to the mains
frequency.
Calendar Types The Persian Jalaali calendar is optionally supported in addition to the
Gregorian calendar (default setting).
The choice is made during configuration (see section 1.3 “Configuration of

Tariff Functions”).
Date and time for the calendar clock always correspond internally with the
Gregorian calendar. If the Jalaali calendar is selected these are converted.
The communication units have their own calendar algorithm and therefore
always operate according to the Gregorian calendar independently of the
meter calendar type selected.
Jalaali Calendar In the Persian Jalaali calendar the year comprises 12 months as in the
Gregorian calendar. One week likewise has 7 days. The year starts, how-
ever, with the astronomical start of spring (spring equinox, equality of day
and night), i.e. around 21 March according to the Gregorian calendar.
If the equinox occurs before noon Teheran time, this day is the first of the
new year, otherwise the new year begins on the following day. The year
therefore has 365 or 366 days, or the last month 29 or 30 days.

The first 6 months of the year all have 31 days and the last – with the
exception of the final month “Esfand”, which sometimes has only 29 days –
have 30 days in each case.
Names of the 12 months:
No. Name Abbreviation

01 Farvardin Far
02 Ordibehesht Ordi
03 Khordad Khor
04 Tir Tir
05 Mordad Mor
06 Shahrivar Shah
07 Mehr Mehr
08 Aban Aban
09 Azar Azar
10 Day Dey
11 Bahman Bah
12 Esfand Esf
Names of the 7 days of the week:
No. Name Abbreviation

1 Shanbeh = Saturday Sha
2 Yekshanbeh = Sunday Yek
3 Doshanbeh = Monday DoS
4 Seshanbeh = Tuesday SeS
5 Chaharshanbeh = Wednesday Cha
6 Panjshanbeh = Thursday Pan
7 Jomeh = Friday Jom
The year count in the Jalaali calendar begins with the Gregorian year 622.
There is therefore a difference of 622 years between the Gregorian and the
Jalaali calendars (before astronomical start of spring) or 621 years (after
astronomical start of spring). 20 March 2006 therefore corresponds to 29.
Esfand 1384 and 21 March 2006 to 1. Farvardin 1385.
Summer/Winter The start and end of a summer season can be set at any freely
parameterised time. The time shift can be ± 60 or 120 minutes.

Backup Time The backup time of the calendar clock is
 Without battery at least 21 days

The 21 days are only guaranteed with fully-charged supercap
(capacitor with very high capacity).
For a fully-charged supercap, mains voltage must be applied to
the meter for at least 300 hours.
 With battery 1 10 years
The 10 years are guaranteed with normal loading of the battery. This
simultaneously corresponds to the guaranteed lifetime of the battery.
 With battery 2 at least 10 years
Time/Date Invalid If the power reserve is consumed when the meter has no voltage applied,
the calendar clock switches off and either returns to the basic date
1.1.2000, 00:00:00 or keeps the time at which the power cut has appeared
and resumes operation with this time when voltage is applied to the meter
again. When voltage is applied to the meter the fault message
F.F 02000000 appears. Simultaneously, the arrow above the “CLK” symbol
flashes on the main face plate.
Setting Time/Date If the meter indicates the above error F.F 02000000 and the “CLK” arrow
flashes in the display, the user must set the time and date with the following
possibilities:
 Manually in setting mode

 With the corresponding formatted command according to IEC or
dlms via the interface
When the time and date have been set, the flashing arrow disappears and
the error message F.F 00000000 is shown.
The meter accepts the new time and date without verification. The user
must therefore ensure that the time and date entered are correct.
Display and Readout The following calendar clock information is available on the display and via
readout:
 Current time of the day
 Current date
 Day of the week
(Gregorian 1: Monday, 7: Sunday; Jalaali 1: Sha, 7: Jom)
 Status information

6.2.2 Synchronisation and Time-Setting
Synchronisation Synchronisation means setting the clock at regular intervals according to

an external reference. Synchronisation only takes place with a maximum
time deviation of a few seconds and ensures that all meters within a
network indicate the same time. Meters with load profiles, above all, require
a time synchronisation, so that the individual load profiles exhibit the same
capture period to an accuracy of one second.
Synchronisation of the clock is made via the corresponding control input SY

or by communication with the central station.
Time-setting Time-setting means setting the clock when commissioned or when the
power reserve of the calendar clock is consumed. Time-setting can also
occur during synchronisation if the time deviation is greater than the
permissible time window. This should not be the case, however, if
synchronised regularly (e.g. every 24 hours).
The time can be set manually in set mode, locally via the optical interface
or by remote control with a signal from the central station.
6.2.3 Synchronisation via Control Input SY

For synchronisation of the calendar clock via the control input SY, an
external timer, such as master clock or radio receiver, serve as time base.
These transmit the signal at regular intervals.
Three possibilities exist:
 The synchronisation may take place several times per day

– To the minute or
– To the integration period
 The synchronisation takes place once per day.
Use only one type of synchronisation

 Only one type of synchronisation can be used at a time, either several
times per day or once per day.

Synchronising Pulse The synchronising pulse must be chatter-free after maximum 100 ms. The
meter only accepts the pulse after this time.
Synchronisation period e.g. 15 min.
< 100 ms chatter-free
0 to 1 s no change of time
if time
inside of time window synchronisation
deviation
outside of time window time setting
(time window 2 to 9 s)
Several Times Per Day Synchronisation takes place according to the synchronisation interval on
the minute or capture period.
With synchronisation every minute the meter corrects its time to the next
full minute if the signal arrives between xx:30 and xx:59 or to the preceding
minute if the signal arrives between xx:29 and xx:01. The hour remains
unchanged.
With synchronisation at every capture period, the meter similarly corrects

its time to the next full period if the signal arrives between middle and end
or to the preceding period if the signal arrives between beginning and
middle. The hour remains unchanged.
The reaction of the meter to the synchronisation signal depends on the

detected deviation (see section 6.2.6 “Handling the Deviations”).
The meter accepts the synchronisation pulse at any time but only once
within one synchronisation interval.
Ignoring second synchronisation pulse

 A second synchronisation pulse within the same synchronisation interval is
ignored.
Once Per Day With the daily synchronisation, the meter allows one time window per day
within which the meter accepts the synchronisation pulse. The time of the
day (e.g. 22:00h) and the width (e.g. one minute) of the window can be
defined by parameter setting.
Time window for

daily synchronisation
00:00h 24:00h
Daily
synchronisation pulse

If the “time of the day” parameter is set to 22:00h and the meter receives a
synchronisation signal within the defined window, the calendar clock is
synchronised to 22:00h. The reaction of the meter to the synchronisation
signal depends on the deviation (see section 6.2.6 “Handling the
Deviations”).
The meter will not accept any synchronisation pulses outside the time
window and the signal will therefore have no effect.
6.2.4 Synchronisation by Remote Readout

If the meter is connected to the central station via a remote readout sys-
tem, the central station usually synchronises the calendar clock by sending
complete time information to the meter via the communication interface.
The meter compares the time information received from the central station
with the local time of the calendar clock and corrects it if necessary. The
reaction of the meter to the synchronisation signal depends on the
deviation (see section 6.2.6 “Handling the Deviations”).
The time may be synchronised only once per synchronisation interval.
Time synchronisation twice within synchronisation interval

If the time is synchronised a second time within the same synchronisation
 interval, the integration period is reset no matter how small the deviation.
This is to prevent multiple synchronisation with a small time shift resulting
in a large time shift that, if made in one single approach, would have reset
the integration period.
6.2.5 Setting the Time

The time of the calendar clock can be set manually in the set mode, locally
via the optical interface (e.g. with a laptop computer) or by remote control
from the central station via the electrical interface.
6.2.6 Handling the Deviations

The meter performs the following actions depending on the time deviation
of the meter from the synchronising signal:
No Change for If the synchronising signal arrives within one second before or after the
Deviation Up to 1 s regular second of the meter, no change is made, i.e. it continues running
without correction. The deviation is cumulated, however, until the next
synchronising signal and is then corrected if necessary.
Synchronising if Synchronising is actually only performed if the difference found between

Inside Time Window the meter and the synchronising device is between 1 second and a time
window which can be parameterised from 2 to max. 9 seconds. The meter
sets the time by the relevant number of seconds forward or back according
to the deviation. The remaining deviation within the second is cumulated
until the next synchronising signal and a correction then made if necessary.

Time-setting if Out- If the time deviation is outside the time window of 2 to max. 9 seconds, the
Side Time Window meter sets the time again with all the associated consequences such as
entry in event log, additional entry in a load profile, by new start of
integration period, etc.
Synchronisation signal
Time deviation +/- 1 s
:59 :01
:58 :00 :02
Up to 1 s No change of time
Time window 2 to 9 s
:59 :01 :03 :05 :01
:58 :00 :02 :04 :00
> 1 up to time window Synchronisation
:59 :01 :03 :12 :01

:00 :02 :04 :00
> Time window Time setting
Synchronisation By means of an additional synchronising output, which can be

Output parameterised, and the synchronising input, the utility can set up a master-
slave operation with several meters and other devices.
Synchronisation The following intervals exist for the synchronising input SY, in which the
Interval meter takes account of a synchronising signal. A second signal during the
same interval is not accepted.
 Once per minute

 Once per integration period
 Once per day
The time shift is made according to the following table, whereby the
synchronising period is given as 15 minutes as an example:
Arrival of synchronising signal between Time shift to:

hh:00:01 and hh:07:30 hh:00:00
hh:07:31 and hh:14:58 hh:14:59
hh:15:01 and hh:22:30 hh:15:00
hh:22:31 and hh:29:58 hh:29:59
hh:30:01 and hh:37:30 hh:30:00
hh:37:31 and hh:44:58 hh:44:59
hh:45:01 and hh:52:30 hh:45:00
hh:52:31 and hh:59:58 hh:59:59
With time in hours (hh): minutes: seconds

Integration Period If the difference between the internal clock and the master clock is greater
Reset than the parameterised threshold, the time for the calendar clock is set to
the synchronisation time. Setting the time always causes the termination of
the present integration period and the start of a new period. An entry in the
event log is also made.
Setting the time to either the beginning or end of the integration period
results in a shortened integration period. Load profile entries for the capture
period concerned are designated with a corresponding status code.
6.2.7 Synchronisation Output

The internal clock of the meter may be used as master clock, i.e. to
synchronise several other clocks within a network. For this purpose, the
clock synchronisation output signal can be transmitted via a transmitting
contact.
To enable the synchronisation output, the static output signal

“synchronisation output” must be allocated to a terminal (see section 5
“Terminals”) and the synchronisation output parameter must be set
accordingly.
Synchronisation intervall e.g. 1 hour

10 ± 1 s

6.3 Time Stamp

Whenever data is stored in the meter or time-sensitive commands are
performed, a time stamp is also stored. The time stamp is stored in local
time and consists of:
 Date and time

 Clock status (dlms only)
6.3.1 Time Stamp Format
dlms In dlms protocols, the time stamp consists of the following information:
Clock
Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
status
IEC In IEC readouts, the time stamp consists of the following information:
Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
The utility can select the following format to represent the date in the
display and in the IEC protocol:
 YY-MM-DD or
 DD.MM.YYYY
With YYYY = year (2 or 4 digits), MM = month and DD = day.
6.3.2 Clock Status

dlms protocols include a clock status that indicates the current status of the
calendar clock:
Bit 0 Invalid time Time could not be recovered after an incident.
Bit 1 Doubtful time The time could be recovered after an incident but
the value cannot be guaranteed.
Bit 2 Clock source Indicates whether the clock source is the same as
parameterised.
This bit is set, e.g. when the calendar clock switches
back to crystal operation because the mains
frequency has not been accurate enough.
Bit 3 Invalid clock status Indicates (when set to 1) that the present clock
status is invalid.
Bit 4 Reserved Not used
Bit 7 Daylight saving Indicates (when set to 1) that the time deviates from
active the normal by one or two hours due to daylight
saving time.

6.4 Battery Status

In addition to the supercap, two batteries can provide the backup power for
the calendar clock. It is therefore important to monitor the battery status.
The battery status information consists of the following information:
 Battery operating time (see also section 13 “Operating Time and

Status Registers”)
 Battery monitoring
 Battery voltage
The user can specify for which purpose the information about the battery
condition is to be used (e.g. display, entry in the event log, trigger an alert,
etc.).
Operating time of The meter reports the operating times of the batteries, i.e. the time since
battery the corresponding battery was inserted in the meter. This quantity can be
included in the display or service list, or in the readout protocol.
In the dlms protocol, the meter indicates the battery operating time in
minutes, while in the display and in the IEC protocol the battery operating
time is shown in hours.
It is recommended that you reset the counting register when changing the
battery.
Battery monitor The battery voltage serves as a criterion for the battery monitor. This
remains stable during about 90% of its life expectancy. If it falls below a
specific value (e.g. 2.9 V with a nominal value of 3.3 V), the battery symbol
appears with flashing figure 1 for battery 1 or figure 2 for battery 2 in the
display and an alert is generated.
Battery symbol on
Battery symbol off
2.9 V 3.3 V

6.5 Parameterisation of Calendar Clock

6.5.1 Time Base
Time Base Select whether the mains frequency (50 Hz) or the internal quartz is used
as a time base of the calendar clock.
Quartz operation
If the network frequency appears to vary more than 5% from its nominal
 value (compared with the quartz time base), the calendar clock switches
temporarily to quartz operation.
In this case, bit 2 of the clock status byte is set.
Synchronous to mains frequency

If you use the mains frequency as time base, the calendar clock runs
 synchronously to the mains frequency.
In this case, you must not synchronise the calendar clock with the
synchronisation input SY.
Load profiles
The mains frequency is not as stable as the internal quartz for short
 periods. Therefore, the mains frequency is not suitable as time base for
meters with a load profile.
Select the internal quartz as time base for meters with a load profile.

6.5.2 Daylight Saving Time

Activate the daylight saving time, if needed, and select whether the daylight
saving time starts and ends according to the European standard or
according to your own specification.
Customer-specific definition only with Gregorian calendar

 If you have selected the Persian Jalaali calendar as calendar basis, you
cannot select any customer specific definitions. The daylight saving time
then always begins and ends according to the relevant standards.
According to Tick this box if the daylight saving time should start and end according to
European Standard the European standard.
According to the European standard, daylight saving time starts on Sunday

the 25th of March or on the first Sunday after the 25th of March. On that day
the clock is advanced from 02:00h to 03:00h.
Daylight saving time ends on Sunday the 25th of October or on the first
Sunday after the 25th of October. On that day the clock is set back from
03:00h to 02:00h.

According to the Tick this box to make your own specification of the start and end time of the
following specification daylight saving time.
Start of Daylight Enter the month, the weekday and the earliest
Saving Time possible day on which the daylight saving time must
be activated.
Also enter the switching time (e.g. 02:00h) and the
time shift (e.g. +1h).
End of Daylight Enter the month, the weekday and the earliest
Saving Time possible day on which the daylight saving time must
be deactivated.
Also enter the switching time (e.g. 03:00h). The time
shift is the same as defined for activating the daylight
saving but in the opposite direction.
Example In the example in the above screenshot, daylight saving time starts and
ends according to a customer specific setting:
Start
On Saturday the 25th of April or on the first Saturday after the 25th of April.
On that day, the clock is advanced from 03:00h to 05:00h.
End
On Saturday the 25th of September or on the first Saturday after the 25th of
September. On that day, the clock is set back from 03:00h to 01:00h.

On the following dates Tick this box if the start and end time of the daylight saving time shall be at
specific dates.
You can define these dates for 3 years.
Start of Daylight Enter the dates on which changeover to daylight

Saving Time saving time should be made in the relevant year.
Also enter the switching time (usually 02:00h) and the
time shift (usually +1h).
End of Daylight Enter the dates on which daylight saving time ends in
Saving Time the relevant year.
Also enter the switching time (usually 03:00h). The
time shift is the same as defined for activating the
daylight saving but in the opposite direction.
Example In the section of the screen shown, daylight saving time starts each year on
the 25th March (on this date clocks are put forward one hour at 02:00h to
03:00h) and ends each year on the 25th October (on this date clocks are
put back one hour at 03:00h to 02:00h).

According to the According to the Iranian standard, daylight saving time starts on the 2nd
Iranian Standard Farvardin. On that day the clock is advanced from 00:00h to 01:00h.
Daylight saving time ends on the 1st Mehr. On that day the clock is set back
from 00:00h to 23:00h.
6.5.3 Synchronisation Output

The synchronisation output signal may be used to synchronise external
clock(s).
Select the frequency of occurrence of the synchronisation output signal.
Synchronisation output signal on transmitting contact

 Make sure that the synchronisation signal is allocated to one of the
transmitting contacts (see section 5.6.3 “Static Output”).

6.5.4 Clock Synchronisation

There are three possibilities to synchronise the clock using the
synchronisation signal:
 The synchronisation takes place at the end of an integration period.

 The synchronisation takes place every minute.
 The synchronisation takes place once per day.
Select one of the above type of synchronisation and set the parameter
accordingly.
Synchronisation Select the control input that is used as synchronisation source (generally
Source TI-SY) or one of the activated control signals CS1 to CS16.
In order to avoid confusions, you should assign the signal TI-SY to one of
the control inputs for the synchronisation of the clock.
Synchronisation Select whether the meter is synchronised every minute, every integration
Interval period or once per day.
If the synchronisation happens on a daily basis, set the following

parameters, too:
Synchronisation Time Select the time at which the daily synchronisation takes place, e.g. 10:00h.

Time Window Define the time window within which the daily synchronisation pulse must
be sent to the meter. The meter will not accept a synchronisation pulse
outside the time window and the signal will therefore not have any effect.
Maximum Time Select the maximum allowed deviation (2 … 9 seconds) that does not
Deviation without End trigger a restart of the integration period but results in a time shift.
of Integration/ Capture Deviations exceeding that limit do trigger a restart of the integration period.
Period
6.5.5 Date and Time after Recover from Total Loss Power Reserve
It can be parameterised whether the meter resets the date to 01-01-2000
and the time to 00:00:00 h (Default) at power-up or whether the date and
time of the last power-cut are used in case the power reserve was
insufficient.
Choose the reset date and time to be used when the power reserve has
been used up.

104/390 Time of Use (Time Switch)
7 Time of Use (Time Switch)

7.1 Overview
The ZxG310/400xR2 or xR4 meters feature a time switch (time of use,
TOU), which uses the calendar clock as time base. The time switch drives
16 output control signals. Their on and off times can be set with the help of
up to 6 (P05) or 8 (P06) day tables, an annual table and a special day
table.
The time switch signals can directly be used for rate control, i.e. to activate
and deactivate registers and arrows in the display.
They can also be linked in the control table, however, with other internal or
external signals. The control table can generate up to 14 control signals.
The time switch permits autonomous rate control of the meter. Since
external control signals are possible at the same time, the utility can adapt
the rate control in a flexible way to its requirements.
7.2 Switching Tables

The following switching tables are available:
Exception Day Table This defines day tables differing from the normal sequence, i.e. holidays,
vacations, etc. It should be used when day tables other than those
applicable on weekdays are effective on Sundays and holidays. It can
contain up to 200 entries.
Annual Table This can specify up to 6 (P05) or 8 (P06) periods – so called seasons –
which in turn determine the day tables valid in each case from Monday to
Sunday during a week.

Time of Use (Time Switch) 105/390
Day Tables With up to 6 (P05) or 8 (P06) different day tables the utility determines the
valid tariff structure of the relevant day, e.g. from when to when rate 1
should be switched on, when demand inhibition is to take place, etc.
The time switch signals TOU-xx generated in the day tables are fed directly
or via the control signals to the microprocessor, in order to provide the
corresponding control functions and to transmit them to external devices via
output contacts.
7.2.1 Day Table

In the day table, the user defines which control signals are switched on at
which time of the day. Each line in the day table represents one switching
state with its start and end time and the activated signals in that period of
time. The first entry starts at 00:00h and the last entry ends at 24:00h. The
time switch runs through the day table repetitively, i.e. after 23:59:59 begins
again with 00:00:00. The maximum number of entries is up to 32.
7.2.2 Annual Table

The annual table defines the day table used for each day if the week.
Several periods or seasons are possible within one year. The first always
begins on 1 January, the last ends on 31 December. The time switch runs
through the annual table repetitively, i.e. after 31.12 starts again with 1.1.
Week To define the weekly on/off pattern, the user enters the number of the day
table which is applicable at a particular day of the week.
7.2.3 Special Day Table

The utility can then define special days when different day tables are used
within a week. This usually concerns the weekend, when other switching
times or lower rates are required on Sunday and possibly also on Saturday.
The utility can define holidays, such as 1 January or 25 December as well
as other holidays as Sundays.
A special day can have a fixed or variable date. The fixed dates are entered
once by the user with month and day, the variable dates must be newly
entered every year with year, month and day.
For every change of date the time switch first checks whether the new date
is a special day. If so, it selects the corresponding day table, if not it
continues looking in the annual table.

7.2.4 Time Switch Signals with Fault

The meter can activate output signals of the time switch if the internal clock
fails, i.e. if back up time has run out and the corresponding status flag has
been set. The meter can activate time switch signals if the internal clock is
running with incorrect date and time-of-day owing to power reserve
consumed and the corresponding status flag has been set.
The utility can select which signals are to be activated for incorrect date
and time-of-day.
7.2.5 Active and Passive Switching Tables

There are two complete sets of switching tables:
 Active switching tables: Active switching tables are those with

which the meter is currently operating. They can be directly
overwritten for an immediate modification.
 Passive switching tables: Passive switching tables permit the
definition of a new time switch to be used at a later point in time.
They are stored in the background until the switching date when
they replace the active switching tables.
Changeover Date The utility can store a complete passive time switch with annual table, as
well as day tables, in the meter in the background. The changeover date
then determines when the new previously passive time switch becomes
active and replaces that previously active time switch.
The exception day table remains present however.
This allows the utility to fit all meters installed with a new switching program
before this changeover date, which is applicable simultaneously to all
meters from this date. The former program is then deleted.
The existing active time switch becomes passive, i.e. from the switching
date on the meter operates with the annual table 2 and the day tables 2-1

to 2-8 as active time switch. The annual table 1 and the day tables 1-1 to 1-
8 are set to passive.
Later on the utility can set the passive one active again and in this way
switch between two time switches.
The time switch operates with the former tables up to the changeover date
entered.
On the changeover date the time switch changes to the new table structure
with the annual table 2 and up to 6 (P05) or 8 (P06) seasons and up to 6
(P05) or 8 (P08) day tables 2-1 up to 2-8. The contents of the tables
previously with annual table 1 and day tables 1-1 to 1-8 becomes passive.
The utility can activate the table structure 1 again later with the relevant
changeover date or can set a new one.
The utility can designate both the active as well as the passive switching
tables with an ID number each to simplify data management. The ID
numbers consist of maximum 7 characters and can be set with .MAP110 or
MAP120. The ID numbers can be displayed and read out.
7.2.6 Example of a Rate Control

The example comprises 3 energy and 2 demand rates, whereby no
demand measurement takes place on Sundays. The switching time differs
from summer to winter and from Saturday to Sunday compared with the
remaining weekdays.
Procedure The energy registers (ER1 to ER3) and demand registers (MDR1 and
MDR2) required, in addition to the associated time switch signals TOU-xx
(or indirect control signals CSx) are first determined:
- TOU-E1 Peak rate energy
- TOU-E2 Day rate energy

- TOU-E3 Night rate energy
- TOU-P1 Peak rate demand
- TOU-P2 Day and night rate demand
Rates: Energy 1 = peak rate Demand 1 = peak rate

2 = normal rate 2 = normal rate
3 = night rate no demand during night rate
Switching Monday Summer normal rate 07:00 to 11:00

times: to Friday peak rate 11:00 to 12:30
normal rate 12:30 to 22:00
night rate other time
Winter normal rate 06:00 to 11:00
peak rate 11:00 to 13:00
normal rate 13:00 to 21:30
Saturday Summer normal rate 07:00 to 13:00
Winter normal rate 06:00 to 12:30
Sunday night rate whole day
Day Tables
The day tables for the winter period only differ in the switching times.

Annual Table The annual table starts on 1 January (01.01) with the winter period. This
controls from Monday to Friday day table no. 4, on Saturday no. 5 and on
Sunday no. 3, the day table effective for summer and winter. Similarly the
summer period controls the relevant day tables from 1 April and the winter
period again from 1 October.
Summer
Annual table Day table
no. 1
Season Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
01.01. - 31.03. 4 4 4 4 4 5 3
Day table
01.04. - 30.09. 1 1 1 1 1 2 3
no. 2
01.10. - 31.12. 4 4 4 4 4 5 3
Day table
no. 3
Day table
no. 4
Day table
Winter no. 5
Exception Days Table Calendar clock

time/date Annual table
week
no exception day
Change of date
maximal number
Exception days table 200 entries
of exception days
Day table valid from:
Day Month Year
3 25 12
3 26 12 Exception days
without year number
3 01 01 with fixed date
3 02 01
3 14 04 2006
Exception days
3 17 04 2006 with year number
3 with variable date
25 05 2006
Day table no. 3

7.3 Parameterisation of TOU

There are two ways for you to parameterise a new TOU:
 An immediate modification can be performed by overwriting the

active TOU.
 A modification for a later point in time can be defined by entering the
passive TOU together with the switching date. The switching date
determines when the passive TOU replace the active ones.
In both cases enter the following data:
 The TOU name for the new set of switching tables

 The start times of the required seasons (season table)
 The on/off times of the TOU signals within a day (day table)
 Special days
 Emergency settings
 Switching date for the passive switching tables
The following section describes the modification of passive switching
tables. The input is also valid for the modification of the currently active
switching tables.
7.3.1 Creating a New Set of Switching Tables
1. Click on the tab Passive TOU. Passive TOU is used to prepare a set of
switching tables for a later download to the meter.
TOU Name The TOU name identifies the switching programme (switching tables) in
order that it can be distinguished from other switching programmes. A
maximum of 7 characters can be used.
1. Enter the TOU name.

Day Table The day table defines which TOU-signals are on at what time of the day.
1. Click on the first of the six tabs (Passive 1) to prepare a new day table.
2. Click on Add Row to add a time period that spans from 00:00 to 24:00.
3. Click on Add Row for any further time period within the day and define
its start time. Click OK or press Enter.
4. Select which TOU-signals (E1, E2, E3, etc.) are to be switched on
during which time period by clicking in the corresponding field. An “x”
appears for each activated signal.
Up to six (P05) or 8 (P06) different day tables can be defined.
Season Table The season table defines which day table is used at what day of the year.
1. Click on Add Season to add a season that spans from January 1st to
December 31st.
2. Click on Add Season for any further season within the year and define
its start date.
3. Select which day table applies to which day of the week within a season
by clicking into the corresponding field. Click into the same field again to
allocate another day table.
Up to six (P05) or eight (P06) different seasons can be defined.

7.3.2 Defining a Special Day

A special day is a single day within a year with an exceptional day table
(e.g. holidays with fixed or variable date).
1. Click on the tab Special Day Table.

2. Click on Add Day.
3. Select whether the special day is recurrent every year or non-recurrent.
4. Enter the date and click on OK.
5. Click on Add Day for any further special day.
6. Select which day table applies to which special day by clicking the
corresponding field. Click the same field again to allocate another day
table. Note that only day tables listed in the Active TOU are available.
Special day settings

There is only an active special day setting. Therefore, a special day setting
becomes active immediately after completing its definition.
 The day numbers in the special day settings refer to active day numbers!
You are prompted with the red message “not equal” if the new special day
setting (Active TOU) differs from the day table that is prepared in the
passive TOU.

7.3.3 Defining the Emergency Settings

The output signals selected in the emergency settings are triggered if the
internal clock of the meter fails, i.e. if the back-up time has run out and the
corresponding status flag has been set.
1. Click on the tab Emergency Settings.

2. Click on the output control signal(s) which must be on if the internal
clock fails. An “x” appears for each activated signal.
7.3.4 Activating the Passive TOU Settings

To activate the passive TOU settings, they must be moved to the active
TOU settings.
1. Click on the tab Passive TOU.

2. Set the tick “Activation Day”.
3. Enter the date from which the passive settings should be active. An
activation date set in the past or today immediately activates the
settings.

7.3.5 Changing Existing TOU Settings

To change the currently active TOU settings, you must first copy the
settings to the passive TOU settings.
1. Click on the tab Passive TOU.

2. Click on Copy Active to Passive TOU.
3. Edit the TOU settings.
4. Activate the passive TOU settings (enter today’s date as activation
date).

Control Table 115/390
8 Control Table
8.1 Rate Control
8.1.1 Overview
Signal sources
- Control inputs Control table
- Status with
- Event signals AND matrix and
- Remote control signals OR matrix
- Time switch
CS1
to Control signals
CS16
Controlled functions
like energy registers
arrows of display etc.
The rate control is determined by the tariff structure specified by the utility.
In addition to the traditional control of energy rates, it includes further
functions such as operating times, transmission of signals via output relays,
display arrows, etc.
The rate control consists of the following elements:
Signal Sources Signal sources such as control inputs, internal statuses, event signals,
remote control signals, signals from the time switch.
Control Table Control table with AND and OR matrix for up to 16 control signals CSx.
With the AND matrix logic signals can be represented, which are linked in
the OR matrix to the actual control signals CSx. It serves in particular to link
external signals via the control inputs as well as to interconnect signals
from various sources.
Controlled Objects These are mainly the energy and maximum demand registers for the actual
rate control, in addition to the operating times, output contacts, display
arrows, etc.
The controlled objects such as energy registers, operating times, etc. are
either assigned to the control signals CSx or to the time switch signals
TOUx. With pure time switch operation they can therefore also be con-
trolled directly by their TOUx signals, since these have the same status for
the meter as the control signals CSx.

116/390 Control Table
Output contacts and arrows can be assigned to all other signal sources
present, in addition to the control signals. The arrows can also indicate
other statuses, such as reset inhibit, setting or test mode active, etc., not
part of the rate control.
The rate control of the E550 meters is consistently divided into
 The generation of control signals from the signal sources and

 Allocation of the control signals to the functions.
These control signals switch on or off the assigned function(s).
While for example one control input switches from one rate to another,
these two rates each require their own control signal. These are produced
in this case from the two statuses of the voltage/no voltage control input.
8.1.2 Signal Sources
The utility has the following signal sources available depending on the
configuration:
Control Inputs E550 meters have 0, 2 or 4 terminals for control inputs. Only those control
inputs are available for which a terminal is allocated.
Status Messages These include the error message invalid time/date. This causes a wrong
rate control with time switch operation. To avoid this, the utility can include
the error message “clock not valid” as status in the rate control and set the
rate control to a defined status while the error message is present.
Further status messages can be produced owing to an incorrect phase

sequence or wrong energy direction.

Event Signals E550 meters offer the following possibilities for using event signals as
control signals:
 Signals from the power monitor, such as overload, overcurrents and

power factor
 Signals from the mains monitor, such as under and overvoltages,
phase drops and missing currents
 Signals from fraud detection, such as current without voltage,
terminal cover or front cover opened and negative energy direction
Rates can also be controlled with these signals. E.g. a demand threshold
can serve to switch the energy and demand rates similar to the previously
familiar over-consumption rate, dependent on the demand present.
Most of these signals are mainly used to display a fault or impermissible

situation (arrow in display) and to inform the customer or central station
(output contact).
Remote Control With formatted commands the utility can change the internal control signals
Signals of the meter by remote control in special cases, e.g. an external rate control
can be changed by the command to a time switch control. Or a remote
control signal switches a meter contact, which then provides remote control
of an external device via the meter.
Time Switch With its switching tables the time switch produces up to 14 different signals
(time switch signals). They are equivalent to the control signals CSx, so
they can be used to switch the relevant device on or off and can be used
directly for rate control.
An internally controlled reset, however, is always made via the calendar

clock.
Alert The meter can generate an alert based on an important event and send it
to the central station by SMS. If necessary it can also control an output
contact or activate an arrow in the display.
The alert is not available in the control table and can therefore only be used
directly for the devices controlled.
Control Table The actual control signals CSx originate in two stages – the AND matrix
with the logic signals and the OR matrix. These signals can then be
assigned to the various functions “independent” of their origin.
As example a dual rate requires two signals from a source, e.g. a control
input. This has two statuses, 0 and 1, which are assigned to the two control
signals CS1 and CS2 with two logic signals. Regardless of the origin of the
control signal the signal CS1 is then assigned for example the high rate of
active energy (import), the inductive reactive energy (quadrant 1), the
capacitive reactive energy (quadrant 4), the active maximum, etc. The

signal also controls a high rate operating time register and the display
arrow, which indicates the symbol HT on the face plate.
The control signal acts like an N/O contact:
Signal Corresponds to contact Function assigned

0 Open Not active
1 Closed Active
8.1.3 Signal Assignment
Control signals CSx

Time switch signals TOU-Xx
Energy rate registers
Maximum demand registers
Operating time registers

Signal assignment
Power factor registers
Demand monitoring
Power factor monitoring
Output relays
Arrows of LCD
Alert diode (LED)

Status indications
Operating message Alert
The following functions can be assigned to the control signals CSx or the
time switch signals TOUx, rarely to an alert:
 Energy rate registers

Up to 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) for formation of energy rates. Several
registers can be active simultaneously.
 Maximum demand registers
Up to 8 (P05) or 24 (P06) for formation of demand rates. Several
registers can be active simultaneously.
 Coincidental maximum demand registers (P06)
Two (MCD1 and MCD2) coincidental maximum demand registers in
each of which you can capture two maximum demand values at the
same time.
 Operating time registers
Up to 6, to determine the time the assigned signal or the
corresponding rate was active.

 Power factor registers

1 or 2 registers – only present in combimeters
ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR
 Event signals
And in fact the signals from the demand monitor and for the
combimeter also from the power factor monitor
 Output contacts
Up to 6 for passing on various signals (also control signals in
addition to fixed valency pulses)
 Arrows of LCD
For the display of active rates and other current statuses of the
meter in conjunction with the corresponding inscription on the main
face plate.
The arrows can also be assigned other signal sources, such as
communication active/running, reset block active, time/date invalid, setting
mode or test mode active, as well as further event signals.

8.2 Determination of Rate Control

8.2.1 Necessary Control Signals
The rate control is basically determined by the measured quantities to be
recorded, the rates per measured quantity and the type of control, i.e. the
signal sources and their linkage. This produces the following general
procedure:
1. Based on the relevant tariff structure the utility first determines which
measured quantities are to be recorded in how many rates. This
determines the registers required.
E.g. three energy registers each for the measured quantities +A (active
import) and +Ri (reactive inductive) for a triple rate.
2. A control signal CSx or TOU-xx is then assigned to each individual
register. With parallel rate control the same control signal can activate
several registers.
E.g. CS1 for peak rate, CS2 for day rate, CS3 for night rate for active
import and reactive inductive (see following example).
3. The signal source(s) is/are then determined.
E.g. control inputs E1 and E2 with external control or time switch

signals TOU-E1, TOU-E2 and TOU-E3 with purely time switch
operation (see following example).
4. The external control signals are then assigned to the corresponding
terminals (T1-x) provided as control inputs, and these control inputs are
assigned to the respective signal inputs TI-xx.
E.g. E1 Terminal T1-2 Signal input TI-E1

E2 Terminal T1-3 Signal input TI-E2
5. The statuses of the signal inputs are then linked in the AND matrix to
logic signals LSx.
E.g. TI-E1 = 0 + TI-E2 = 0 —> LS1

TI-E1 = 1 + TI-E2 = 0 —> LS2
TI-E1 = 0 + TI-E2 = 1 —> LS3
TI-E1 = 1 + TI-E2 = 1 —> LS4
6. Finally the logic signals LSx are linked in the second, OR matrix to the
control signals CSx.
E.g. LS1 —> CS3

LS2 —> CS2
LS3 and LS4 —> CS1

The second example uses 2 energy rates each for active import and export
and for reactive energy consumption in all 4 quadrants, controlled by the
two control signals CS1 and CS2. These also control the two power rates
active import and export.
Steps 5 and 6 are also followed for linking time switch signals to other
internal signals or of external with internal signals.
As already mentioned, the utility can also control the rates directly with the
time switch signals TOUx. In this case no control logic with AND and OR
matrix is required. The time switch signals TOUx are produced in the
relevant day tables, which in turn are determined by week and season
tables or the exception day’s table.
The control signals CSx and time switch signals TOU-xx used have one of
the following two statuses:
1 Register or function active

0 Register or function inactive
8.2.2 Use of Control Table
The AND matrix first links the various signals from the signal sources, such
as control inputs, time switch signals, etc. to the logic signals LSx. Every
possible combination of statuses of the source signals must be assigned to
a logic signal (see also the following examples). The resulting logic signal is
then logic 1 if each of the source signals assigned has the status entered
(AND operation).
The following OR matrix then links the logic signals with the control signals
CSx. These are then active or logic 1 if one of the logic signals assigned
has the status logic 1 (OR operation – also see examples in this case).

8.2.3 Example of a Rate Control

The example is limited to energy rates, other rates or functions should be
treated in the same way. It comprises 3 rates for active power import
(measured quantity +A) and inductive reactive power (measured quantity
+Ri).
The rate control is performed externally via control inputs (signals E1 and
E2).
Energy registers ER1, ER2 and ER3 are first assigned to the measured
quantity +A, then registers ER4, ER5 and ER6 to measured quantity +Ri
(see illustration in section 8.2.4 “Example of a Combined Rate Control”).
ER1 and ER4 are activated with control signal CS1, ER2 and ER5 with
CS2 and ER3 and ER6 with CS3.
Assignment of
Register to Measured
Quantity and Control
Signal
Assignment of Control The 3 rates do indeed only require 3 control signals (CS1, CS2, CS3), but 2
Signals to Logic signals from one signal source, e.g. the two control inputs TI1 and TI2.
Signals and Signal These provide 4 possible combinations of signal statuses, however, and
Sources
therefore 4 logic signals. These should be assigned to one control signal
each (rate) according to the general rules of meter technology. One control
signal (rate) is therefore assigned 2 of the 4 logic signals.
In this way the 4 logic signals LS1 to LS4 are produced in the AND matrix
and the control signals CS1 to CS3 in the following OR matrix.

Control input TI1 0 1 0 1

Control input TI2 0 0 1 1
Control input TI3
2 signals from a signal source:
here generated by two control
inputs TI1 and TI2
Control signal CS1 X X

Control signal CS2 X
assigned to the control signals
CS1 = LS3 or LS4
CS2 = LS2 / CS3 = LS1
Assignment of Control The two control inputs TI-E1 and TI-E2 are finally assigned, for example, to
Inputs to Terminals terminals T0-8 and T0-9 respectively, which are then given the
designations E1 and E2 in the connection diagram.
This then provides the following rate control:
E1=0 and E2=0 Night rate Recorded in ER3 for +A or ER6 for +Ri
E1=1 and E2=0 Day rate Recorded in ER2 for +A or ER5 for +Ri
E1=0 and E2=1 and
E1=1 and E2=1 Peak rate Recorded in ER1 for +A or ER4 for +Ri
8.2.4 Example of a Combined Rate Control
Control input TI-E1 0 1 1 1

Time switch signal TOU-E1 1
assigned to the control signals
CS1 = LS4
CS2 = LS3
CS3 = LS1 or LS2
Control signal CS3 X X
In this example, 3 rates are again recorded for active power import
(measured quantity +A) and inductive reactive power (measured quantity
+Ri).
The assignment of the registers to the measured quantities and the control
signals remains the same.

In contrast, the rate control is performed internally with time switch signals
TOU-E1, E2 and E3. In addition, an external control signal (TI-E1) is to
inhibit the rate switching by the time switch: with signal TI-E1 = 0 the meter
only records energy in rate 3 (night rate).
The 3 rates again require the 3 control signals CS1, CS2 and CS3. In this
case, however, CS3 links the logic signals LS1 and LS2, which on one
hand result from the external signal TI-EI = 0 or on the other hand from the
combination TI-E1 = 1/TOU-E1 = 1. CS2 is produced from the combination
TI-E1 = 1 and TOU-E2 = 1. CS3 from TI-E1 = 1 and TOU-E3 = 1.
8.2.5 Further Signal Assignments
Operating Times The utility has up to 6 operating time registers available, with which it can
record the operating time of the control signal assigned. In principle all
control signals defined can be used from time switch or control logic.
Monitoring of the operating time, however, is mainly provided for the
external signals, in order to detect any irregularities in the control signals
(e.g. interruption of rate switching as a result of a technical fault or un-
authorised intervention).
Output Contacts All signals from the signal sources present can in principle be passed on to
external devices, depending on the number of output relays available.
These are above all those of the time switch signals, signals from the ripple
control receiver, event signals or status messages.
It is less sensible to pass on external signals present at the control inputs

via the meter.
Rate and Status These arrows refer to the corresponding inscription below the display on
Arrows the main face plate and indicate the current rates and current meter
statuses.
In addition to the signals shown, arrows can also indicate an activated reset
block, a setting or test mode connected or other useful function.
In addition, the arrow selected can appear permanently in the display

(above all for regular functions) or flash (particularly for irregular statuses,
such as invalid time and date or reset block active).

8.3 Parameterisation of Control Tables

8.3.1 Logic Operations
Example 3 Energy and AND operation Logic signals

2 Maximum Tariffs LS
Signal
sources
Control
signals
OR operation
The two control inputs E1 and E2 offer 4 combinations (logic signals) and
are assigned to the 3 control signals CS1, CS2 and CS3. The fourth
combination is assigned to one of the 3 control signals in order to avoid a
tariff gap.
Example Combination
of Internal and Control
External Control inputs
AND operation
TOU
signals
Control
OR operation
signals
The control input E2 enables – with the help of these operations – the
supply company to decide on-site whether the meter is controlled externally
(1) or internally via TOU (0).
AND Operation With the AND operation, you can define the state of the control sources
under which a particular LS signal must be logic high. The following states
are possible:
 The input signal must be logic 1

 The input signal must be logic 0
 The input signal does not matter (don’t care).

You can define up to 24 different conditions (i.e. AND operations).
Inverter The output signal of the AND operation (LS signal) can be inverted, if
necessary.
OR Operation The OR operation collects all the conditions (LS signals) that influence one
particular CS signal.
8.3.2 How to Set Up the Control Table for Tariff Control

To set up the control table for tariff control you have to:
 Decide how many tariffs are required

 Decide which energy tariff registers and maximum registers as well
as display arrows must be active with each tariff
 Decide which control signals (CS signals) are used to activate each
tariff (synchronous or immediate switching)
 Decide which signal sources are used to control the tariffs
(e.g. E1, E2, E3)
 Decide what logic state the signal sources must have to activate the
individual tariffs
 Set up the control table accordingly
 Select the control signals that enable and disable the various
energy registers (see section 10 “Energy Registration”).
 Select the control signals that enable the arrows in the display (see
section 15 “Arrows in Display”)
8.3.3 Active Control Sources

Select which signal sources (internal or external) are used as input control
signals for the control table.

The control sources can be enabled and disabled as a group only, i.e. all
control inputs E1, E2, etc. are enabled or none. A single control input (e.g.
E1) cannot be enabled.
Control Inputs Control inputs E1, E2, E3, P1, P2, P3, mB, SY
Time of Use 14 control signals of the time switch TOU-E1, TOU-
E2…TOU-S
Power Factor Event signals due to the power factor being too low.
Monitoring
Demand Event signals due to the demand being too high
Monitoring (current average value or average value over the last
integration period).
Current Event signals due to overcurrent or missing current in
Monitoring/Fraud phases L1, L2, L3 (overcurrent also N) and event
Detection signals due to fraud detection as, e.g. “Strong DC field
detection”, “Front cover removal”, “Terminal cover
removal”, etc.
Voltage Event signals due to over- or undervoltage or voltage
Monitoring drop in phases L1, L2 or L3.
Status Signal The status signal “Clock (time/date) not valid”.
Communication The 8 communication inputs (remote control signals)
Inputs
Available control sources

 Only the control sources that have been activated in the configuration can
be selected here.
8.3.4 Control Table

The control table is used to define the logic operations. Define which logic
state each signal source must have in order to produce an output signal
(CS1 to CS16) to be logic high.
AND Operation Define which conditions (logic state of signal sources) must be fulfilled for a
particular LS signal to be logic high.
The input signal must be logic high
The input signal must be logic low
The input signal state does not matter
In the line of the corresponding signal source, click on the symbol to

change to the required logic state.

Inverter Operation Define whether the LS signal must be inverted before it enters the OR
operation.
The LS signal is inverted
The LS signal is not inverted
In the Inverter line, click on the symbol to toggle it.
OR Operation Define which of the LS signals (if they are logic high) leads to a CS signal
being logic high.
The LS signal affects the CS signal
The LS signal does not affect the CS signal
In the line of the required CS signal, click on the symbol to toggle it.
Output Signal Names A maximum of 16 output control signals (CS1 to CS16) can be used.
Click on Edit at the required output control signal to name and activate it.
The output control signals can only be used for control if they are given a
name.
Synchronous or Select whether the output control signals switches to its new state
Immediate synchronously to the integration period or immediately after the input signal
Changeover change.
The output control signals switches synchronously to the end of

the integration period (recommended for meters with load profiles)
The output control signals switches immediately after the input
signal change (recommended for meters without load profiles)

8.3.5 Example
This example demonstrates how to set up the control table for a meter with
the following specification:
 Active and reactive energy in both energy directions (+A, –A, +Ri, –
Ri)
 Double tariff for active energy, double tariff for reactive energy
 The active energy shall be recorded in a separate tariff register if
the network voltage drops below the set undervoltage limit.
Preparation To be able to set up the control table the following questions must be
answered:
1. How many tariffs are required?

– Three: Active High and Active Low for normal voltage and a
separate tariff for low voltage.
2. Which energy registers must be active with each tariff and which control
signals (CS signals) are used to activate each tariff (synchronous or
immediate switching)?
+A Positive active energy tariff “High” CS1

+A Positive active energy tariff “Low” CS2
+A Positive active energy tariff “Undervoltage” CS3
–A Negative active energy tariff “High” CS1
–A Negative active energy tariff “Low” CS2
–A Negative active energy tariff “Undervoltage” CS3
+Ri Positive reactive energy tariff “High” CS1
+Ri Positive reactive energy tariff “Low” CS2
–Ri Negative reactive energy tariff “High” CS1
–Ri Negative reactive energy tariff “Low” CS2
3. Which signal sources are used to control the tariffs?

– The tariffs shall be controlled by the control input E1.
– The voltage monitor input is used to trigger the voltage
dependent tariff.
4. What logic state must the signal sources have to activate the individual
tariffs?
– The control input signal shall be active high to activate the tariff
“High”.
– The voltage monitor shall send a logic high as soon as a low
voltage on all three phases has been detected.

Setting Up the Control Now the control table can be set up.
Table
5. Enable the control sources “Control Inputs” and “Voltage Monitoring”.

6. Define the logic operations in the AND/OR matrix.
To activate tariff “High”, the control input signal E1 must be logic 1 and all
low voltage signals must be logic 0.
To activate tariff “Low”, the control input signal E1 must be logic 0 and all
low voltage signals must be logic 0.
7. Activate and name the three used control signals CS1 (High), CS2
(Low) and CS3 (Undervoltage) by clicking on Edit and entering an
appropriate name for the signal.

Activate the Energy Determine which control signals activate which energy tariff registers ERx
Registers (see also section 10 “Energy Registration”).
ER1 Positive active energy tariff “High” CS1

ER2 Positive active energy tariff “Low” CS2
ER3 Positive active energy tariff “Undervoltage” CS3
ER4 Negative active energy tariff “High” CS1
ER5 Negative active energy tariff “Low” CS2
ER6 Negative active energy tariff “Undervoltage” CS3
ER7 Positive reactive energy tariff “High” CS1
ER8 Positive reactive energy tariff “Low” CS2
ER9 Negative reactive energy tariff “High” CS1
ER10 Negative reactive energy tariff “Low” CS2
8.4 Communication Inputs

8.4.1 Setting via .MAP110
The communication inputs can be set via .MAP110: Choose “Write
Commands/Communication/Communication Input Settings” to open the
following window:
By clicking on a field you can toggle between 0, 1 and X (value remains the
same).

8.4.2 Technical Description of Communication Inputs

The following section describes the technical details concerned with the
communication necessary for the setting and deleting of inputs.
dlms Class Id 10100 = 0x2774 (there is only one instance of this class in each meter)
dlms Class Version 3
Attribute CommunicationInputs
Attribute Index 14 (Basis Address + 13*8)
Type octetstring[8]
This attribute is used to read or to set the control table inputs that can be
set by communications. This attribute exists only if the meter has such
inputs (i.e. requires dlms class version 3). Each value in the octetstring
represents an input. The order of the inputs is addressed in the octetstring
is as follows:
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

CI1 CI2 CI3 CI4 Cl5 Cl6 Cl7 Cl8
When the inputs are read, their state is given in ASCII format:
Input state Value read (hexadecimal)

0 0x30
1 0x31
When the inputs are written, their value is given in ASCII format and the
following rules apply:
Value written input state set to

0x30 0
0X31 1
Any other value No change
Example Value written: 31 31 30 88 75 26 99 99  sets inputs 1 and 2, clears input

3, inputs 4 to 8 remain unchanged.

Integration Period 133/390
9 Integration Period
9.1 Overview
The following details basically refer to the integration period. If the meter
uses an interval to form the average power value Prunning, it uses an interval
period corresponding to the integration period. Several interval periods form
the actual integration period.
Duration of In firmware versions up to P04, the following values are provided for the
Integration Period interval period and integration period:
3 – 5 – 10 – 15 – 20 – 30 – 60 minutes
In firmware versions P05 and P06, The demand integration period has
been enhanced with a sliding period of 180 min and 6 subintervals.
The relationship between integration period, number of intervals and

interval period can be seen from the table in section 11.3.2 “Sliding
Average Value”.
The integration period usually uses the internal quartz crystal as time base
and can be controlled or synchronised in various ways as described below
depending on the application. If the meter has load profiles, special
attention must be paid to the synchronisation.

134/390 Integration Period
9.2 Controlling the Integration Period

9.2.1 Type of Control
Internal The quartz crystal serves as time-base. The integration period can be
 Asynchronous
i.e. run independently of the time-of-day of the calendar clock (only
possible for meters without load profiles) or
 Synchronously with the time-of-day
It then starts on the hour every hour. In meters with load profiles,
the integration period is always time-synchronised.
External Via the mB input (only possible for meters without load profiles). The
external signal overrides the internal signal always present as described in
the following.
9.2.2 Internally Controlled Integration Period

The integration period is always produced from the frequency of the internal
quartz oscillator. The oscillator also serves as a time base for the calendar
clock and has a correspondingly high accuracy (< 5 ppm). The integration
period produced internally therefore also has a sufficiently high accuracy.
It can be influenced, however, by several possibilities, i.e. synchronised:
Mains Frequency The stable mains frequency in Western Europe represents a highly
accurate time reference over a long period. It is therefore customary to use
the mains frequency as a time base for calendar clocks. Here it corrects the
quartz frequency after every full wave and therefore integration period and
calendar clock.
For meters with load profiles, experience shows that the present time of
the meter can differ from that of a control centre connected owing to brief
fluctuations in mains frequency. In such cases an integration period
synchronised with the mains should not be used.
External Control This signal is primarily used to limit the power measurement for an ex-
Signal via the mB tended time (e.g. at low rate). In this case it overrides the internal signal
Input and can therefore also be used for external synchronisation of the
integration period. This must not, however, be time-synchronised.
Calendar Clock In many cases the integration period runs independently of the time-of-day
on the calendar clock, i.e. asynchronously. If it is linked to the calendar
clock, it always starts on the hour, i.e. time-synchronised. Its multiple must
produce 60 minutes however, e.g. 4 x 15 minutes or 12 x 5 minutes. For
recording load profiles, the integration period is always time-synchronised.

External Control With an external control signal, e.g. from a master clock, the utility can
Signal via the synchronise the calendar clock exactly. A simultaneous time-synchronised
Calendar Clock integration period therefore permits it also to be synchronised with this
signal. This method is usually used by the utility when it uses the periodic
memory for load profiles.
The integration period itself controls Prunning, by continuously comparing its

value for determination of the maximum at the end with the present Pmax,
setting Prunning to zero and starting the next integration period. With Prunning it
is produced from several interval periods.
Time Signal from If a central station is connected to the meter via a remote readout, it can
Central Station use the same communication path to synchronise the meter with a time
signal. This time signal is present as standard in central stations and also
used in the standard way in the meter.
9.2.3 Externally Controlled Integration Period

External control signal via terminal mB
Internal control signal from quartz

t
New integration New integration

period starts period starts
Time delay
normally negligible
The integration period runs until the control signal mB is at status “1”. It
ends with every interruption of the signal and simultaneously performs a
power comparison. The signal interruption should with external control last
at least 2 s, but must not exceed 60 s (see section 9.3 “Demand Inhibition”).
Control of the integration period is made via the same input mB as the
demand inhibition. The internal control does in fact run parallel, but the
external has higher priority and determines the time grid of the integration
period.
If the external signal comes before the internal, the power comparison
takes place immediately with a new start of the integration period and also
of the internal signal.
If the internal signal is before the external, it likewise initiates the power
comparison and re-starts the integration period. This re-start is interrupted,
however, by the following external signal which re-starts itself. This usually
produces a small time shift, but this is negligible if the external control is

sufficiently accurate. The utility, however, must ensure sufficient accuracy

of the external control.
Failure of External If the external control signal fails for any reason, the internal signal
Control automatically takes over control of the integration period while the external
signal is absent. This monitoring of the external control can be switched off
by the parameterisation, however, so that the absence of the external
control is apparent.
This permits the utility on the other hand to use both internal and external
control without having to use a second version for this purpose.
The external control in fact is increasingly being replaced by the internal.
External control signal

Failure Failure t
Internally Internally New start of

controlled controlled externally controlled
integration integration integration period
period period
15 min 15 min

9.2.4 New Start of Integration Period and Demand Measurement
Overview The following events may have an influence on the integration period (if
internally controlled) and the demand measurement:
 Voltage failure
 Setting time and date
 External changeover demand rate
 Resetting
The influence depends on whether the meter is equipped with load profiles.
Meters without load profiles usually have an asynchronous integration
period. In contrast, meters with load profiles always have a synchronous
integration period.
Asynchronous IP Synchronous IP
Setting time and date No new start New start
Synchronising time No new start No new start 1)
Voltage failure within the New start No new start 2)

integration period
Voltage failure beyond the New start 3) No new start 2)
integration period
Rate switching New start 3) No new start 4)
Resetting New start 3) No new start 4)
1) A new start would then take place if the time deviation is greater than
2 to 9 seconds (results in time setting).
2) Dependent on parameterisation, no new start recommended
3) Dependent on parameterisation, new start recommended
4) Dependent on parameterisation, rate switching recommended and
internal reset by time switch and calendar clock or delayed to end of
integration period.

Asynchronous kW
integration period P running
Voltage failure
Restart IP
Voltage return
t IP t < t IP Voltage interruption t IP
kW Rate switching
Time setting Reset
P running
Restart IP
no restart IP
t IP t IP t < t IP t IP
 Voltage failure always new start

If the voltage returns, the integration period always starts again new
and concludes with a complete integration period.
 Setting time/date no new start
Displacement of the time-of-day has no influence on the integration
period or therefore on the power measurement.
 Rate switching usually new start
The meter usually concludes the integration period in progress in the
old rate with the power comparison, even if it is incomplete and then
starts in the new rate with a complete integration period. The
integration period can also continue to run, however, whereby only the
demand measurement re-starts.
 Resetting usually new start
The meter usually concludes the integration period in progress in the
completed billing period with the power comparison, even if it is
incomplete and then starts the new billing period with a complete
integration period. The integration period can also continue to run,
however, whereby only the demand measurement re-starts.

Time-Synchronised The events described below only influence the demand measurement. The
Integration Period integration period is tied to the time scale of the calendar clock and
therefore has no new start.
kW
Voltage failure
P running
Return
Restart IP
t IP t IP t IP t IP
kW
Voltage failure Voltage return
P running
N x t IP Restart IP
t IP t IP t < t IP t IP
t IP
 Voltage failure see above illustration

If the voltage returns within the same integration period, the demand
measurement is not interrupted. The average value Prunning remains at
its value and continues the measurement following the return of the
voltage until the end of the period. The power comparison and new
start are then performed. The utility can also parameterise a new start
if needed. In this case two incomplete integration periods are produced
as with rate switching, which should be avoided at all costs with load
profiles.
If the voltage failure continues beyond the integration period, the demand
measurement starts as soon as the voltage is restored, but closes time-
synchronised. The integration period, however, starts at the time specified
by the calendar clock. The calendar clock continues running during the
voltage failure provided the power reserve is sufficient. This produces an
average value of power during the entire new integration period.

Integrating period IP synchronous to time
Integration Period IP kW Rate switching
Synchronous to Time P running Reset
Time setting
no restart IP
Restart IP
t IP t IP t < t IP t < t IP t IP
t IP
kW
Rate switching
P running Reset no restart of IP
demand comparison
only at the end of IP
t IP t IP t IP t IP
 Setting time/date
With a shift in the time-of-day, the demand measurement closes before
the time setting and then always makes a new start. Since the
integration period is time-synchronised, a too long or too short
integration period would otherwise occur followed by a too high
average value of power.
For meters with load profiles, time-setting should be avoided at all costs by
regular (every 24 hours) synchronisation of the calendar clock and
therefore also of the integration period by an external signal.
kW Tariff change
P running Reset
Time shift
no restart IP
Restart IP
t IP t IP t < t IP t < t IP t IP
t IP
kW
Tariff change
P running Reset no restart of IP
power comparison
only at the end of IP
t IP t IP t IP t IP

 Rate switching
The meter concludes the integration period in progress in the old rate
with the power comparison, even if it is incomplete and starts in the
new rate with a new, possibly incomplete measurement, since it does
not interrupt the integration period.
When using load profiles, this must be avoided whenever possible,
since otherwise two entries would be produced. Either the utility
similarly controls the rate switching time-synchronised or it specifies
that the rate switching only takes place at the end of the integration
period.
 Resetting
The meter concludes the measurement in progress in the concluded
billing period with the power comparison, even if it is incomplete and
always starts the new billing period with a new, possibly incomplete
measurement, since the reset does not interrupt the integration period.
When using load profiles, this must also be avoided whenever
possible, since otherwise two entries would be produced. Either the
utility also controls the reset time-synchronised or it specifies that the
reset like the rate switching only takes place at the end of the
integration period.
9.3 Demand Inhibition

9.3.1 External Control
External demand inhibition is made via control input mB. This has two basic
functions:
m external control of integration period

B external control of demand inhibition
This dual function goes back to the mechanical cumulative maximum

meters. In that case this input controls a relay, which firstly opens and
closes the coupling for the integration period and secondly leaves the
coupling open for the inhibition. An electronic system requires a somewhat
different treatment of this input and depends on the type of control.
 If the control input mB is active, voltage must be applied to it for a

demand measurement to take place.

Externally Controlled
Integration Period and P running
Demand Inhibition
Signal up to 60 s
voltage
Input m B
1. External control of
integration period m
t
D em and com parison
and start of a new integration period
2. Inhibition of demand
measurement B
Signal
voltage 60 s
Input m B P running
t
D em and com parison D em and m easurem ent
interruption
Within a few ms of interruption of the signal voltage at input mB the meter

performs a power comparison and immediately re-starts the measurement
and integration period. At the same time it measures the time since start of
the interruption.
If the signal voltage is restored within 60 s, the power measurement started

continues usually. This is the case with control of the integration period,
since the (external) contact m remains open during 1% of the integration
period (1% of max. 60 minutes is 36 s).
If contact B opens, it also remains open after 60 s. In this case the power
measurement is interrupted after the 60 s without power comparison and
remains interrupted until voltage is restored to the mB input.
Control signal mB
60 s t
Restart of
i ntegration
Demand inhibition active p eriod
te te t
Retransmitting contact
of integration period
te : decoupling time

Integration Period
Controlled Internally, Control signal mB
Demand Inhibition
Externally t
Restart of
i ntegration
Demand inhibition active p eriod
te t
Retransmitting contact
of integration period
With internal control of the integration period the meter detects the
interruption at signal input mB in all cases as inhibiting of the power
measurement and does not initiate a new start of the power measurement
and integration period.
9.3.2 Internal Control

The demand inhibition can be controlled internally in the following ways,
provided the function concerned (time switch) is included in the meter:
 By the time switch

For this purpose a time switch signal TOUx must be set to “1” in the
relevant day table only during the time in which demand measurement
is to take place. This signal switches the demand register or registers
allocated on or off.
 By linkage with the rate control
In this way the utility can limit the power for this purpose, e.g. during
the low rate time, but only requires to use one control line. This control
signal can be fed via a control input or from the time switch and
operates as described above.
If the utility wishes to separate the two functions again later, however,
it has to do this by re-parameterisation.
9.3.3 Transfer of Integration Period or Demand Inhibition

The integration period can be transferred to external devices via one of the
existing relays. Transfer is made according to the following diagram either
in the
 Opening circuit in which the external device (external relay) is

connected in series with the contact of the internal relay or
 Short-circuiting circuit in which the external device is connected in
parallel with the contact.

Open connection
Integration period te
Short circuit connection
Integration period te
The contact is closed in the opening circuit during the integration period
and controls with a signal interruption. With the short-circuiting circuit it is
open and controls with a signal pulse. This pulse or the interruption, i.e. the
decoupling time is either
 1% of the integration period, i.e. 9 s for example with a period of

15 minutes or
 a selected time between 1 and several seconds.
The decoupling time always comes at the start of the integration period and
causes a corresponding delayed closing of the contact (refer also to the
illustrations in section 9.3 “Demand Inhibition”).
For special applications the utility can select both transfers and assign them
each to a (neighbouring) output contact. These operate like a changeover
contact. The utility can thereby select between the opening and short-
circuiting circuit without having to re-parameterise the meter.
Transfer with Time If integration period and demand inhibition are externally controlled, the
Limiting transfer contact operates again for approx. 60 s at the start of the demand
inhibition (see illustrations in section 9.3 “Demand Inhibition”). The circuit
shown in the following illustration prevents the device connected being
switched on again.
Signal source Meter Signal receiver

e.g. RCR,
time switch
etc.
e
Signal mB mB
output
mB
mB Control input interval period/

demand inhibition
e Retransmission of integration period

9.3.4 Summary
External control Internal control
via mB input
m B m Calendar
Integration period
clock
mB
B Time switch
Demand inhibition
linked with
rate control
e-contact
Retransmission of
integration period/demand inhibition
Integration Period Control of the integration period is usually performed internally and in this
case always by the quartz oscillator of the calendar clock. The integration
period can be synchronised with the time-of-day, so that it always starts on
the hour.
Example: an integration period of 15 minutes begins at 10:00, 10:15,

10:30, 10:45, 11:00, 11:15, etc.
The external control serves to synchronise exactly the integration period of

several units, e.g. for recording load profiles.
Inhibition of Power With the time limit the utility interrupts the power measurement during a
Measurement given time, e.g. in low rate or during the weekend. Control can take place
 Externally via the control input mB

 Internally by the calendar clock or its day tables
 Internally by linking with the rate switching

9.4 Parameterisation of Integration Period

9.4.1 Defining the Integration Period
Meter without Load

Profiles
Meter with Load

Profiles

Has Subintervals Set the tick if you need a sliding maximum with several subintervals within
an integration period.
Period Length Select the length of the integration period.
Number of If the subintervals have been enabled for a sliding maximum, choose the
Subintervals number of subintervals within one integration period. For a period length of
180 minutes, the number of subintervals is fixed set at 6.
Subinterval Length The MAP tool automatically calculates the length of the subintervals based
on the length of the integration period and the number of subintervals.
Restart of Period After Select whether or not a power failure, a rate switching or a billing period
reset results in an integration period restart. An immediate restart is
recommended with meters without load profiles, but not with meters with
load profiles.
New start of integration period

 Only use control signals whose state changes synchronously with the end
of an integration period (EOP) for the tariff change with meters with load
profiles.
Period Control This is only available with meters without load profiles. Select whether the
integration period is controlled by the internal clock (synchronous or
asynchronous) or by the external signal mB.
In order to select the external synchronisation, the mB signal must be

allocated to one of the terminals. The mB signal input may also be used to
activate demand inhibition. Tick the corresponding box to do so.
Period Output If one of the transmitting contacts is used to signal the end of the
integration period, the pulse length of the signal (detent time) is usually 1%
of the integration period. The absolute length in seconds is stated by the
MAP tool.
You can also set the detent time over a range from 1 to 60 s independently
of the length of the integration period.
For this purpose click on to release the input box and enter the required
detent time.

End of integration Depending on the parameterisation, the capture period length of either
period triggers Load Profile 1 or Load Profile 2 is set automatically to the integration period
selected.
The capture period length of the other LP is user-selectable from a drop-

down list (for more information, see section 18.7.2 “Registers Captured in
Load Profiles”).
9.4.2 Examples of Integration Period Definitions

The following examples are typical applications.
With Load Profiles,

Synchronous
Integration Period
The integration period of 15 minutes is controlled internally by the calendar

clock. Because the meter has a load profile, the integration period is
synchronous with the calendar clock. The “Period Control” area is faded out
in meters with load profiles.
There are no subintervals, i.e. there is no sliding demand.

Without Load Profiles,

External Control of
Integration Period
The integration period of 15 minutes is controlled externally by the signal

mB.
This is only possible when the control input mB has already been defined
(see section 5.6.5 “Control Input”).
External control of the integration period is only possible with meters

without load profiles.
The integration period is restarted if a power failure or a billing period reset

occurs but will not be restarted in the event of a rate switching.
There are no subintervals, i.e. there is no sliding demand.

150/390 Energy Registration
10 Energy Registration
10.1 Tariffication Overview
10.1.1 Formation of Measured Quantities
A total of 15 (P05) or 19 (P06) measured quantities are available for further

processing of the energy values from the sum and the individual phases:
ME1 to ME12 Freely parameterised for active, reactive or apparent

energy.
ME13 to ME15 Permanently assigned to Ampère-hours Ah1, Ah2, Ah3.
These measuring quantities are only present if “Fraud
detection” was enabled in the configuration.
ME16 to ME19 Fixed assignments for losses (in firmware version P06).
These measuring quantities are only present if “Losses”
was enabled in the configuration.
The powers, voltages and currents, mains frequency and phase angles as
instantaneous values form the basis for monitoring and mains analysis.
10.1.2 Signal Utilisation
Versions E550 meters are available in two basic versions with respect to tariff unit:
 Version with tariff unit xR1 or xR2 (energy)

This version features energy registers and energy total registers,
but no demand registers.
 Version with tariff unit xR3 or xR4 (energy and demand)
This version features energy registers, energy total registers and
demand registers.

Energy Registration 151/390
Energy Registration Each of the 15 (P05) or 19 (P06) measured quantities ME1 to ME15 (P05
or 19 (P06) has a total register (ME1 to ME12 total energy, ME 13 to ME15
total Ampère-hours, ME16 to ME19 losses).
Measured quantities ME1 to M12 are available for energy rates, but not
ME13 to ME15 (P05) or ME19 (P06). 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) energy rate
registers are available, depending on meter configuration. Tariffication itself
takes place in the up to 48 energy rate registers available.
Demand Registration Measured quantities ME1 to ME8 are available for demand rates, but not
ME9 to ME15 (P05) or ME19 (P06).
 The 8 registers for the running average demand value (Prunning) are
fix assigned to ME1 to ME8 and have each an average demand
value register for the last integration period.
 E550 meters have 24 maximum registers for rate control.
Power Factor The combimeter can process the power factor in the two following ways:
 From the running average values of A and VA the average value

over the integration period, which forms the PF minimum in 1 or 2
registers similar to the maximum
 From the energy advance registers for A and VA the average value
over the resetting or billing period
Data Selection The registers can generally be
 Represented in the operating display,

 On-site read out in the display or service list,
 Read out via the IEC protocol or
 Read out individually via dlms,

 Stored in the stored values profile per billing period (without average
demand values)
 Recorded in a load profile per integration period (only energy total
and average demand values during the last integration period)
10.2 Energy Registers

E550 meters have 12 energy total registers (excluding the Ah and losses)
and additionally 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) energy rate registers for energy
recording in several rates.
10.2.1 Structure
Maximum 12 registers,
1 for each selected
measured quantity Stored value profile
Energy total register 1
Running status 1st stored value
Maximum 48 energy rate registers

Energy rate register 2
Running status
or consumption 1 st stored value
Energy rate register 1

Running status
or consumption 1st stored value
Measured
Rate control Reset
quantites
ME1 to ME12
The energy registers of the E550 meters can record the incoming energy
proportions of the measuring part in the following ways:
 As cumulated status (time integral 1 to OBIS) with or without stored

values
 As consumption during the billing period (time integral 2 to OBIS)
always with stored values
 As advance during the capture period of a load profile (time integral
5 to OBIS) only for recording in a load profile
From registers with status or consumption the meter can form stored values
with each reset, by storing the relevant values in a stored value profile. The
maximum number of stored values depends on the number of registers, but
is usually sufficient for at least 15 per register.
The registers with status or consumption can be used for tariffication, but
not those with advance.

10.2.2 Types of Recording
Cumulated Status This method of operation corresponds to the mechanical counters. The
registers record the measured energy assigned to them since installation of
the meter and cannot usually be reset. For billing, the utility must subtract
the reading at the end of the last billing period from the new reading to
obtain the energy consumption for the current billing period.
Cumulated statuses use the “8” in the index (e.g. 1.8.1 for active energy
import, rate 1).
Consumption For consumption (advance during the billing period) the meter sets the
energy registers concerned to zero with every reset and thereby records
the energy consumption until the next reset, i.e. until the end of the billing
period. The term “delta values” is also often used.
Consumption values require stored value registers, since the current

register is set to zero with every reset.
Consumption or delta values use the “9” in the index (e.g. 1.9.1 for active
energy import, rate 1).
Advance The advance (during the integration period) basically operates in the same
way as the consumption. It uses a separate register, however, and the
capture period of a load profile as the control signal for start and end of
energy recording. Its content is fed immediately and exclusively to the load
profile.
Advance values use the “29” in the index (e.g. 1.29.0 for import of active
energy).

10.2.3 Energy Recording as Status

0042500
Reset
End of billing period
5300
Energy recording as status
0037200
4300
0032900
6600
0026300
Classical energy recording is performed as status similar to mechanical

counters. The memory for the present value summates the energy
proportions continuously. The consumption during a billing period is
provided by the difference between new and old status. This can be the
present status at the time of the relevant reading or the stored value for the
period concerned. Calculation is made after every reading in the electronic
data processing of the utility. The reason that processing of the status is
still preferred by the utilities is because of the same processing for
electronic and mechanical meters.
10.2.4 Energy Consumption

0042500
Reset
End of billing period
5300
Energy recording as status
0037200
4300
0032900
6600 6600 Energy recording as consumption

5300
4300
0026300
E550 meters can record the energy as status or as consumption.
The meter sets the content of the relevant energy registers to zero at the
end of the billing period and saves the consumption previously determined
as stored value. It then records the energy consumption during the next
billing period and again saves this as stored value. The utility can use the
consumption determined in this way directly for billing.

10.2.5 Energy Advance

Load profiles can record the energy in two ways:
 As status of energy total registers

 As advance for the suitably parameterised registers
Energy total registers have a high resolution owing to the short capture
period, but this causes no loss of energy. Advance registers on the other
hand can have a finer resolution for the shorter capture period.
Advance registers are provided above all for tariffication outside the meter,
for which every meter must have a load profile but no maximum.
End of
capture 0045305
period Load profile
Recording as status 03-07-11 10:15 0044621
03-07-11 10:30 0044890
03-07-11 10:45 0045077
0045077 03-07-11 11:00 0045305
etc. etc.
0044890
Recording as advance 03-07-11 10:15 245.04

269.35 03-07-11 10:30 269.35
03-07-11 10:45 187.83
228.69
03-07-11 11:00 228.69
187.83 etc. etc.
0044621
10:15 10:30 10:45 11:00
No direct tariffication
 The registers for the advance during the capture period are basically
provided for tariffication outside the meter. There is therefore no sense in
tariffication in the meter.
Residual Value If the meter registers energy as advance, it only stores the value that is
Processing visible in the display to the stored value profile or to a load profile. The
remainder is not displayed but is retained in the memory and is included in
the next billing or capture period. As a result, the sum of advance values in
the load profile always corresponds with the cumulative values of the
energy total registers.

10.2.6 Sum of Rated Registers

It is possible that at certain times there is a difference of 1 or 2 in the last
digit between the total register and the sum of all rated registers:
The difference between the energy total register and the sum of all rated
registers is not accumulated.
Registers Content Content Content

time t time t+1 time t+2
Register rate 1 00000010 00000012 00000013
Register rate 2 00000012 00000013 00000014
Register rate 3 00000015 00000018 00000020
Total register 00000037 00000043 00000047
Total register (display) 0000003 0000004 0000004
Sum rated registers 0000003 0000003 0000004

(read from display)
shaded figures no difference no
are not displayed difference of 1 difference
10.2.7 Primary and Secondary Data

The ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection can be parameterised for
primary or secondary data.
If parameterised for primary data the display and readout of energy data
always appear as primary data, i.e. they need no longer be multiplied by a
transformer factor.
10.2.8 Rate Control

Rate control is realised by selecting which energy rate register(s) take over
the measured quantities at a given time. A maximum of 12 measured
quantities may be allocated to up to 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) energy registers,
to permit a convenient tariff structure.
10.2.9 Format of the Energy Registers
Register Size The size of the energy total registers and of the energy rate registers for
cumulative and advance values may vary between 5 and 8 digits,
depending on parameter setting. A maximum of 4 decimal places are
possible.
Register Resolution The resolution of the energy registers (significance of last visible digit)
depends on the maximum power applied to the meter and the maximum
time until a register overflow occurs that is required for the application.
For details see section 2.2 “Choice of Correct Register Resolution”.

10.2.10 Display
Display Format 5 to 8 digits are shown in the value field of the display, maximum 4 of which
can be decimal places. Decimal places and units appear in the display as
defined by the register resolution parameter.
In P06, you can also specify the display format of instantaneous power
(Signed or Unsigned).
Test Mode A test mode is provided for test purposes, which provides a higher
resolution of the registers and therefore reduces the testing time
accordingly.
The resolution of the energy registers in the test mode can be set
independently.
Display Examples Some examples are given below of energy register displays. The
identification figures for the individual data correspond to the energy data
Active energy import (1)

Cumulative value (8)
Rate 1
Stored value 26
Active energy import
Reactive energy inductive (5)

Rate 1
Active energy export (2)
Energy total register (0)

10.3 Parameterisation of Energy Registers

10.3.1 Energy Register Definition
To define an energy register:
 Make sure that you have defined the required measured quantity
(see section 3.4 “Parameterisation of Measured Quantities”).
 Click on the corresponding energy register (ER) number and set the
following parameters:
Measured Quantity Select the measured quantity whose values are to be registered in this
energy register.
If the power factor measurement has been activated in the configuration,
the MAP tool automatically assigns the measured quantities in the
following way:
 +A ME1, –A ME2, +VA or –VA ME8.
This allocation cannot be modified. In addition, the MAP tool will not allow
a second allocation of the same measured quantity to another energy
register.
Time Integration Select the method of energy registration. If the energy register is to show
Period cumulative values, select “continuous (standard)”. If the energy register is
to show delta values, select whether the register is cleared after the
capture period or after the billing period.

Primary / Secondary Energy registers always indicate primary values in E550 meters. No
Value selection is therefore possible.
Control Signal Select the control signal which activates the register (rate control). The
function “always active” corresponds to the total register of the
corresponding measured quantity. Use it only if it has to have a tariff
number which is not zero.
Rate Number
Enter the rate number that is used to indicate the currently active tariff. The
rate number is added as suffix to the dlms logical name (field E). Usually
“1” is used to indicate tariff 1, “2” to indicate tariff 2, etc.
Do not use “0” as rate number

 Do not use “0” as rate number. “0” is used for the total energy registers,
which are available by default and do not have to be defined by the user.
dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of an energy register (object)
according to the OBIS standard. The central station uses the identification
code to automatically identify each measured value.
When defining an energy register it is allocated automatically.
ID String The ID string appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC read-
out. By default the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name
according to the OBIS standard. However, if really necessary, the users
can set their own ID string for each register/object.

10.3.2 Energy Pulse Count Registers (functional range “South Korea”)

You can define up to 8 energy pulse count registers to be captured in a
load profile.

Demand Registration 161/390
11 Demand Registration
11.1 Overview
From the measured quantities prepared by the measuring unit, the utility
may select up to 15 (P05) or 19 (P06) for further processing.
The selected measured quantities can be recorded as follows:
 In the energy total registers as cumulative values

 In the energy rate registers as cumulative values or consumption
values
 In the demand registers as average and maximum values
Versions E550 meters are available in two basic versions with respect to tariff unit:
 Version with tariff unit xR1 or xR2 (energy)

This version features energy registers and energy total registers,
but no demand registers.
 Version with tariff unit xR3 or xR4 (energy and demand)
This version features energy registers, energy total registers and
demand registers.
xR3 or xR4 required for demand registration

 For demand registration, the meter must be fitted with either the tariff unit
xR3 or xR4.

162/390 Demand Registration
11.2 Demand Registers

For demand registration, E550 meters feature the following registers:
 8 registers for average demand values of the current integration

period, fix assigned to the measured quantities ME1 to ME8 (Prunning)
 8 registers for average demand values of the last integration period,
1 register each per running average value (P last)
 8 (P05) or 24 (P06) maximum demand registers (Pmax)
 8 cumulative maximum registers (Pmax cumulated).
11.2.1 Structure
Max. 24 maximum demand registers
etc.
etc. Maximum demand
register 2 latest value
1: P running y 2 : P max 2
yes
1>2? Date / time Stored value profile
Rate switching
P running P max cumul. latest value
last integrat.
period
Maximum demand Reset
register 1
Calendar clock
yes 2 : P max 1
1: P running x 1>2?
Date / time
Measured Rate switching

quantities
ME1 to ME8
The maximum demand registers fitted serve to determine the maximum

demand in the normal way:
Prunning For each of the measured values ME1 to ME8, there is assigned one
register for the running average demand value Prunning. These function
independently of the actual maximum registers, which form the maximum
P.
Register Prunning forms the running average value by accepting the energy
proportions per second, adapting these to the integration period and
producing the actual average value at the end of the integration period. It
operates in a similar way to previous electronic meters and also the
mechanical counters.
Prunning for Last The value of Prunning is produced at the last second at the end of the
Integration Period integration period and is then immediately reset to zero. For subsequent
functions, such as maximum formation, it is difficult to record this value
directly. The E550 meter therefore saves the value just determined, which
remains during the next integration period. For this purpose Prunning has a
second storage position, which saves the running average value for the last
integration period (P last).

Formation of Pmax in The actual maximum demand register compares the present Pmax (2) with
the Active Rate Prunning (1). If Prunning is greater than the present Pmax, the meter stores Prunning
as new Pmax, together with date and time. The previous Pmax is then
overwritten.
With several max. demand rates the maximum demand registers

concerned access the same Prunning (e.g. register 1 and register 2 to Prunning
x). The rate control determines in which register the power comparison
takes place.
Inhibition The external control signal mB or the time switch signal B formed internally
in the time switch can switch off the maximum formation for a certain time
(e.g. at the weekend). An energy rate control signal can also be used for
demand inhibition (e.g. in low rate).
Reset It cumulates Pmax in the memory Pmax cumulated, saves Pmax itself together
with date and time as stored value, resets the present Pmax to zero to start
the maximum formation for the following billing period.
11.2.2 Sliding Maximum
P running P max cumul. latest stored value

last integra-
ting period
Maximum demand Reset
register 1
Calendar clock
1: P running yes 2 : P max 1
= P sliding 1>2?
from N P interval Date / time
N = 1 to 15
Rate control
P interval x
Measured
quantity
ME1 to ME8
E550 meters can form a sliding maximum over several intervals instead of
the normal maximum.
While the normal Prunning starts at zero for every integration period, it is
produced in this case from the mean value over several intervals. The
value of the oldest interval is deducted at the end of every interval and the
new interval added. The demand comparison is made following every
interval and not only at the end of the total integration period. A sliding
maximum over an integration period of 15 minutes with 5 intervals of 3
minutes each performs the demand comparison every 3 minutes, but
always with a mean value over 15 minutes.

Pinterval functions like the normal demand mean value and starts at zero for
every interval period. Up to 15 intervals are possible, which for example
permits a newly formed Prunning every minute.
11.2.3 Integration Period

The integration period is the time during which the demand is measured
and integrated. The demand mean value Prunning is available at the end of
the integration period. In meters with load profiles, the capture period
corresponds to the integration period.
11.3 Running Average Value Prunning

11.3.1 Simple Average Value
P running
of last inte- P running
gration period > P max ?
P running
P running
reset
Measured integration period
quantity
tm tm
tm = interval period = integration period
The Prunning memory continuously determines the mean power value until
the end of the integration period. The meter then stores Prunning in register P
for the last integration period, which basically serves for further processing
and the contents of which can be displayed and called up by the user
during the entire following integration period. At the same time it performs
the demand comparison and resets Prunning to zero.
Register Prunning always displays an intermediate status during the

integration period, which only conditionally permits information about the
expected final value.

11.3.2 Sliding Average Value
The utility can then also combine several intervals to a total integration
period to form a sliding mean value, which is renewed at every interval.
Up to 15 intervals can be combined into a total integration period. The

meter stores each P interval in a ring buffer and finds the mean of the P
intervals stored at the end of every interval. This produces, for example, a
sliding mean value over 15 minutes from 15 intervals of 1 minute each,
which is, however, renewed every minute.
The power comparison is then performed after every interval period, not at
the end of the total integration period. The mean value Prunning also only
remains present during the next interval period.
The following illustration shows the sequence for forming the sliding mean
value. It starts new with the first P interval, as is the case, for example,
following a reset or rate switching.
 While the value of the interval period corresponds to the mean value
of this period (256 kW), the rolling mean value increases in relation
to the total integration period (51 kW).
 At the end of the interval period P interval returns to zero, but the
sliding mean value continues to run.
 After 5 interval periods the first sliding mean value of a complete
integration period is produced (335 kW).
 The meter then reduces the sliding mean value by the value of the
oldest P interval in relation to the integration period (51 kW) and
continuously records the value of the next interval period until the
new sliding mean value at the end of the next interval period (329
kW).
 After every interval period, the meter compares the sliding mean
value with the present Pmax and stores this as new Pmax, provided it
is higher than the previous Pmax (power comparison).
 Etc.

531
kW 478
P interval 423
360 363
309 330
256 271
225
171
351 363 364

kW 335 329 336
302
263
167
113
51
complete integration periods over 5 interval periods
Possible Intervals The following table contains the number of possible intervals with reference
to the integration periods provided and the possible interval periods.
Where
 Minimum measuring and interval period 1 minute

 Maximum measuring and interval period 60 minutes
 Maximum number of intervals 15
Integration Number of intervals

period
in minutes 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15
Duration of interval period in minutes
3 3 – – – 1 – – – –
5 5 – – – 1 – – – –
10 10 5 – – 2 – 1 – –
15 15 – 5 – 3 – – – 1
20 20 10 – 5 4 – 2 – –
30 30 15 10 – 6 5 3 – 2
60 60 30 20 15 12 10 6 5 4
180 – – – – – 30 – – –

11.3.3 Residual Value Processing

In the case of sliding demand, the current mean value of demand is stored
at the end of every subinterval rather than at the end of the integration
period.
At the end of the integration period or subinterval, only the part of the
current mean value of demand that is visible in the display is stored in the
register for the last integration period. The value can also be stored in a
load profile.
The residual value remaining in the value register is taken into account in
the next integration period.
11.3.4 Load Profile Entries

With simple mean values of demand, the values for the last integration
period can be stored in a load profile at the end of every integration period.
In this case, the sum of the integration periods corresponds to the
cumulated status of the energy total registers.
In the case of sliding demand, two cases are possible:
 If the capture period of the load profile corresponds with the

subinterval, the mean values can be stored for the subinterval. It is
not possible to store the mean values over several subintervals or
the integration period.
 If the capture period of the load profile corresponds to the
integration period, no demand values can be stored in the load
profile. In this case energy values (cumulative or delta) must be
used.
11.4 Prunning of Last Integration Period
P running
of last inte-
gration period P running stays in the register
P running during the next integration
> P max ? period
P running
reset
measured integration period
quantity
tm tm
Integration periods
The actual mean power value Prunning is only produced at the end of the
integration period (or immediately before the power comparison). It re-
mains stored in its own register during the following integration period or

interval period. The contents of this register can now be displayed and also
read out.
It can be useful for the power supply customer to know the value for the
integration period just completed concerning his present loading by
indicating a possible critical condition.
The load profile also always accesses this value, as does the register for
power factor mean value during the integration period, provided these
functions are present.
Prunning of Last In the case of sliding mean value, Prunning is always produced for the last
Integration Period integration period at the end of the interval period, but not at the end of the
with Sliding Maximum total integration period. The load profile can only record mean values
during the interval period.
P last integrating period

registration period of load profile = interval period
531
kW 478
P interval 423
360 363
309 330
256 271
225
171
kW 478
423 531
360 363
309 330
256 271
225
171
P last interval period
11.5 Maximum Demand

11.5.1 Power Comparison
Provided the maximum recording is not interrupted by the inhibition, the
meter compares Prunning at the end of the integration period with the value
Pmax in the associated demand register. With several demand rates the rate
control determines which register makes the comparison. Several demand
registers can also perform the comparison simultaneously.
The power comparison is performed as follows:
 If Prunning is < Pmax,

Pmax remains in its memory.
 If Prunning > Pmax,
the meter stores the value of Prunning as new Pmax and also records
the relevant time and date when the new maximum occurred. The
date and time can be displayed and read out together with Pmax.

This produces the following sequence:
Register P max
Power
Register P running
At the beginning of the reset period, register Pmax is at zero where it re-
mains during the entire first integration period. The power comparison is
made at the end and the first maximum is produced. Provided then Prunning
remains below Pmax, Pmax does not change. As soon as Prunning exceeds
Pmax, the meter inserts Pmax at the end of the relevant integration period.
Pmax finally remains at the highest value reached by Prunning.
The power comparison is repeated throughout the entire resetting period,

usually one month. The meter determines for an integration period of 15
min. for example around 3000 Prunning per month, but only records the
highest value. All the others are lost, unless the load profile of the utility is
determined by periodic saving of the values.
At the end of a resetting period (see section 16 “Resetting”) the meter

stores Pmax together with time and date as stored value and cumulates Pmax
in the Pmax cumulated register. It then resets the Pmax register to zero and
the power measurement starts in the new resetting period.
Prunning as Psliding If the meter records Prunning as sliding mean value during several intervals, a
new mean value of Prunning is produced after every interval. The meter then
performs a power comparison after every interval period as described above.

11.5.2 Power Comparison Procedure

At the end of every integration period the power comparison is performed
as follows:
Comparison
P running <> P max
new P max with

date and
time
P running restarts
The meter compares the mean value of Prunning just formed from one or
more intervals (index 1.4.0) with the present maximum value Pmax (1.6.1).
If Prunning is less than Pmax, Pmax is retained. No new maximum value is

therefore produced.
If Prunning is greater than Pmax, a new maximum value is produced as shown

in the example in above illustration. Together with the new maximum value
Pmax, the meter stores the instant with time and date when Pmax occurred.
Immediately following the power comparison the meter resets the P interval
register to zero and restarts the power measurement and integration period.
After this and all following periods it again performs a power comparison.
The sequence only takes a few milliseconds, there is no decoupling time as

in mechanical meters. The meter therefore records the mean power value
without interruption during the complete integration period.
The final status of the “15” integration period (display top left) shown in
above illustration will never be seen. At the instant the integration period
changes from 14:59 to 15:00, the period jumps directly to 00:00 and starts
again. 15:00 is not a definite time in this case.
11.6 Format of the Demand Registers
Register Size The registers for the demand mean value and maximum demand usually
have 4 digits with up to 3 decimal places. For the lowest demand at the
meter (100 V, 1 A, 200 VA) 4 decimal places are necessary and a 5th digit
before the decimal point.
The size of the cumulative maximum registers is automatically set to 2

digits larger than the mean and maximum demand registers. The number of
decimal places remains the same.

Register Resolution The resolution of the demand registers (significance of last visible digit)
depends on the maximum possible demand at the meter. This must not
cause a register overflow.
For details see section 2.2 “Choice of Correct Register Resolution”.
11.7 Display and Readout
Values Available The following demand values are available for display and readout
depending on the parameterisation:
 Average demand values of current integration period with the status

of the integration period
 Average demand values of last integration period
 Current demand maximum values during the current billing period
with date and time of occurrence
 Current status of cumulative maximum demand
 Maximum demand values of preceding billing periods as stored
values with date and time
Display Examples Some examples are given below of demand register displays. The
identification codes for the individual data correspond to the energy data
Active power import (1)

Pmax cumulated (2)

Prunning (4)
Status integration period (06)
Present Pmax (6)
Rate 1
Date of Pmax
(14 July 2005)
Time-of-day of Pmax
Pmax of previous month

Stored value of reset number
26

11.8 Parameterisation of Demand Registers

11.8.1 Register Definition for Average Values of Demand
For the register definition for average values of demand (current and last
integration period), please refer to 3.4 “Parameterisation of Measured
Quantities”. Each measuring quantity defined there always has an energy
total register as well as a register for the running and the last average value
of demand, if the tariffication includes energy and power.
11.8.2 Register Definition for Maximum Values of Demand

Each maximum register that is defined by the following parameters also
features a cumulative maximum register.
To define a maximum demand register, click on the corresponding MDR

number and set the following parameters:
Measured Quantity Select the measured quantity whose values are to be captured in this
maximum demand register.
Control Signal Select whether the maximum demand register is “always active” or which
signal is used to activate it (demand inhibition, rate control).

Rate Number Enter the rate number that is used to indicate the currently active tariff. The

 Do not use “0” as rate number. “0” is used for the registers for average
values of demand.
dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of these registers for maximum
and cumulative maximum demand according to the OBIS standard. The
central station uses the identification code to automatically identify these
registers as objects.
When defining a maximum demand register it is allocated automatically.
out. By default, the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name
according to the OBIS standard. However, the users can set their own ID
string for each register/object if this is really necessary.

11.8.3 Register Definition for Maximum Values of Coincidental Demand

There are two (MCD1 and MCD2) coincidental maximum demand registers
in each of which you can capture two maximum demand values at the
same time.
To define a maximum coincidental demand register, click on the

corresponding MCD number and set the following parameters:
Capture Select the first measured quantity whose values are to be captured in this
maximum coincidental demand register.
Coincidental to Select the second measured quantity whose values are to be captured at
the same time as those of the first quantity.
Rate Number Enter the rate number that is used to indicate the currently active tariff. The

 Do not use “0” as rate number. “0” is used for the registers for average
values of demand.

dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of these registers for maximum
and cumulative maximum demand according to the OBIS standard. The
central station uses the identification code to automatically identify these
registers as objects.
When defining a maximum coincidental demand register it is allocated

automatically.
ID String The ID string appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC
readout. By default, the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name
string for each register/object if this is really necessary.

176/390 Power Factor Registration
12 Power Factor Registration

12.1 Overview
With the combimeters ZMG310CR and ZxG400CR, it is possible to register
power factors (PF). The power factor is calculated based on the values of
active and apparent energy.
Average power factor

Average demand Average demand Loadprofile
Load profile
Measured quantities
during last IP
(current IP) of (last IP) of
+A, +S or-A, -S
+A and +S or +A and +S or
Measuring -A and -S -A and -S Minimum power factor
system during billing period
Stored value
profile
Average power factor
during billing period
Display
Instantaneous power factor
(L1, L2, L3, total)
Readout
Average PF during the The average value of power factor during the integration period is
Integration Period calculated based on the average values of demand of active and apparent
energy during the last integration period (positive sum of all three phases).
From these values, the minimum power factor can also be determined.
The average value can be stored in a load profile to permit the utility to
assign the relevant power factor to the individual average values of demand
and maximum demand.
Minimum PF during The meter detects the minimum power factor that has occurred during the
the Billing Period last billing period. This minimum value may be stored in a minimum power
factor register.
Average PF during the Based on the total of active and apparent energy (positive sum of all three
Billing Period phases) the meter is also able to calculate the average value of power
factor during the billing period. The meter calculates the value every
second and stores it to the stored value profile at the end of the billing
period.
Instantaneous PF The meter provides instantaneous power factor values for the three
individual phases (L1, L2, L3) as well as the total power factor. The values
are refreshed every second.
Readout/Display Readout of all power factor data can be made according to IEC 62056-21
or the dlms concept. The data may also be displayed.

Power Factor Registration 177/390
Power Factor Monitor If the meter is parameterised to measure power factors, a power factor
monitor is also available. For more details please refer to section 19.6.4
“Power Factor Monitor”.
Configuration needed for all power factor features

 For access to all power factor features, demand monitoring has to be
enabled in the configuration.
12.2 Power Factor during the Integration Period

12.2.1 Average Power Factor
Combimeters with a tariff unit xR3 or xR4, i.e. with demand registration,
can form the average power factor during the integration period.
The two measured values
 All-phase active energy import +A and

 All-phase apparent energy import +S
or
 All-phase active energy export -A and

 All-phase apparent energy export -S
can be used to determine the power factor. From these measured values,
the meter uses the average values of demand during the last integration
period to calculate the average power factor during the integration period
PF IP.
If the measured quantities +A and +S are used for the power factor
calculation, it is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.
If the measured quantities -A and -S are used for the power factor
calculation, it is limited to quadrants Q II and Q III.
If the power factor measurement has been activated in the software
 configuration, the measured quantities +A and +S or –A and –S will
automatically be allocated:
– To the measured quantities ME7 and ME8.
– To the energy registers ER23 and ER24.

The illustration below shows the formation of the power factor based on the
measured quantities +A and +S.
Tariff switching Minimum

power factor
Measured quantities +A, +S
Average demand Average demand register 1

active energy +A active energy +A
P (+A,last IP) Minimum
PF IP = power factor
Average demand Average demand P (+S,last IP) register 2
app. energy +S app. energy +S
Load profile
The power factor average value for the last integration period (PF IP) can
be taken over by the minimum power factor registers. At the end of the
capture period, the average value can be stored in a load profile.
12.3 Power Factor During the Billing Period

12.3.1 Minimum Power Factor
The calculation of the minimum power factor PF min, is made in one or two
power factor registers similar to maximum formation in the demand
registers.
Each minimum power factor register comprises a memory for the current
minimum power factor PF min. In addition, there are several memories for
stored values.
At the end of every integration period a comparison is made of the current

minimum power factor PF min (lowest value of power factor so far) and the
average value of power factor PF IP determined during the last integration
period.
 If the PF IP is equal to or lower than the current PF min, the PF IP is

stored as new minimum value together with date and time.
 If the PF IP is higher than the current PF min, the PF min register
remains unchanged.

Billing Period Reset At the end of the billing period, the meter stores the current content of the
PF min register as latest stored value together with date and time. The
present PF min register is then set to the value 1.
PF min Cumulative At the end of the billing period, the PF min is added to the previous sum of
all PF min values and stored as PF min cumulative in the corresponding
register.
Minimum Apparent A minimum threshold for the apparent energy prevents the meter from
Energy Threshold calculating the power factor if the apparent energy is below the set
threshold. If the apparent energy is too low, the power factor value is set to
1.
Minimum threshold
 The threshold above which the power factor is measured is application
specific and can therefore be parameterised.
Tariff Switching The tariff switching determines in which of the two registers the minimum
power factor value is stored.
12.3.2 Average Power Factor

All combimeters are able to form the average value during the billing
period.
The two measured values
 All-phase active energy import +A and

 All-phase apparent energy import +S
or
 All-phase active energy export -A and

 All-phase apparent energy export -S
can be used to determine the power factor. From these measured values,
the meter calculates the average power factor during the billing period PF
BP.
If the measured quantities +A and +S are used for the power factor
calculation, it is limited to quadrants Q I and Q IV.
If the measured quantities -A and -S are used for the power factor
calculation, it is limited to quadrants Q II and Q III.
 The measured quantities +A/+S or –A/-S are automatically allocated to
ME7 and ME8 if power factor measurement is selected in the
configuration.

The illustration below shows the formation of the power factor based on the
measured quantities +A and +S.
Billing period reset

Measured
quantity +A +A
PF BP =
+S
Stored values
Measured Average value over billing period
quantity +S (re-calculated every second)
Since the measured values are updated every second, a new calculation of
the power factor is also performed every second during the billing period.
Billing Period Reset At the end of the billing period, the meter stores the current content of the
PF BP register as latest stored value together with date and time. The
present PF BP is then set to the value 1.
12.4 Instantaneous Power Factor

The meter provides instantaneous power factor values for the three
individual phases (L1, L2, L3) as well as the total power factor. The values
are refreshed every second.
The instantaneous power factor values are available on display and via
communication.
If the power factor is not measured (e.g. due to the apparent power too low)
the meter shows -.-- as power factor in the display and in the IEC readout.
In the dlms protocol, the power factor will be set to the invalid value “2”.
12.5 Display and Readout
Values Available The following power factor values are available for display and readout
depending on the parameterisation:
 The average value of the last integration period (PF IP)

 The minimum value of the current billing period (PF min)
 The minimum value (PF min) of the preceding billing periods as
stored values with time and date
 Current status of cumulated minimum (PF min cumulative)
 The average power factor (PF BP) during the present billing period
 The number of exceeding the threshold per power factor threshold
(PF monitor counter) instantaneous values (all phases, L1, L2, L3)
 Instantaneous values (all phases, L1, L2, L3)

Display Examples Some examples of power factor register displays are given below. The
Power factor phase L1 (33)

Instantaneous value (7)
Power factor mean value (13)

Mean value during last
integration period (5)
Power factor mean value (13)
minimum value of the current
billing period (3)
12.6 Power Factor Register Parameters

12.6.1 Power Factor Energy Direction
This parameter is set in “Measured Quantities” (see section 3.4
“Parameterisation of Measured Quantities”).
12.6.2 Threshold for Power Factor Calculation
Click and enter the minimum apparent energy below which the mini-
mum power factor calculation and monitoring is inhibited.
The minimum power factors are only calculated and monitored if the
apparent power is above the set minimum value. This is to avoid imprecise
power factor values due to very low apparent energy.

12.6.3 Rate Register Definition for Minimum Values of Power Factor
To define a minimum power factor register, click the corresponding MPF

Control Signal Select whether the minimum power factor register is always active or which
signal is used to activate it (tariff control).
Rate Number
rate number is added as suffix to the dlms logical name. Usually “1” is used
to indicate tariff 1, “2” to indicate tariff 2, etc.
 Do not use “0” as rate number

“0” is used for the registers for average values of power factor.
dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of the minimum power factor
register according to the OBIS standard. The central station uses the
identification code to automatically identify each measured value.
When defining a minimum power factor register it is allocated automatically.

Display Code The display code appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC
readout. By default the display code is identical to the dlms logical name
according to the OBIS standard. However, the users can set their own
display code for each register.
12.6.4 Power Factor Monitor Threshold

This parameter is defined in “Diagnostic Events”, for details see section
19.9.3 “Demand Monitoring”.

184/390 Operating Time and Status Registers
13 Operating Time and Status Registers

13.1 Overview
The meter features several registers to show the current status of the meter
and its inputs and outputs. The following status information is available:
 Terminal status information

 Internal control signal status information
 Internal operating status information
 Operating time registers
13.2 Terminal Status Information C.3.x

These registers show the present status of the control inputs (C.3.3) and
the output contacts (C.3.4) at the meter terminals. They can be added to
the display lists and communication protocols.
For details about the designation and the allocation of the terminals, please
refer to section 5 “Terminals”.
The status bits appear as follows in the display:
Version .44xx with 4

Control Inputs and
Output Contacts Each
Possible Statuses Figure means

Control input with voltage or output contact closed
Underline means
Control input without voltage or output contact open
Hyphen means
Input or output not used
In the above example, therefore:

Control inputs T1-2 (1) and T1-6 (4) with voltage.
Control inputs T1-3 and T1-5 without voltage.
Output contacts T1-8 and T1-9 open.
Output contacts T1-11 (3) and T1-12 (4) closed.

Operating Time and Status Registers 185/390
Version .26xx with 2

Control Inputs and 6
Output Contacts
In the above example, therefore:

Control input T1-2 (1) with voltage.
Control input T1-3 without voltage.
Output contacts T1-6, (2) T-11 (5) and T1-12 (6) closed.
Output contacts T1-5, T-8 and T1-9 open.
Readout to IEC In the IEC readout, the terminal status information appears as in the
display:
Example .44xx C.3.3 (1__4----)

C.3.4 (----__34)
Example .26xx C.3.3 (1_------)
C.3.4 (--_2__56)
Readout with dlms In the dlms protocol, the status information is included as two integer
numbers between 0 and 255 which represent the binary status of eight
inputs and outputs. One number indicates which terminals are used while
the other number states which terminals are currently active.
Example .44xx is shown in the dlms readout as follows:
Signal status (display/IEC protocol): 1 _ _ 4 - - - -

Used signals (dlms): 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 F0
Active signals (dlms): 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 90
Signal status (display/IEC protocol): - - - - _ _ 3 4

Used signals (dlms): 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0F
Active signals (dlms): 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0C

13.3 Internal Control Signal Status Register C.4.0

The internal control signal register shows the current status of all internal
control signals of the meter. The information may be added to the readout
list as hexadecimal code (C.4.0 State of Internal Control Signals).
13.3.1 Overview
Status register for internal control signals:
Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1
Status
register 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 76 5 4 3 2 1 0 76 5 4 3 2 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 10
Valency 84 2 1 8 4 2 1 84 2 1 8 42 1 84 2 1 8 42 1 84 2 1 8 4 2 1
00 00 00 00
Position of Energy direction Control signals Control signals

Structure security switch active/reactive CS9 to CS16 CS1 to CS8
Status register CS1 and CS6 set

C.4.0 of active/reactive positive
ZMG310/400 security switch closed
Status register C.4.0 describes
 The status of the control signals CS1 to CS16 of the control table
 The direction of the active and reactive energy and
 The status of the security switch
The individual figures form the sum from the valences of 4 bits each of the
status registers and are shown in hexadecimal code.
The individual groups are made up as follows:
Status of the The first digit should always be “0”. The value 4 means that the security
Security Switch switch is in the activated status, which is usually not permitted.
The second digit has no significance.
Direction of Active For the active energy consumption meters ZMG310AR/ZxG400AR, the
and Reactive Energy third digit means
 4 Active energy import

 0 Active energy export or no energy (below starting threshold)
For combimeters ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR, the third digit means
 6 Active energy import, positive reactive energy, quadrant 1

 4 Active energy import, negative reactive energy, quadrant 4
 0 Active energy export or no energy (below starting threshold)

Position of the Byte 4 and 3

of status message
Security Switch, of ZMG310/400
Energy Direction
Active and Reactive Sum of valencies
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Valency in hexadecimal code

not used
not used
Reactive energy positive/negative or no
Active energy positive/negative or no
not used
not used
Security switch activated/deactivated
not used
The 4th digit has no significance.
Control Signals Byte 2 of status message

CS9 to CS16 of ZMG310/400
Sum of valencies

Control signal CS16 on/off
CS15
CS14
CS13
CS12
CS11
CS10
CS9
The 5th digit shows the status of control signals CS9 to CS12 if defined in
the control table. It can have values between 0 (no signal set) and F (all
signals set).
The 6th digit similarly shows the status of control signals CS13 to CS16 in
the control table.
Control Signals Byte 1 of status message

CS1 to CS8 of ZMG310/400
Sum of valencies

Control signal CS8 on/off
CS7
CS6
CS5
CS4
CS3
CS2
CS1

The 7th digit shows the status of control signals CS1 to CS4 if defined in
the control table. It can have values between 0 (no signal set) and F (all
signals set).
The 8th digit similarly shows the status of control signals CS5 to CS8 in the
control table.
13.3.2 Significance of Individual Bits
Byte 1 These bits indicate the status of the output control signals CS1 to CS8 of
the control table.
Bit # Description State definition

Bit 0 Control signal CS8 0 = inactive
1 = active
Bit 1 Control signal CS7 Do.
Byte 2 These bits indicate the status of the output control signals CS9 to CS16 of
the control table.

Bit 0 Control signal CS16: 0 = inactive
1 = active

Byte 3 These bits indicate the direction of the active energy and in combimeters
also of the reactive energy.

Bit 0-5 Not used
Bit 6 Direction signal reactive +: The bit 0 = –Q or creep
indicates that reactive energy is 1 = +Q
currently being exported (same as the
display symbol +Q).
Bit 7 Direction signal active +: The bit 0 = –P or creep
indicates that active energy is currently 1 = +P
being exported (same as the display
symbol +P).
Byte 4 This bit indicates the status of the security switch.

Bit 0-5 Not used
Bit 6 Security switch: This bit indicates the 0 = deactivated
status of the security switch. 1 = activated
Bit 7 Not used

13.4 Internal Operating Status Register C.5.0

The internal operating status register shows the current internal operating
status of the meter. The information may be added to the readout list as
hexadecimal code (C.5.0 Internal Operating Status).
13.4.1 Overview
Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1
Status
7 6 5 4 3 2 10 76 5 4 3 2 1 0 76 5 4 3 2 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 10
register
Valency 84 2 1 8 4 2 1 84 2 1 8 42 1 84 2 1 8 42 1 84 2 1 8 4 2 1
00 00 00 00
Reset lock Rate control Energy measur. Voltages

Structure
active/not active parameterisation active/not active phase sequence
Status register Voltages present

C.5.0 of energy measurement active
time switch active
ZMG310/400 parameterisation possible
Status register C.5.0 indicates:
 The presence of the phase voltages and the phase sequence

 The status of the energy measurement (load/no load)
 The status of the rate control and parameterisation possibility
 The status of the reset lock
The individual figures form the sum from the valences of 4 bits each of the
status registers and are shown in hexadecimal code.
The individual groups are made up as follows:
Reset Lock Byte 4 of status message

C.5.0 of ZMG310/400
Sum of valencies

not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
Reset lock active via serial interface
Reset lock active via optical interface
Reset lock active manual reset

The first digit should usually be “0”. It can have one of the values 2, 4 or 8
depending on the type of reset, which has actuated the reset lock. This
figure only remains displayed while the reset lock is active.
The second digit has no significance.
Alert, Rate Control, Byte 3 of status message

Parameterisation C.5.0 of ZMG310/400
Sum of valencies

Alert occurred
not used
not used
not used
not used
Time switch enable/disable
Parameterisation in set mode possible
Parameterisation under S2 possible
The 3rd digit usually has one of the following values depending on the type
of rate control:
 0 externally controlled or via control signals of monitoring functions

 2 internally via time switch, possibly mixed with other signals
If the meter is in set mode, a value 4 or 6 is displayed. If the security switch
S2 is in the activated status, a value 8 or A appears.
The 4th digit is usually “0”, but changes to “1” if the meter has generated an
alert.
Active, Reactive and Byte 2 and 1 of status message

Apparent Energy C.5.0 of ZMG310/400
Measurement Active
Sum of valencies

Phase sequence correct
Phase voltage L1 present/missing
not used
Apparent energy active/not active
Reactive energy active/not active
Active energy active/not active

In active energy meters ZMG310AR/ZxG400AR, the 5th digit means
 8 Active energy is measured, i.e. value is above the starting

threshold.
 0 No measurement of active energy (value is below starting
threshold).
In combimeters ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR, the 5th digit means
 E The meter measures active, reactive and apparent energy (both

test diodes flash).
 A The meter only measures active and apparent energy, but not
reactive energy (centre test diode flashes, left-hand diode
continuously lit).
 6 The meter only measures reactive and apparent energy, but not
active energy (left-hand test diode flashes, centre diode
continuously lit).
 0 Active, reactive and apparent energy are below the starting
threshold (both test diodes continuously lit).
A and 6 are scarcely visible, at best near the starting threshold.
Phase Voltages, The 7th digit indicates whether all voltages are present and the phase
Phase Sequence sequence is correct. It can have the following values:
 F All voltages present, phase sequence correct

 7 Phase voltage L1 absent
 B Phase voltage L2 absent
 D Phase voltage L1 absent
 3 Phase voltages L1 and L2 absent
 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, E Phase sequence incorrect

13.4.2 Significance of Individual Bits
Byte 1 These bits indicate the status of the phase voltages and phase sequence.

Bit 0-3 Not used
Bit 4 Phase sequence correct: The bit 0 = incorrect
indicates that the phase sequence is 1 = correct
correct (same as display symbols L1 L2
L3 unless blinking).
Bit 5 Voltage L3: The bit indicates the 0 = not present
presence of voltage L3 (same as display 1 = present
symbol L3).
symbol L2).
symbol L1).
Byte 2 These bits indicate the status of the energy measurement (load or no load).

Bit 0-4 Not used
Bit 5 Start-up apparent: The bit indicates that 0 = measurement
the active or reactive measurement is inactive
active, i.e. above creep. 1 = measurement
active
Bit 6 Start-up reactive: The bit indicates that 0 = measurement
the reactive measurement is active, i.e. inactive
above creep. 1 = measurement
active
Bit 7 Start-up active: The bit indicates that the 0 = measurement
active measurement is active, i.e. above inactive
creep. 1 = measurement
active

Byte 3 These bits indicate various statuses, such as alert, rate control, etc.

Bit 0 Alert occurred: The bit indicates that an 0 = no alert
alert has occurred (same as event 1 = alert
number 106).
Bit 1-3 Not used
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 TOU control enabled: The bit indicates 0 = control off
that TOU signals may be used for rate 1 = on
switching.
Bit 6 Set state: Meter parameters may be set 0 = inactive
(set menu). 1 = active
Bit 7 Parameterisation state: Parameters can 0 = inactive
be downloaded (Fail 0). 1 = active
Byte 4 These bits indicate the status of the reset lock.

Bit 0-4 Not used
Bit 5 * Reset lock, electrical interface: The bit 0 = lock inactive
indicates that the reset is locked after a 1 = active
cumulation has been activated by means
of a communication command via the
electrical interface.
Bit 6 * Reset lock, optical interface: The bit 0 = lock inactive
indicates that the reset is locked after a 1 = active
cumulation has been activated by means
of a communication command via optical
interface.
Bit 7 Reset lock, manual: The bit indicates 0 = lock inactive
that the reset is locked after a cumulation 1 = active
has been activated by pressing the reset
key (manual cumulation).
* These two bits are set together whenever either channel (electrical or
optical interface) is used, because the meter does not recognise the
specific channel.

13.5 Operating Time Register

The following operating times can be recorded in the operating time
register:
 Total operating time of meter

 Operating time per activated control signal CSx or TOUx
They serve mainly for testing correct operation of the rate control. They are
of primary significance with external control for the utility to check whether
the rate control is operating correctly or is disturbed (e.g. as fraud detection).
Total Operating Time This register shows the total operating time of the meter in the network.
The time is measured and updated continuously in the register C.8.0 as
soon as the meter is connected to the network.
The register is available for display and readout and can be cleared if
necessary with the other operating time registers.
Operating Time per A maximum of 8 operating time registers with rate settings are available.
Control Signal Control is performed in the same way as for the energy or maximum
demand registers. Therefore, the total operating time can be assigned to
the individual rates. The sum of the registers with rate should always be the
same as the total operating time. If this is not the case, this might be an
indication for a meter malfunction or an attempted fraud.
The register is available for display and readout and can be cleared if
necessary with the other operating time registers.
Display and Readout The operating time is always displayed in minutes.
Some examples of operating time register displays are given below. The
C: Service data
8: Operating time
0: Total operating time
C: Service data
8: Operating time
1: Operating time rate 1

13.6 Parameterisation of Operating Time Registers

Use the operating time registers mainly for external tariff control. External
signals are susceptible to interferences (e.g. interruptions) or manipulation.
In contrast, timer signals are basically undisturbed.
To define an operating time register, click on the corresponding OTR

Control Signal Select the control signal which activates this operating time register. Do not
use the function “always active” as it is already present in the register total
operating time OTR0.
Rate Number
rate number is added as suffix to the dlms logical name. Usually “1” is used
to indicate tariff 1, “2” to indicate tariff 2, etc.
dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of the operating time register
code to automatically identify this register.
When defining an operating time register it is allocated automatically.

out. By default the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name
string for each register/object, if necessary.

198/390 Instantaneous Values
14 Instantaneous Values
Instantaneous Values
Configuration
Possibilities
Please see the next four sections to find out which firmware version
supports the parameters.
14.1 Averaged Instantaneous Values
Selects the capture period used for the averaging of instantaneous values.
This parameter is only available from firmware version P06 onwards and
when load profile 1 & 2 are activated in the software configuration. See
section 1.2 “Configuration of Measuring Unit”.

Instantaneous Values 199/390
14.2 Reference for Phase Current Angle
Select the reference for the measurement of the phase angles between
current and voltage.
The reference may be either phase voltage V1 or the voltage of the

corresponding phase.
With the reference of the currents to V1, the values of the angles are
always positive and between 0 and 360.
With the reference of the current to their own phase voltage, the values are
always between 180 and -180.
This parameter is only available from firmware version P05 onwards. In

versions P03 and P04, this parameter is fixed to “all currents referenced to
V1.”
14.3 Calculation of Phase Current Angle
Select the method of representation for voltage and current angles.
The calculation may be either according to the ANSI or the IEC standard.
In the method according to the ANSI standard, all angles are calculated
clockwise.
In the method according to the IEC standard, all angles are calculated
counter clockwise.

200/390 Instantaneous Values
This parameter is only available from firmware version P05 onwards. In

versions P03 and P04, this parameter is fixed to “according to ANSI
standard,” meaning that all angles are calculated clockwise.
14.4 Format of Instantaneous Power
This parameter allows the format of instantaneous power to be set to

signed or unsigned. Signed instantaneous power will be negative when
exporting energy.
If the meter is parameterised to calculate instantaneous power as signed

values, the following values of power are available:
 Active P: + in QI and QIV; - in QII and QIII

 Reactive P: + in QI and QII; - in QIII and QIV
This parameter is only available from firmware version P06 onwards.

Arrows in Display 201/390
15 Arrows in Display
15.1 Overview
Example
1
2 T1 T2 P1 P2 RS CLK SET Test
1 arrows on display
2 indication on face plate
12 indicating arrows serve to provide specific information concerning the

status of the meter.
The example above represents a customary layout with
 T1 and T2 Energy rates

 P1 and P2 Demand rates
 RS Reset lock active
 CLK Time and date invalid (arrow flashing)
 SET Set mode activated
 Test Test mode activated
Information on face plate

The details are printed on the face plate and must therefore be determined
 when the meter is produced. In the event of later alteration, the utility
would have to change the face plate, which is only possible after removing
the certification seal and subsequent re-verification.
The signals for activating an indicating arrow can be
 All activated time switch signals TOU-1 to 16, provided the time
switch is configured
 All activated control signals CS1 to CS16, provided the control table
is configured
 Set mode activated
 Test mode activated
 Reset lock activated
 Time and date invalid

202/390 Arrows in Display
 Signals for monitoring functions

– Demand monitoring
– Power factor monitoring
– Under and overvoltage
– Overcurrent
– Current with undervoltage
– Current absent
 Signals from fraud detection
– Access blocked owing to repeated use of an incorrect
password
– Influence of a strong magnetic field
– Front cover opened
– Terminal cover opened
– Current transformer opened or short-circuited
 Signals concerning mains quality
– Rotary field reversed
– Negative energy in one phase
– Failure of one phase
– Total voltage failure
 Alert activated
Static or flashing Each arrow can be parameterised for continuous display or flashing.
arrow
 A continuously displayed arrow indicates a normal status, e.g.

active rate, set mode, test mode, etc.
 A flashing arrow on the other hand indicates an irregularity owing to
a fault or an influence on the meter, e.g. time/date invalid, alert
active, terminal cover opened, etc.

Arrows in Display 203/390
15.2 Parameterisation of Display Arrows

The twelve arrows in the bottom line of the display indicate the current
operating state of the meter.
The arrows can be activated independently by a control signal (e.g. CS or

TOU) or by a status (e.g. alert, overvoltage, test mode active, etc.).
Static Arrow Control

Signal
Flashing Arrow
Control Signal
Select which control signal or which status switches on the arrow statically
or causes the arrow to flash and repeat the procedure for all arrows.

204/390 Resetting
16 Resetting
16.1 Overview
Possibilities Reset can be released:
- every month or every
2, 3, 4 etc. months
- at the end of month or
at an other day of month
All resets or individual

Formatted command - every week at any
via serial interface week day
Internal reset OR release reset

via calendar clock
Reset key
Reset lock
For resetting at the end of a billing period, the meter permits various
possibilities:
 Manually with the reset key

This is situated under the hinged cover and is secured with an utility
seal.
 Internally by the calendar clock
This method permits resetting
– At begin of the month (end of previous month)
– A specific day in the month (also several days possible)
– Any month or every 2nd, 3rd, 4th month, etc.
– Every week on a specific day
– Every day
– At midnight or a selected hour
– To summer/wintertime changeover
 By a formatted command via the serial interface
Reset Lock Every reset, regardless how initiated, starts a time window, during which a
another reset is not possible, the so-called reset lock. The duration can be
selected between 0 minutes (no lock) and 48 hours (2880 min). A voltage
interruption can remove the lock, which can be particularly useful during a
test.
The utility can determine whether any reset is locked or only the actuating
reset. The latter corresponds to VDEW and prevents a manual reset
inhibiting a subsequent external or internal reset for example with long
reset locks.
In this case only that resetting type is locked which is the source of the
reset lock. For example no second manual reset can be made following
one manual reset, but a remote controlled reset is possible.

Resetting 205/390
16.2 Types of Resetting

16.2.1 Manually
A manual reset is performed with the reset key under the hinged cover on
the upper part of the meter protected against unauthorised operation by an
utility seal or other blocking device (lock). The reset can therefore only be
actuated after opening the hinged cover.
In addition to actuation of a reset, the reset key has further service

functions (e.g. access to the service menu starting from the display check).
16.2.2 Internally by Calendar Clock

The internal reset is used by the calendar clock as signal transmitter with
the following possibilities:
Every month At the end of the month or on the first day of the new month.
This type of reset is usually made at midnight on the last day of the month
to the first day of the next month. As instant of reset the meter records the
first day of the following month with the time 00:00 (24:00 does not exist!).
Day 1 must therefore always be parameterised.
On one or more days (up to 6) within the month
Resetting can take place for example on the 1st, 11th and 21st.
Weekly The day (Monday to Sunday) and time can be set, and resetting also takes
place here at midnight (00:00) or at another hour of the specified day.
Annually E.g. every 2, 3, 4 months of a year.
Up to 12 individual dates can be freely selected, whereby they usually

result in fixed periods as described above.
At summer/wintertime changeover
Every day This form of reset is usual above all for high voltage measurement.
Resetting time Reset is usually made at midnight. The utility can, however, also actuate it
at any hour of the day, e.g. at 06:00 as is usual for water meters.
Resetting with voltage If an internal reset occurs during an interruption in voltage, the meter
interruption cannot process it, since it is switched off. The utility can then determine
whether the meter performs the reset or not when the voltage is restored.

206/390 Resetting
16.2.3 With a Formatted Command

This form of resetting is made via the serial interface with a unit suitable for
this purpose, e.g. laptop or hand-held terminal.
In particular with a readout unit (hand-held terminal) the reader can actuate
the reset locally and then read out the data. No seals have to be opened
and resealed later to operate the reset key.
16.3 Reset Procedure

Every reset
 Always concerns the entire meter, i.e. all energy and maximum
demand registers and any power factor registers.
 Increases the reset counter by 1 and stores the time of reset with
date and time-of-day.
 Performs a power comparison in the maximum demand register,
even if the present integration period is not yet concluded.
With time-synchronised integration period, however, resetting can
also only take place at the end of the integration period in progress,
in order to prevent two interrupted demand mean values.
 Cumulates Pmax in the relevant memory, stores Pmax itself as stored
value (with date and time) and clears the memory of the present
Pmax.
 In the combimeter performs an analogue comparison in the power
factor register.
 In the combimeter stores the minimum value of cosφ as preliminary
value (with date and time), cumulates the minimum value in the
corresponding register and clears the memory of the present
minimum value.
 Forms the stored values in the energy rate and energy total
registers and clears the energy registers with consumption.
 Clears register Prunning and the interval registers with sliding
maximum.
 Starts a new integration period, if this is asynchronous.
 Starts a new billing period.
 Initiates a reset lock between 0 and 2880 minutes (2 days).
Reset lock All types of reset always initiate a time-limited reset lock, during which a
further reset is not possible. With 0 minutes the meter immediately lifts this
lock, i.e. no lock takes place.
The utility can then select whether the reset lock
 Applies to all kinds of reset or

 Only affects the actuating reset (manually, via the interface, remote-
controlled via KA/KB or internally controlled). Any other kind of
resetting cancels the reset lock set and sets a new one.
A voltage interruption cancels all reset locks, which can be useful in
particular for testing purposes.

Resetting 207/390
3 groups of reset There are three groups of reset sources. The reset lock only applies for the
sources group that initiated the billing period reset. The three groups are:
 Manual reset by pressing the reset key

 Reset with formatted command via interface (electrical or optical)
 Resetting externally controlled via the terminals (KA and KB) or
internally controlled by the calendar clock.
Behaviour of Reset signal

individual reset lock 1st group
Reset lock parameterised Reset lock

1st group reset lock 1st group raised
Reset signal
2nd group
Reset lock Reset lock

2nd group 2nd group started
2nd reset
Reset released 1st group ignored
The individual reset lock only applies for the group that initiated the reset.
Reset commands from other groups are not locked.
If a second group actuates a reset during locking of a first group, this

cancels the first group lock and initiates a reset lock for the second group.
Renewed resetting of the first group is possible again.
16.4 Reset Displays

The following reset values are displayed:
 Status of number of resets (reset counter)

 Number of stored values displayed
 Time of reset(s) with time-of-day and date
These values can also be read out.
Display examples Some examples of reset displays are given below. The identification codes
for the individual data correspond with the energy data identification system
OBIS.
Reset counter
0: General data
1.0: reset group
Reset date
End of June (stored value 26)
means 1 July, 00:00

208/390 Resetting
Time-of-day of reset
16.5 Parameterisation of Billing Period Reset
Locking Duration Select the duration of the reset lockout. Enter a duration between 0 minutes
(no reset lockout) and 2880 minutes. This setting applies for all reset signal
sources.
Reset Locking Type Select whether reset locking applies to individual communication channels
(as VDEW) or to all communication channels (as ZMB).
Reset Trigger Select whether or not the reset trigger button R may be used for a manual
Button R billing period reset.
Billing Period Reset Select the time when the billing period reset must take place. This defines
(Internally, By the length of the billing period.
Calendar Clock)
Beginning of every The billing data is stored on the first day of the
month month.
Every month on the Select the day(s) of the month on which the billing
following days data must be stored (1 to 31). A maximum of six
days can be entered.
Weekly on the Select the day of the week on which the billing data
following days must be stored.
Yearly on the Select the date(s) within a calendar year on which
following dates the billing data must be stored. A maximum of six
dates can be selected.
At daylight saving The billing data is stored at begin and at the end of
time begin and end daylight saving time. To define begin and end of
daylight saving time see section 6.5.2 “Daylight
Saving Time”.
Every day The billing data is stored daily.
Billing period reset Select “at midnight” or enter the time of the day at
time which the billing data is stored.
The time of the day at which the billing period reset
takes place must be selected for all reset intervals
(except for daylight saving).

Resetting 209/390
Various sources of reset
 All sources of reset are possible simultaneously, e.g. when the billing
period has been actuated by the internal clock it is possible to press the R
button shortly after to initiate a second reset. The result of all reset sources
is the same.
Reset After Voltage As of firmware version P03, it can be parameterised whether a reset should
Interruption be performed after a voltage interruption. In firmware version P01 and P02,
the internally controlled reset was always performed subsequently if it was
supposed to have been performed during the voltage interruption.
If the reset is not supposed to be performed, select “no” in the “Reset

Recovery after Power Fail” section.
16.5.1 Specific billing period reset for functional range “South Korea”
Since firmware version P06, it has been possible to define a reset, for
example, at the beginning of every month at midnight and yearly on up to
six individually selected dates. This additional functionality is only available
for functional range “South Korea”.

210/390 Stored Value Profile
17 Stored Value Profile

The stored value profile is one of the various data profiles of the E550
meter, the other ones being:
 Load profiles (see section 18 “Load Profiles”)

 A profile of special events (see section 19 “Monitoring Functions”)
 A profile of standard events (see section 20 “Event Log”)
17.1 Overview Stored Values
Configuration The stored values are only available when activated in the meter
configuration. They use a partial area of the data memory dependent on
the number of entries and values per entry.
Current Values Current values are the present content of the energy, maximum demand,
power factor and further registers.
Stored Values At the end of the billing period, the reset signal triggers the storage of the
current values to the stored value profile. Resetting resets various present
values to zero, such as maximum registers, energy import registers, etc.
The stored value profile is organised as a circular buffer. Once the buffer is
full, the oldest entry is overwritten by the most recent one.
maximum 15 total registers, Stored value profile

1 for each selected measured quantity
ME1 to ME15
Energy total register 1
Newest entry:
Running status - Reset counter
- Date and time
maximum 8 max. demand registers - Energy totals
- Energy rates
M. demand register 1 - Maximum with
ME1 to ME8 date and time
Running P max
with date and time - PF minimum +
date and time
maximum 24 energy rate registers - PF average
Energy rate register 1 - Operating time
ME1 to ME12 - Ah registers
Running status
or consumption
Measured
Rate control Reset
quantities
Compared with older meters (e.g. ZxB series) the stored values are no
longer directly assigned to the individual energy, energy total and maxi-
mum registers. For the purpose of optimum memory management they are
recorded together in E550 meters in their own stored value profile. The
number of registers using stored values determines the memory width, the
number of stored values per register the memory depth.
About 50 kB are available for the stored value profile.

Stored Value Profile 211/390
17.2 Structure of the Stored Value Profile

Each stored value profile entry consists of the time stamp, the billing period
counter and a selectable number of measured values.
Date/time Reset Register 1 Register 2 Etc.

counter
03-11-01 / 00:00:00 01 1234567.1 1233567.1 …
03-12-01 / 00:00:00 02 1234579.4 1233584.5 …
04-01-01 / 00:00:00 03 1234586.7 1233598.7 …
… … … … …
E550 meters can store a maximum of 53 entries with a maximum of 40

captured objects (registers) each to the stored value profile. The 40
registers may consist of:
 The time stamp (mandatory)

 The billing period counter (mandatory)
 15 total registers (12 total energy and 3 total Ampère-hour)
 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) energy rate registers
 3 Ampere-hour registers
 8 (P05) or 24 (P06) maximum demand registers with date and time
 2 minimum power factor registers
 1 average power factor register
 6 operating time registers
17.3 Memory Requirement

The memory required for the stored values depends on the following
factors:
 Number of registers in which stored values occur (memory width)

maximum 24 (P05) or 48 (P06) energy rate registers, 8 (P05) or 24
(P06) maximum demand registers, 12 total energy registers, 3 total
ampere-hour registers, 3 power factor registers, 6 operating time
registers, 3 ampere-hour registers
 Number of stored values to be stored for each register (memory
depth), max. 53 stored values (corresponding to one year with
weekly resetting)
Both quantities can be freely determined by the utility.
The memory required by the individual registers is:
 Reset time (always stored) 9 bytes

 Reset counter (always stored) 4 bytes
 Energy rate registers (status or advance) 8 bytes per register
 Demand registers (Pmax with time stamp) 12 bytes per register
 Power factor registers (min. with time stamp) 12 bytes per register
 Operating time registers 4 bytes per register
 Ampere-hour registers 8 bytes per register

17.4 Numbering of Stored Values

The LCD of the meter always only shows the reader one value per display.
It is therefore necessary to provide the various subsequent values with
clear identification numbers. Clear identification is also necessary for the
stored values. For this purpose the utility has two possibilities available:
With the Reset

Counter
If the meter increases the reset counter by 1 to 26 for example when re-
setting, all stored values of the relevant reset period receive the number 26.
In order to allocate the relevant stored value to the reset period, it is
necessary to know the status of the reset counter particularly with several
stored values.
With the Reset Month Particularly for the monthly reset the utility can provide the stored values
directly with the number of the relevant month. The stored values for
January are therefore always given the number 01, those for February the
number 02, etc. From this number the reader can immediately allocate the
stored value to the relevant month.
This form of numbering refers to the calendar clock. If a second reset takes
place within one month (e.g. for a change of customer) two stored values
have the same number. They can be distinguished on one hand by the
sequence and on the other hand by the time of resetting.
If the reset takes place at midnight, the time shows the date and time-of-
day of the following day, as shown above illustration. Nevertheless the
stored value still receives the number of the foregoing period, e.g. of the
previous month. This also applies if the reset signal arrives after midnight.
The meter has a time window of 6 hours within which it uses the number of
the previous period (month).

17.5 Sequence of Stored Values

Depending on parameterisation, the sequence of stored values
 Starts with the latest and continues with the next oldest
 Starts with the oldest and continues with the next younger
I.8.I.26 youngest I.8.I.06

I.8.I.25 stored value I.8.I.05
I.8.I.24 in front I.8.I.0 4
I.8.I.24 oldest I.8.I.0 4

I.8.I.25 stored value I.8.I.05
I.8.I.26 in front I.8.I.06
17.6 Deleting Stored Values

Deleting the stored values is only allowed in accordance with national laws
and/or regulations.
Automatic stored value profile deletion

 If the structure of the stored value profile is altered when re-parameterising
(the number and sequence of individual registers), the stored value profile
is automatically deleted when the parameterisation file is loaded.
17.7 Parameterisation of Stored Values

17.7.1 Format of the Stored Value Profile Entries
Index Type The index is added as suffix to the identification of the corresponding
registers. Select the type of information that the index carries:
 Sequential number (1 .. number of stored values)

 Same as reset month
 Same as reset counter
Index Length Select whether the index is always two digits long or whether the length
depends on the number to be displayed (1 or 2 digits).

Sorting in Display Select whether the oldest or the most recent value is first in the display and
and IEC Readout IEC readout. It is recommended that you use the most recent value first.
Time and Date of Select whether the time stamp of the last billing period reset consists of the
Last Reset time, the date or time and date.
Units of Stored Values Select whether or not the units are included in the IEC readout.
in IEC Readout
Demand registers must not have decade reading constants

 When the units are included in the IEC readout, the demand registers must
have units without reading constants.
17.7.2 Registers Captured in the Stored Value Profile
Register Selection Select which registers (objects) are stored in the stored value profile at the
end of a billing period.
1. Click on the register you wish to add to the stored value profile.
2. Click on to add it.
The energy registers can also be copied from a load profile or from the
event log.

A maximum of 40 objects (time stamp, billing period counter, energy

registers, maximum demand registers, etc.) can be captured in the stored
value profile per entry (memory width).
All values with a time stamp (e.g. maximum demand, minimum power
factor) require two objects.
In the left window, only the registers that have been defined before are
available (energy, demand, power factor, status registers).
The sequence of the selected registers in the right window is used in the
dlms protocol. Therefore, attention should be paid to the sequence in which
the registers are selected.
The sequence can be changed with the buttons and . The selected
entry is moved up or down, respectively.
To insert an additional register at a certain point, select the entry after

which the additional register should be added, then add the additional
register.
Maximum Number of The MAP tool states the maximum number of entries that can be captured
Capturable Entries in the stored value profile depending on the number of registers that are
stored in the profile with each entry and on the size of the profile.
Entries Captured Landis+Gyr recommends entering a value corresponding to the maximum

number of entries capturable.

216/390 Load Profiles
18 Load Profiles
Load profiles are a subset of the data profiles of the E550 meter, the other
profiles being:
 A stored value profile (see section 17 “Stored Value Profile”)

 A profile of standard events (see section 20 “Event Log”)
The meter stores the values of the various registers in a load profile at
regular intervals. The registers recorded in a load profile can be
parameterised. Registers of this kind are demand mean values, energy
advances, energy total, power factor mean values, voltages, currents, etc.
18.1 Overview
Configuration Load profiles are only available if enabled in the meter configuration. They
use a partial section of the data memory dependent on the memory
required by billing data and other profiles.
The meter (firmware version P06) supports two load profiles: one for billing
and one for monitoring purposes.
18.1.1 Capture Period

The capture period is the regular period of time after which a load profile
entry is made. At the end of the capture period the meter stores the present
values of the various registers in a load profile.
Capture period
Energy total +A, -A, +R, -R etc. Load

profile
Energy advances
Average P last +A, -A, +R, -R etc.
Power factor PF
Phase voltages U1, U2, U3
Phase currents I1, I2, I3
Mains frequency f

Load Profiles 217/390
18.1.2 Controlling the Capture Period

In meters with demand measurement, i.e. tariff unit xR3 or xR4, the capture
period is linked to the synchronised integration period of the demand
measurement. The capture period either corresponds to the length of the
integration period or of the subinterval used for sliding demand.
The capture periods of the two load profiles are independent. For meters
with demand measurement, one of the capture periods of a load profile is
always synchronised with the integrating period of the demand
measurement.
18.2 Structure of a Load Profile

18.2.1 Structure of Entries
Begin of load profile

One time a day or after a voltage
First day Date/time entry failure, time setting, tariff switching
or reset
First day - first entry Max. 16 channels: time/status/up to 14 meas. val.
First day - last entry

Number of days
Last day Date/time entry
Last day - first entry Max. 16 channels: time/status/up to 14 meas. val.
Last day - last entry
End of load profile
With every change of date, the load profile takes the date and time of the
new day. It then continuously adds the individual integration or capture
periods up to the last integration or capture period of the day. This is
followed again by the date and time for the next day.
Exceptional events such as setting of the time, resetting or a voltage failure

are recorded by the load profile with start and end. The utility can therefore
close any gaps or suitably treat integration periods started when processing
the load profile.
For processing of the load profile as interference-free as possible, however,

it is recommended that you avoid time-setting in general and rate changes
and resets within a capture period. The utility can achieve this by
synchronising the time and with internally controlled rate switching together
with resetting time-synchronised with the capture period.
The measured values are captured at regular intervals, i.e. at the end of the
capture period or due to a special event that causes the capture period to

restart. The value with the midnight time stamp (00:00h / new date) is the
last value of the previous day.
Each load profile entry consists of a time stamp of 8 bytes (mandatory), a

status word of 4 bytes (mandatory) and a selectable number of measured
values (4 or 8 bytes each). Therefore, the smallest useful load profile entry
has a size of 16 bytes.
The size of the load profile depends on the size of the event log and the
stored value profile. For the load profiles, a maximum of 5875 memory
pages with 254 bytes each, i.e. a total of 1457 kB are available (see also
section 18.2.5 “Dynamic Memory Management”).
Date/time Status word Measured Measured …

value 1 value 2
02-09-15 / 00:00:00 0080 0000 00785147.9 00254838.2 …
02-09-15 / 00:00:15 0080 0000 00785153.2 00254849.4 …
02-09-15 / 00:00:30 0080 0000 00785164.3 00254856.3 …
… … … … …
18.2.2 Time Stamp

Time and date information is stored with each load profile entry. The time
stamp is stored in local time and has a size of 8 bytes.
18.2.3 Measured Values

Selectable as possible measured values are:
 Prunning for the last integration period of the measured values set
(ME1 to ME8).
 Energy total status of the measured values set (ME1 to ME12 (P05)
or ME15 (P06)).
Condition for Prunning and energy total is that the individual measured
values are defined.
 Energy advance for the measured values set (ME1 to ME12 (P05)
or ME15 (P06)).
The condition for energy advances is that the energy registers
concerned record the advance.
 Voltages as mean value in capture period.
 Currents as mean value in capture period.
 Power factor as mean value over the capture period. The power
factor is only present in the combimeters ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR.
 Mains frequency as mean value over the capture period.
 Total Distortion Level (TDL)
 Losses (P06 ZMG400 only)

18.2.4 Memory Depth

1457 kB of memory space is shared between the two load profiles.
The memory required for a load profile depends on the following factors:
 Number of registers to be stored in the load profile (memory width)

maximum 14 values, Prunning, energy advance, energy total, mean
values of voltages, currents, frequency and power factors
 Length of integration or capture period (1 to 60 minutes)
Number of entries per day or number of days stored in a load profile
(memory depth)
These two quantities can be freely determined by the utility. The number of
days results from the available memory.
Memory required by the individual registers:
 Time of load profile entry (always stored) 8 bytes

 OBIS status register (always stored) 4 bytes
 Demand mean value Prunning 4 bytes
 Energy registers (status or advance) 8 bytes
 Energy total registers 8 bytes
 Power factor register 4 bytes
 Phase voltage 4 bytes
 Phase current 4 bytes
 Mains frequency 4 bytes
 Total Distortion Level (TDL) 4 bytes
 Losses 4 bytes
The memory depth of a load profile in days is calculated as follows:
Memory available
Number of days = ———————————————————————
(Bytes per entry) x (capture periods per day +1)
Example:
Register: Time of entry, OBIS status, 8 demand registers

Integration period: 15 minutes (96 entries per day)
Memory required: 44 bytes per entry (8+4+(8x4))
Number of days: 1,492,250 / (44 x (96+1)) = 349 days

The table below shows the number of days that can be stored by one load
profile with the maximum capacity of 1457 kB, dependent on the number of
bytes per entry and the length of the capture period. If there is a second
load profile, the memory has to be shared between these two. Max. 65,535
entries are allowed.
60’ 30’ 20’ 15’ 10’ 5’ 3’ 2’ 1’

12+4 bytes 512 512 512 512 512 322 193 129 64
12+8 bytes 512 512 512 512 512 258 155 103 51
12+16 bytes 512 512 512 512 367 184 110 73 36
12+32 bytes 512 512 464 349 233 117 70 47 23
12+48 bytes 512 507 340 256 171 86 51 34 17
12+64 bytes 512 400 268 202 135 67 40 27 13
12+88 bytes 512 304 204 153 102 51 31 20 10
12+96 bytes 512 281 189 142 95 47 28 19 9
A maximum of 512 days can be stored, no matter how long the capture
period and how few registers are captured.
Circular buffer
The load profile is organised as a circular buffer, i.e. the oldest entry will
always be overwritten by the most recent one.
18.2.5 Dynamic Memory Management

Dynamic Memory Management is a new feature introduced in firmware
version P06. Dynamic memory management can only be used in load
profiles (1+2). There are a total of 5,875 memory pages available. The
amount of memory is predefined and cannot be changed.
Possible memory allocation (defined in the configuration settings):
Size
LP1 [%] 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
[pages] 5,875 5,287 4,700 4,112 3,525 2,937 2,350 1,762 1,175 587
Size
LP2 [%] 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
[pages] 0 587 1,175 1,762 2,350 2,937 3,525 4,112 4,700 5,287

18.2.6 Status Code

A status code according to OBIS is stored with each load profile entry. It
contains information about the current status of the meter and of the
network the meter is connected to. The status code has a size of 4 bytes
and can be restricted to 2 bytes by parameterisation. In this case only the
bytes 0 and 1 (bits 1 to 15) are available. In the IEC readout only the bytes
0 and 1 are included independently of the parameterisation.
Status Code Byte 3 Byte 3 of the status code is only included in the dlms protocol.
Bit 24-31 Not used
Status Code Byte 2 Byte 2 of the status code is only included in the dlms protocol.
Bit 16 up to 23
Sum of values
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code

* * not used
*
*
Start of interval SOI
End of interval EOI
*
End of interval, regular, external
End of interval, regular, internal
Bit 23 End of interval, regular, internal: This bit indicates that the
capture period was terminated and a load profile entry was made
due to an internally generated regular EOI.
Bit 22 End of interval, regular, external: This bit indicates that the
capture period was terminated and a load profile entry was made
due to an externally generated regular EOI.
Bit 21 Not used
Bit 20 End of interval EOI: This bit indicates that the capture period
was terminated and a load profile entry was made due to an
unsynchronised rate switching.
Bit 19 Start of interval SOI: This bit indicates the start of the capture
period.
Bit 18 Not used
Bit 17 Not used
Bit 16 Not used

Status Code Byte 1 Byte 1 of the status code is included in the dlms protocol and in the IEC
readout. In the IEC readout, however, a status change of bit 8 to 15
(byte 1) will not trigger the entry of a header line.
Bit 8 up to 15
Sum of values
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimal code

* * not used
*
*
*
*
Event log cleared
Load profile cleared
Status before last adjustment of clock
Bit 15 Status before last adjustment of clock: This bit marks the load
profile entry containing the time immediately before the clock is
adjusted. It should be followed by an entry that has bit 5 set
(Clock adjusted).
Bit 14 Load profile cleared: When set to 1 this bit indicates that the
load profile memory was cleared during the previous capture
period.
Bit 13 Event log cleared: When set to 1 this bit indicates that the event
log memory was cleared during the capture period.
Bit 12 Not used
Bit 11 Not used
Bit 10 Not used
Bit 9 Not used
Bit 8 Not used

Status Code Byte 0 Byte 0 of the status code is included in the dlms and in the IEC protocol.
Bit 0 up to 7
Sum of values
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 Value in hexadecimale code

Fatal error occurred
Time/date invalid (power reserve exhausted)
incomplete measurement, too short capt. period
Summer or winter time (8=summer)/0=winter)
Operating notification occured
Time/date setting
Voltage returned (power up)
Voltage (3 phases) failed (power down)
Bit 7 Power down: This bit is set to indicate that an all-phase

voltage failure occurred. It marks the load profile entry
containing the voltage failure time.
The bit can also mark the entry at the end of the capture
period together with the power up bit, if there was a brief
voltage failure during the period.
Bit 6 Power up: This bit is set to indicate that the voltage has re-
turned. It marks the load profile entry containing the voltage
return time.
The bit can also mark the entry at the end of the capture
period together with the power down bit, if there was a brief
voltage failure during the period.
Bit 5 Clock adjusted: The bit is set when the date/time has been
adjusted. The time that is stored in the load profile entry is
the new time after the setting.
Bit 4 Operation notification occurred: When set to 1, this bit
indicates that one or several of the following events has
taken place during the capture period (depending on
parameterisation): Battery voltage too low (event 5), reset
(event 8), no voltage L1, L2, L3 (events 49, 50, 51).
Bit 3 Summer or winter time: Indicates whether or not daylight
saving time is currently active (state) or the change from
and to daylight saving time (depending on
parameterisation).
When the status is indicated, the bit is set during daylight
saving time and cleared in winter.
When the event is indicated the bit is set in the capture
period during which the change occurs.
Bit 2 Invalid measured value: Incomplete measurement
because the capture period length deviates from its nominal
length by more than 1% due to time setting, power failure,
unsynchronised cumulation or rate switching.
Bit 1 Power reserve exhausted: The power reserve of the
calendar clock is exhausted. The time is declared as invalid.
Bit 0 Fatal error: A serious error such as a checksum error of the
ROM or backup memory has occurred.

18.3 Status Code Entries

This section describes which status code is stored in a load profile under
certain special conditions.
18.3.1 Status Code in IEC Readout and dlms Protocols

The dlms protocol and the IEC readout handle the load profile status
entries differently:
 In the IEC protocol the status word usually comprises bytes 0 and 1
with bits 0 to 15. In the dlms protocol all 4 bytes with bits 0 to 31 are
included.
 The bits 8 to 15 of the status code are included in the dlms protocol
and in the IEC readout. In the IEC readout, however, a status
change of bit 8 to 15 will not trigger the entry of a header line.
 In the dlms protocol, the time stamp and the status code are part of
each load profile entry. In the IEC readout, a header line with the
time stamp and the status code only appears if a bit of byte 0 (bit 0
to 7) has changed its state. Therefore, a regular load profile entry
read out according to IEC contains neither a time stamp nor a status
code.
18.3.2 Summer/Winter Time Change
Winter to Summer The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a season change
(Event) from winter to summer. The season change is indicated as event.
dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Bit 3 Status code

EOI SOI Summer (hex)
regular Winter dlms
internal (event)
09-03-29 / 01:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-03-29 / 02:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-03-29 / 03:00 0 1 1 0008 0008
09-03-29 / 03:15 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-03-29 / 03:30 1 0 0 0080 0000

IEC Readout (R5, R6)
Date/time Bit 3 Status Comment

Summer (hex)
Winter IEC
(event)
09-03-29 / 01:45 0 Regular entry
09-03-29 / 02:00 0 Regular entry 02:00 (winter)
09-03-29 / 03:15 1 0008 First entry after season change
09-03-29 / 03:30 0 Regular entry
Winter to Summer The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a season change
(State) from winter to summer. The season is indicated as status.
dlms Protocol

regular Winter dlms
internal (status)
09-03-29 / 01:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-03-29 / 02:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-03-29 / 03:00 0 1 1 0008 0008
09-03-29 / 03:15 1 0 1 0080 0008
09-03-29 / 03:30 1 0 1 0080 0008

Summer (hex)
Winter IEC
(event)
09-03-29 / 01:45 0 Regular entry
09-03-29 / 02:00 0 Regular entry 02:00 (winter)
09-03-29 / 03:30 1 Regular entry
Summer to Winter The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a season change
(Event) from summer to winter. The season change is indicated as event.

dlms Protocol

regular Winter dlms
internal (event)
09-10-25 / 02:30 1 0 0 0080 0008
09-10-25 / 02:45 1 0 0 0080 0008
09-10-25 / 03:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-10-25 / 02:00 0 1 1 0008 0008
09-10-25 / 02:15 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-10-25 / 02:30 1 0 0 0080 0000

Summer (hex)
Winter IEC
(event)
09-10-25 / 02:30 0 Regular entry
09-10-25 / 02:45 0 Regular entry
09-10-25 / 03:00 0 Regular entry 03:00 (summer)
09-10-25 / 02:30 0 Regular entry
Summer to Winter The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a season change
(State) from summer to winter. The season is indicated as status.
dlms Protocol

regular Winter dlms
internal (status)
09-10-25 / 02:45 1 0 1 0080 0008
09-10-25 / 03:00 1 0 1 0080 0008
09-10-25 / 02:00 0 1 0 0008 0000
09-10-25 / 02:15 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-10-25 / 02:30 1 0 0 0080 0000


Summer (hex)
Winter IEC
(status)
09-10-25 / 02:30 1 Regular entry
09-10-25 / 02:45 1 Regular entry
09-10-25 / 03:00 1 Regular entry 03:00 (summer)
09-10-25 / 02:30 0 Regular entry
18.3.3 Power Down
Voltage Failure within If the voltage is restored within the capture period (CP), the meter
a Capture Period continues with the measurement and terminates the capture period usually.
Capture period restart

 With the parameter “Restart of Period after voltage failure” the user may
select that the integration period is terminated and restarted after a voltage
failure. Only the measurement restarts, not the capture period.
kW
Voltage failure
P running
Return
Restart IP
20:15 20:30 20:45 21:00 21:15
The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a short power

failure that does not span the EOI (from 20:35 to 20:41). The meter is
parameterised not to make an entry for every power failure.
dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Status code

EOI SOI Voltage Voltage Invalid (hex)
failure return measured dlms
value
09-09-15 / 20:15 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 20:30 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 20:45 1 0 1 1 0 0080 00C0
09-09-15 / 21:00 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 21:15 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000

Date/time Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Status Comment

Voltage Voltage Invalid (hex)
failure return measured IEC
value
09-09-15 / 20:15 0 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 20:30 0 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 20:45 1 1 0 00C0 Voltage failure + voltage
return
09-09-15 / 21:00 0 0 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-15 / 21:15 0 0 0 Regular entry
Voltage Failure If the voltage interruption continues beyond the capture period, the
Beyond a Capture currently running capture period is terminated usually. The next capture
Period period starts after the voltage has returned but it is terminated with the next
(synchronous) capture period reset. Therefore, it is shorter than a normal
period.
kW
Failure of voltage Return
P running
N x t IP
Restart measurement
20:15 20:30 20:45 22:30 22:37 22:45
The example shows a 15-minute load profile containing a power failure that
spans the EOI (from 20:35 to 22:37).
dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Status code

EOI SOI Voltage Voltage Invalid (hex)
failure return measured dlms
value
09-09-15 / 20:15 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 20:30 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 20:32 0 0 1 0 1 0000 0084
09-09-15 / 22:08 0 1 0 1 0 0008 0040
09-09-15 / 22:15 1 0 0 0 1 0080 0004
09-09-15 / 22:30 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 22:45 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000

IEC readout (R5, R6)
Date/time Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Status Comment

Voltage Voltage Invalid code
failure return measured (hex)
value IEC
09-09-15 / 20:15 0 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 20:30 0 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 20:32 1 0 1 0084 Voltage failure
09-09-15 / 22:15 0 1 1 0044 Voltage return
09-09-15 / 22:30 0 0 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-15 / 22:45 0 0 0 Regular entry
18.3.4 Setting Date/Time
Avoid time-setting
A further time-setting should be avoided when the meter is in operation
after installation and the time is set correctly. Regular synchronisation
 (e.g. every 24 hours) keeps the time accurate to the second.
It is recommended that you erase the load profile(s) after putting the meter
into service and following the first time-setting.
Advancing the Time A forward time shift would cause the capture period (CP) to become too
short. Therefore, it is necessary to restart the integration or capture period
and to trigger a load profile entry after a time shift.
There is no new start of the capture period with regular synchronisation

within the permitted time window of 2 to 9 seconds.
Time shift
kW forward
P running
New start IP
New start IP
11:45 12:00 12:10 12:45

12:24 12:30
The example shows a 15-minute load profile where the time is adjusted
from 12:10 to 12:24.

dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Bit 15 Bit 5 Bit 2 Status

EOI SOI Status Clock Invalid code
before last adjusted measured (hex)
adjust. of value dlms
clock
09-09-15 / 12:00 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 12:10 0 0 1 0 1 0000 8004
09-09-15 / 12:24 0 1 0 1 0 0008 0020
09-09-15 / 12:30 1 0 0 0 1 0080 0004
09-09-15 / 12:45 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 13:00 1 0 0 0 0 0080 0000
Date/time Bit 5 Bit 2 Status Comment

Clock Invalid (hex)
adjusted measured IEC
value
09-09-15 / 12:00 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 12:10 1 1 0024 Time setting
09-09-15 / 12:30 0 1 0004 1st entry after time setting
09-09-15 / 12:45 0 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-15 / 13:00 0 0 Regular entry
Setting Back the Time A backward time shift would cause the capture period (CP) to become too
long. It is therefore necessary to restart the capture period and to trigger
corresponding load profile entries after a time shift.
There is no new start of the capture period with regular synchronisation

within the permitted time window of 2 to 9 seconds.
Resetting the time has the same effect on the status word as advancing the
time.
Time shift
kW backward
P running
New start IP
New start IP
11:45 12:00 12:10 12:15

11:54 12:00
Resetting the time during the last capture period (e.g. from 12:10 to 11:54)
results in two entries with the same time stamp in the load profile.

Clearing a load profile

Several load profile entries with identical time stamps cannot be handled
 properly.
Therefore, it is highly recommended that you back-up the data and clear
the load profile after setting back the time.
18.3.5 Rate Switching
Internally Controlled Internally controlled rate switching usually takes place at the end of the
integration or capture period. In meters with load profiles, it is
recommended that you use the time switch for rate switching.
Externally Controlled With external control it is possible that the rate switching can take place
within a capture period. In this case the utility can select whether
measurement is to start again or be delayed to the end of the capture period.
In meters with load profiles, it is recommended that you delay the rate
switching to the end of the capture period, so that there are no additional
entries in the load profile. Central stations may not be able to handle too
many load profile entries correctly (e.g. 98 instead of 96 with 15 minutes).

 With the parameter “Restart of Period after”, the user may select that the
integration period is terminated and restarted after a rate switching.
No New Start of The meter allows the present measurement of capture period with rate
Capture Period switching to run to its end and only then concludes it. There is therefore no
additional entry in the load profile. The rate switching for the energy and
maximum registers similarly takes place delayed at the end of the capture
period.
kW Signal for
P running rate switching
Rate switching
delayed to the end
of capture period
12:30 12:45 13:00 13:15 13:30
The example shows a 15-minute load profile where a rate switching occurs
at 12:11. The meter is parameterised so that it delays the rate switching to
the end of the next capture period.

dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 20 Bit 2 Status

EOI EOI rate Invalid code
regular switching measured (hex)
internal value dlms
09-09-15 / 11:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 12:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 12:15 1 1 0 0090 0000
09-09-15 / 12:30 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 12:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 13:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
IEC Readout (R5, R6) In the IEC readout, changing the rate at the end of a capture period does
not trigger a status code change.
New Start of The meter immediately ends the present measurement during the capture
Capture Period period and starts a new one. This results in two shortened measurements
within the same capture period and therefore to two entries in the load
profile. This so-called irregular interruption of the measurement is denoted
in the status word.
kW Rate switching
P running external
Restart of
measurement
12:30 12:45 13:00 13:09 13:15 13:30
The example shows a 15-minute load profile where a rate switching occurs
at 13:09. The meter is parameterised for immediate rate switching.
dlms Protocol

EOI EOI rate Invalid (hex)
regular switching measured dlms
internal value
09-09-15 / 12:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 13:00 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 13:09 0 1 1 0010 0004
09-09-15 / 13:15 1 0 1 0080 0004
09-09-15 / 13:30 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 13:45 1 0 0 0080 0000


Invalid (hex)
measured IEC
value
09-09-15 / 12:45 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 13:00 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 13:09 1 0004 Rate switching
1st entry after rate
09-09-15 / 13:15 1 0004
switching
09-09-15 / 13:30 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-15 / 13:45 0 Regular entry
Avoid restarting the capture period due to rate switching

Several central stations used in commercial and industrial metering
 applications do not handle irregular capture periods properly.
Therefore, Landis+Gyr recommends that you avoid restarting the capture

period.
18.3.6 Resetting
Internally Controlled Internally controlled resetting usually takes place at the end of the
integration or capture period. In meters with load profiles, it is
recommended that you use the time switch for resetting.
Externally Controlled With external control via a formatted command it is possible that the rate
(Formatted Command) switching can take place within a capture period. In this case the utility can
select whether measurement is to start again or be delayed to the end of
the capture period.
In meters with load profiles, it is recommended that you delay the resetting
to the end of the capture period, so that there are no additional entries in
the load profile. Central stations may not be able to handle too many load
profile entries correctly (e.g. 98 instead of 96 with 15 minutes).

 With the parameter “Restart of Period after”, the user may select that the
integration period is terminated and restarted after a reset.

No New Start of The meter allows the present measurement of capture period with reset to
Capture Period run to its end and only then concludes it. There is therefore no additional
entry in the load profile. Also the reset of the energy and maximum
registers takes place delayed at the end of the capture period.
kW Signal for
P running reset
Reset delayed to the
end of capture period
23:15 23:30 23:45 00:00 00:15
The example shows a 15-minute load profile where a reset occurs at 23:57.
The meter is parameterised so that it delays the rate switching to the end of
the next capture period.
dlms Protocol
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 20 Bit 2 Status

EOI Reset Invalid code
regular measured (hex)
internal value dlms
09-09-15 / 23:30 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 23:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-16 / 00:00 1 1 0 0090 0000
09-09-16 / 00:15 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-16 / 00:30 1 0 0 0080 0000

Reset (hex)
IEC
09-09-15 / 23:45 0 Regular entry
09-09-16 / 00:00 4 0010 Entry with reset
09-09-16 / 00:15 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-16 / 00:30 0 Regular entry

New Start of Capture If a reset takes place during a capture period, the meter ends the
Period measurement for the present capture period, terminates the billing period
and starts measurement for the new period. This results in two shortened
measurements within the same capture period and therefore to two entries
in the load profile. This so-called irregular interruption of the measurement
is denoted in the status word.
kW Reset
P running external
Restart of
measurement
23:15 23:30 23:45 23:57 00:00 00:15
The example shows a 15-minute load profile where a reset occurs at 23:57.
dlms Protocol

EOI regular Reset Invalid (hex)
internal measured dlms
value
09-09-15 / 23:30 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 23:45 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-15 / 23:57 0 1 1 0000 0014
09-09-16 / 00:00 1 0 1 0080 0004
09-09-16 / 00:15 1 0 0 0080 0000
09-09-16 / 00:30 1 0 0 0080 0000
Date/time Bit 4 Bit 2 Status Comment

Reset Invalid (hex)
measured IEC
value
09-09-15 / 23:30 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 23:45 0 0 Regular entry
09-09-15 / 23:57 1 1 0014 Reset
09-09-16 / 00:00 0 1 0004 1st entry after reset
09-09-16 / 00:15 0 0 0000 Status bits cleared
09-09-16 / 00:30 0 0 Regular entry

18.3.7 Midnight Time Stamp

The change of a day can be shown in a load profile according to two
parameterisable methods:
 First load profile entry at midnight

 First load profile entry after midnight (according to VDEW)
The method can be selected from firmware version P03 onwards. Firmware
versions P01 and P02 only support the method with the first entry at
midnight.
dlms Protocol Depending on the method selected, the load profile of a day with the dlms
protocol contains a differing quantity of entries:
 If the first load profile entry is at midnight, a 15-minute load profile

consists of 97 entries, because there are two entries at midnight
with the same measured values (the last registration period of the
previous day) – the first entry with the state EOI (End of interval) as
the final entry of the previous day and the second entry with the
Status SOI (Start of interval) as the first entry of the new day.
 If the first load profile entry is after midnight, a 15-minute load profile
only consists of 96 entries, because there is only one entry at
midnight (with values of the last registration period of the previous
day). The first entry of the new day takes place in the first
registration period after midnight. There is no need to mark the first
entry with SOI with this method.
The example shows the entries of a 15-minute load profile at midnight.
Method with first entry

at midnight
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Status code

EOI regular SOI (hex)
internal dlms
09-03-15 / 23:30 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-15 / 23:45 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:00 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:00 0 1 0008 0000
09-03-16 / 00:15 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:30 1 0 0080 0000

Method with first entry

after midnight
Date/time Bit 23 Bit 19 Status code

EOI regular SOI (hex)
internal dlms
09-03-15 / 23:30 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-15 / 23:45 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:00 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:15 1 0 0080 0000
09-03-16 / 00:30 1 0 0080 0000
IEC-Protocol (R5, R6) Depending on the method used, the load profile of a day is distinguished in
the IEC-protocol (R5, R6) by the time of the time stamp for the change of day:
 The method with the first load profile entry at midnight indicates a
change of day with a time stamp at midnight.
 The method with the first load profile entry after midnight indicates a
change of day with a time stamp in the registration period after
midnight (e.g. at 00:15:00 h in a 15-minute load profile).
18.4 Display of a Load Profile

18.4.1 Display Control
Only Load Profile 1 can be seen in the display menu or service menu under
P.01 depending on the parameterisation. The display is controlled as
follows:
long : > 2 s
Display menu
short < 2 s
Std_dAtA
rolling display
with time and values
P.01 (load pro.) first day X of capture period
Menu 3 day X-1 1. CP 00:15
End day X-2 2. CP 00:30
last day 3. CP 00:45

Double click for
cancelling at any End last CP 00:00
position
End
Load profiles appear – if provided – in the display under their own menu
item like the event log, usually in the display menu:
P.01 logic name

The list of days recorded to the current day is obtained by holding down the
display key. The day required is obtained there by pressing the key briefly
and then after holding down the key again for the day concerned the
individual integration periods with their measured values. The measured
values themselves appear in a rolling display at intervals of a few seconds:
 Time entry with month, day, hour, minute of first capture period
 Status entry
 First measured value
 Second measured value, etc. to
 Last measured value and back to
 Time entry
 Etc.
The next capture period is obtained by briefly pressing the display key. The
end of the day has its own symbol. Return is made from here to the starting
point, to the date, by holding down the display key and another day can
then be sought.
Return to menu item P.01 by holding down the key at the end of the day
stored.
Return to the operating display by double-clicking the display key at any

desired position in the load profile.
18.4.2 Display Example
Display Significance
Load profile menu item
appears after long press of
the display key:
Date of latest day

(22 July 2005)
Obtaining desired day

appearing after long press
of the display key:
First capture period of day

selected
Obtaining desired capture

period
Status entry bit 0 to 15

(8 = Summer time)

Display Significance
First measured value of the
capture period,
e.g. P last IP of +A
(active energy import)
Second measured value of
the capture period,
e.g. P last IP of +Ri
(reactive energy inductive)
Third measured value of the
capture period,
e.g. P last IP of –Rc
(reactive energy capacitive)
Further capture periods appear every time the
key is pressed.
18.5 Communication
Load profile data can be read out at any time as dlms protocol via the
communication interfaces, with protocol according to IEC 62056-21,
however, only under certain conditions (command R5 or R6 according to
VDEW specification).
The utility can then read the entire profile or just part of it. For this purpose
the part must be entered with the readout command by entering either
 The last X days,

 The part from a specific date until today or
 The part between two dates.
The format of the load profile data in display and in communication is
identical.
The value with the midnight time stamp (00:00h / new date) is the last value
of the previous day.
18.5.1 Search Algorithm

When only parts of the load profile data are to be read the utility can enter
the start date from where the data is read and the end date until which the
data is read.
The meter then searches the start date beginning with the oldest entry of
the load profile. Once the start date is found the meter looks for the end
date beginning with the most recent entry of the profile. This requires that
only days previous to the present day are stored in the load profile, but no
date in the future.
Date in the future

 Make sure the date is not set into future when setting manually. Readout of
the load profile is disturbed by a future date. Landis+Gyr strongly
recommends that you reset the load profile after a backward time shift.

18.5.2 Readout for each Channel with R5/R6 Commands

In order to reduce the readout times for load profiles, you can also read
them out for each channel with the IEC R5/R6 commands in accordance
with VDEW. The OBIS identification numbers serve as selection criteria.
The command syntax is: P.01 (Start time; End time)(KZ1)..(KZn)
The optional parameters (KZ1)..(KZn) include the OBIS identification

numbers for the desired channels and the password.
Example: P.01 (0603161517;0603162000)(1.8.0)(1.8.1)(1.8.2)(Password)
Maximum length of optional parameters is limited

The maximum length of the optional parameters (KZ1)..(KZn) is limited to
 32 characters. In order to include as many values as possible in a single
inquiry, you can enter the short OBIS identification numbers (e.g. 1.8.0) in
the IEC readout list instead of the long OBIS numbers (e.g. 1-1: 1.8.0).
18.6 Deleting a Load Profile

Deleting a load profile is only allowed in accordance with national laws
and/or regulations.
Automatic load profile deletion

 If the structure of the load profiles is altered when re-parameterising (the
number and sequence of individual registers), the load profiles are
automatically deleted when the parameterising file is loaded.

18.7 Parameterisation of Load Profiles

18.7.1 Load Profile Entries
Length of EDIS Status Select whether the status bit entry in the load profile is two or four bytes
Register in Load long. If “two bytes” is selected, the entry consists of bit 0 to bit 15 only.
Profiles Default setting is two bytes.
First Entry of Day Select whether the first entry of the day is entered in the load profile at
midnight or after the first registration period (according to VDEW). If you
select “at midnight”, the first load profile entry of the day consists of the
values of the last registration period of the previous day, in the other case,
the values of the first registration period of the current day.
This parameter is not available in firmware version P01 and P02.
Meaning of Daylight Select whether the status bit indicates the event of the changeover to and
Saving Status Bit in from daylight saving time or the state of daylight saving time.
EDIS Status Register
If state is selected, the bit remains set during the entire period of daylight
saving time.
Triggers of Mark the alerts to be noted in bit 4 of the load profile status code. This bit is
Operational Indication set as general alarm bit when one or more of the marked events (battery
Status Bit voltage low, billing period reset, missing voltage L1 or L3) occurs during the
corresponding recording period. Settings for Load Profile 2 are
automatically taken from Load Profile 1.
Output of TimeStamp Select whether the dlms protocols are to contain a time stamp and status
and Status in dlms code for each entry or just for irregular entries.
Profiles
Format of Timestamp Select whether the timestamp should be with or without seconds.
in R5/R6 Commands

Capture Period Length Depending on the parameterisation, the capture period length of either
of Profile Load Period 1 or Load Period 2 is set automatically to the integration period
selected (for more information, see section 9.4.1 “Defining the Integration
Period”). The capture period length of the other LP is user-selectable from
a drop-down list.
18.7.2 Registers Captured in Load Profiles

Select which registers are stored in the load profile at the end of a capture
period.
1. Click on the register you wish to add to the load profile.
The energy registers can also be copied from the stored value profile or
from the event log.

In Load Profile 2, the energy registers can also be copied from the first load
profile or from the event log.
In the left window, only the registers that have been defined before are
available (energy, demand, power factor mean values, instantaneous
values).
The sequence of the selected registers in the right window is used in the
dlms protocol. Therefore, attention should be paid to the sequence in which
the registers are selected.
The sequence can be changed with the buttons and . The marked
To insert an additional register at a certain point, mark the entry after which
the additional register should be added, then add the additional register.
One of the capture periods is always equal to the demand integration

period, the other one can be selected from a drop-down list. For the load
profile whose capture period equals the demand integration period, you can
select either the integration period or the subinterval (if defined).
In firmware version P06, instantaneous values can be captured in either

Load Profile 1 or Load Profile 2 depending on parameterisation.
Load profile depth

 Load profile depth (the number of days captured in a load profile) depends
on the capture period length and on the number of entries with the amount
of bytes used per entry.

Maximum Entries The MAP tool states the maximum number of entries that can be captured
in a load profile.
Depending on the memory allocated to the load profile, the capacity of the
load profile may vary.
Number of Days The MAP tool indicates how many days can be stored in a load profile with
the recording period selected.

Monitoring Functions 245/390
19 Monitoring Functions
19.1 Event Recognition
E550 meters possess various functions for monitoring operation and fraud
detection to help the utility produce bills based on these meters more
reliably and accurately.
These functions are:
 Recognition if the meter is wrongly connected

 Determination of performance quality features
 Detection of open or short-circuited transformer circuits
 Detection of wrongly connected current and voltage transformers
 Determination of negative energy direction
 Detection of device failure
 Detection of influence of strong magnetic fields
 Determination of whether case or terminal cover has been opened
 Etc.
Event Features E550 meters can also distinguish between the events detected according
to type
 Fraud detection
 Power quality and demand monitoring
 Standard events
The events exhibit the following features:
 Their detection can be switched on or off.

 They can be read out via the display and interfaces.
 They can be indicated by a LED and also by a symbol in the
display.
 They can trigger a warning with an SMS or output contact.
 The meter can record the events when occurring or when
disappearing together with various data.
19.2 Assignment of Events

The events depicted in the following are divided into the groups
 Fraud detection
 Power quality monitoring and
 Demand monitoring
The majority of these are also listed under standard events. This list,
however, also contains other events not mentioned here.
Events with two items can be assigned to only one of the two groups, i.e. to
either the standard events or the other group (dedicated event). Exception:
the event “Front cover opened” is automatically assigned to both groups.

246/390 Monitoring Functions
19.3 Monitoring Functions

19.3.1 Principle
E550 meters possess useful monitoring functions as described below with

respect to phase voltage, phase and neutral current, demand and power
factor. A flexible delay time from several seconds up to one hour permits
the monitoring to be made more or less sensitive. The event signal
generated can easily be metered, also recorded in the event log with start
and end or included in the rate control.
E550 meters can monitor the following values:
 Phase voltages
 Phase currents
 Average value of demand Prunning
 Power factor (combimeters ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR only)

19.3.2 Monitoring Sequence
A threshold T is assigned to each monitored value W, except the voltages,

which each use a lower and an upper threshold. If the monitored value
exceeds or falls below this threshold, it is recorded by the meter as a
corresponding event.
For the voltage and current monitoring the monitor is subject to a delay time
of several seconds. The actual events only occur when the delay time has
elapsed, i.e. after the delay set. In this way the utility can prevent an over-
sensitive response.
The demand mean value and power factor are already mean values, which
makes a delay time unnecessary. On the other hand the utility can release
or block monitoring of the two values with a control signal.
The delay time is provided by a counter for seconds, designed for a specific
number of excess values (seconds) n. If, for example, the monitored value
exceeds the threshold, the counter n increases per second by 1, until the
number ny is reached. Only then does the counter initiate the event. If the
monitored value falls below the threshold again, the counter decreases
every second by 1, until it reaches zero. The progress of the delay time is
shown from the example of an overvoltage.
The delay time can take any desired value between 10 and 3,600 seconds.

19.3.3 Measures for an Event
If the counter has recorded an event, the following measures are possible:
Event Counter In a simple case the event counter counts the individual events and
provides this to the display and/or the readout.
Rate Control As shown in the rate control, each event can be accepted as signal by the
control matrix of the rate control in order to perform a rate switching. For
example, the phase current or the mean demand value could set the meter
to a different rate if it exceeded a specific value (the threshold).
Transmission The event can also be transmitted to external devices via an output contact
through the control matrix or directly. It can also activate one of the arrows
of the display to indicate the relevant status optically.
Entry in Event Log The counter can also record the time and date on which the event occurred
and again disappeared. In both cases it records the event with the
corresponding number, time and date and additional information in the
event log (aperiodic memory). This provides the utility with an event log
corresponding to its requirements.
19.3.4 Effect of Delay Time

The following illustration shows the effect of delay time on the monitoring of
a value with the example of an overvoltage. The delay time ny is 5 (seconds)
in this example, i.e. the overvoltage must in principle occur 5 times in
succession (for 5 seconds) before the overvoltage event occurs. A typical
delay time is several 100 seconds, i.e. 5, 10 or 15 minutes.
As soon as the meter detects an overvoltage therefore it increases the

delay time ny by 1. After 5 overvoltages (5 seconds) is ny = 5. The meter
sets the overvoltage event and keeps it set while ny remains > 0.
If the voltage falls below the threshold again, the meter first begins to
reduce the delay time ny by 1 every second until it reaches 0. It only then
deletes the overvoltage event.

The meter records the start and end of an event and possibly its duration
exactly. The start and end are displaced, however, by the delay time (here
5 seconds).
The delay time prevents the meter responding too sensitively when
monitoring a value, i.e. it should not for example record every brief
overvoltage or every voltage failure, but only the relevant deviations.
If in the example of above illustration an overvoltage occurs for 3 seconds,

this does indeed increase the delay time up to 3, but reduces it again to 0 in
the next 3 seconds. The meter has not therefore set an event.
Conversely, a brief failure during an overvoltage does indeed reset the

delay time, but the following overvoltages increase it again to the
maximum. The event remains set.

19.3.5 Thresholds
For each monitor a threshold must be defined. The monitored measured
value (e.g. a phase voltage) is then compared with the corresponding
threshold every second.
Value Exceeds the If the monitored value exceeds the upper or lower threshold, an event
Thresholds signal is generated after the time defined by the activation delay has
elapsed.
The event signal can be metered, recorded or used in the control table
depending on the settings.
Value within No event is generated if the monitored measured value lies within the
Thresholds upper and the lower threshold.
If an event is currently set and the monitored measured value returns to a

value within the threshold, the event is cleared after the time defined by the
activation delay has elapsed.
Communication There is a dlms logical name for each threshold. The threshold values can
be read via communication according to dlms.
19.3.6 Counters
Each monitored value features a counter which is incremented by 1 every
time the set threshold is exceeded. The counters count up to 9,999 and
then start at 0 again.
Communication The monitor counters can be added to the display list and can be read out
according to IEC. In the dlms protocol, however, the monitor counters are
only available as manufacturer-specific value.

19.4 Fraud Detection
Configuration If fraud detection is enabled in the configuration, E550 meters have the
following detection functions:
 Strong magnetic fields

 Front cover opened/closed
 Terminal cover opened/closed
 Reversed phase sequence
 Negative active energy
 Current with undervoltage
 Current transformer open or short-circuited
 Overcurrent in neutral conductor
 Undercurrent
The first three functions, strong magnetic fields, front cover opened and
terminal cover opened can be configured separately.
Application All fraud detection events have their own event log, which records the
start, end and duration of the event, together with further data (energy total
registers).
Individual events can also be recorded in the memory for standard events,
such as current without voltage or undercurrent.
All enabled events are also available in the control table. The utility can
use them there for rate control or pass them on to external devices via an
output contact with the aid of a control signal.
19.4.1 Strong Magnetic Field Detection

Very strong magnetic fields can disturb the measuring system and there-
fore cause faulty measurements. Corresponding permanent magnets or
coils for alternating fields are familiar and partly even available on the
market. Their use enables energy measurement to be influenced
fraudulently.
The meter is protected against “normal” external magnetic fields, but if the
field strength exceeds a specific value, it can disturb the measuring system
up to a complete standstill.
This interference from strong magnetic fields can be detected by the meter
with a reed switch inside the meter, provided it is configured for this
purpose.
In the TNB functional range, when a strong magnetic field is detected, the
meter will register the maximum load while the field is present. This is to
deter tampering.

Recording takes place in its own event log corresponding to the example
shown below. This memory is only readable with dlms and includes the first
and last event occurring, in addition to the 10 longest events. Each event is
recorded with
 Time and date of occurrence together with the total energy registers
selected
 Time and date of disappearance together with the total energy
registers selected
 The relevant duration
Maximum load If functional range “TNB” is selected in the configuration (see section 1.2
condition “Configuration of Measuring Unit”), maximum load condition is activated as
long as a strong magnetic field is detected, i.e. the maximum load value is
added to the active energy registers and totalised to the active total energy
import register on each second interval. The maximum load condition
remains activated as long as the magnetic influence is present and reverts
to normal operating condition when the influence is removed. The
maximum load condition is only realised in the normal operating mode, it is
not supported in battery mode.

19.4.2 Front Cover Removal

A micro-switch is fitted on the front cover. This determines whether the
cover has been opened and reclosed during operation and can therefore
detect a possibly unauthorised intervention.
Recording takes place
 In its own event log corresponding to the example shown above.

This memory is only readable with dlms.
 Also always in the standard event log
 With the aid of battery 1 also without voltage applied
 If the front cover together with the upper part of the case is
removed.
19.4.3 Terminal Cover Removal

The bolt of the micro-switch for fraud detection can be seen on the left
above the terminal block with the terminal cover open. When in place, the
terminal cover presses the bolt down and closes the micro-switch. The
meter can therefore determine whether the terminal cover has been
opened and reclosed during operation and can therefore detect a possible
unauthorised intervention.
Recording takes place
 In its own event log corresponding to the example shown above.

This memory is only readable with dlms.
 With the aid of battery 1 also without voltage applied.

19.4.4 Phase Sequence Reversed
Installation Check The meter can determine the direction of the phase sequence from the
voltages and phase angles. If the phase sequence is reversed, the voltage
symbols flash on the display, which is an important aid for the fitter when
installing the meter.
A reversed phase sequence has no effect on the measuring behaviour

of the meter.
Operation The meter is also able to determine and record a change in phase sequence
during operation. With a delay of at least 10 s the utility can prevent the
meter responding too sensitively. Recording can take place in the memory
of the standard events (event number 63) or in its own event log
corresponding to the example shown above. This memory is only readable
with dlms.
19.4.5 Negative Active Energy Flow
Installation Check The meter forms the sum +A or –A from the individual phase values A1, A2
and A3 for further processing of the energy. If then one or more phases
differ from the sum with regard to their energy direction, the second energy
direction arrow flashes on the display.
Example: sum is positive (+A), phase L2 connected in reverse (–A2).

The display shows +P continuous and –P flashing.
This indicates to the fitter during installation that there can be a connection
error.
Operation If this situation occurs during operation, it can indicate an unauthorised

intervention. It can also be a normal situation, however, if single-phase
export can take place in the meter (e.g. with a single-phase connected
solar generator).
Two parameters prevent a too sensitive reaction of the meter
 A time delay of at least 10 s and

 A minimum current, from which it records the event.
shown above. This memory is only readable with dlms.

19.4.6 Current with Undervoltage

Current with undervoltage can occur if the voltage input to the measuring
system is interrupted. In ZxG400xR meters for transformer connection a
defective fuse in the voltage circuit or a (deliberately) broken conductor to
the meter can be the cause. In ZMG310xR meters for direct connection, as
well as ZxG400xR meters, an internal disturbance can also lead to this
event.
In both cases, the meter can no longer measure the energy in the relevant
phase.
The meter checks the phase voltage with respect to falling below the
voltage threshold Umin. At the same time it checks the phase current for
exceeding or falling below the current threshold I min.
If the voltage is less than U min and the current over I min, the event of
current with undervoltage occurs, which the meter produces following the
delay of at least 10 seconds.
The delay counter (delay time) erases an event set as soon as it is zero
again following subtraction.
Recording can take place in the memory of the standard events (event
numbers 55 to 57) or in its own event log corresponding to the example
given above. This memory is only readable with dlms.
The event “current with undervoltage” activates the voltage-dependent

ampere-hour register of the phase concerned, whose content can be used
to deduct the apparent energy during the event.
The following parameters must be determined for the event current without
voltage:
 Voltage threshold U min, below which the phase voltage must lie
 Current threshold I min, above which the phase current must lie
 Time delay of at least 10 seconds
 Event log: standard or own

19.4.7 Open or Short-Circuited Current Transformer (ZxG400)

A current transformer open on the secondary side can lead to failure of the
transformer if loaded on the primary side.
Meters for transformer connection are frequently connected to the series

transformers via a test terminal which permits the meter to be exchanged
without having to interrupt the primary side. This is performed with a jumper
which short-circuits the current transformer on the secondary side. The
major part of the secondary current flows through the jumper and not
through the meter if the jumper remains closed (inadvertently or
deliberately).
An open or short-circuited current transformer has the result that the meter
cannot record or only partly records the energy in the relevant phase.
The meter checks each phase current with regard to falling below the
current threshold Imin. As soon as a phase current exceeds the threshold
Imin, it checks the mutual relationship of the phase currents. If the ratio
exceeds the ratio of the current asymmetry determined of X%, the event of
current transformer open or short-circuited is present, which the meter
actuates following a delay of at least 10 seconds.
The delay counter (delay time) erases an event set as soon as it is zero
again by subtraction.
All 3 phase voltages must be present for the recording and at least one
phase current must be above the threshold I min. Recording takes place in
its own event log corresponding to the example shown above. This memory
is only readable with dlms.

Example with I1 Current threshold Imin = 2 A
Current asymmetry = 75%
Instantaneous values I2 = 2.6 A I1 = 0.32 A

Asymmetry I1 to I2 81.5% hence > 75%
Event is added on.
The following parameters must be determined for the event current

transformer open or short-circuited:
 Current threshold Imin, below which the phase current must be

 Ratio I to the other two phase currents, which must be exceeded
 Time delay of at least 10 seconds
19.4.8 Overcurrent in Neutral Conductor

The neutral conductor is not usually protected by a fuse, since it must not
be opened under load / during operation. A too high current in the neutral
conductor can therefore lead to a serious disturbance in the installation and
also have critical consequences for the devices connected.
The meter can check whether the current in the neutral exceeds the set
threshold during the time delay set of at least 10 seconds. This generates
the event “overcurrent in neutral”.
shown further above. This memory is only readable with dlms.
19.4.9 Undercurrent
An absent, i.e. a very small current, indicates a highly asymmetrical
loading. For small consumers, who usually have a directly connected
meter, this situation is fairly normal. For medium-sized to larger consumers
on the other hand, asymmetrical loadings of this kind can be undesirable.
The meter can then check the current in individual phases, which similarly
fall below the set threshold during the time delay set of at least 10 seconds.
From this arises the event of undercurrent. The threshold applies to all
three phases and the event is not assigned to the individual phases.
Recording can take place in the memory of the standard events (event
numbers 121 to 123) or in its own event log corresponding to the example
given further above. This memory is only readable with dlms.

19.5 Power Quality Monitoring
Configuration If enabled in the configuration, E550 meters have the following functions
with respect to network monitoring:
 Overvoltages
 Undervoltages
 Phase failures (voltage and current per phase)
 Total voltage failure (meter has switched off)
 Voltage quality
Application All Power Quality monitoring events have their own event log, which
records the start, end and duration of the event, together with further data
(energy total registers).
With the exception of voltage quality, the events can also be stored in the
memory for standard events.
All enabled events are also available in the control table. The utility can
use them there for rate control or pass them on to external devices via an
output contact with the aid of a control signal.
19.5.1 Voltage Monitor
Overview The voltage monitor provides the following functions:
 Display and readout

 Recording in load profiles
 Test for voltage failure per phase
 Test for voltage failure of all phases
 Test for over and undervoltages

Display and Readout The instantaneous value of voltage scanned every second in the individual
phases is available for display and readout.
Recording in Load From the instantaneous values, the meter determines a mean value of
Profiles voltage during the capture period of the load profile, which it can record in a
load profile similar to Prunning for the demand measurement. The utility
therefore also has a voltage profile of the measuring point available there in
addition to the actual load profile. The capture period usually corresponds
to the integration period of the demand measurement.
The meter records the number of failures and enters the voltage failure as
well as its restoration as events in the event log with time and date. The
meter can transmit a single-phase voltage failure – in particular the event
current without voltage – with an alert to the central station by SMS.
19.5.2 Under and Overvoltages
If the phase voltage is above the two thresholds U min with failure of the
individual voltage and Utotal for total voltage failure, the meter checks it for
under and overvoltages. For this purpose the utility can set a lower (Uunder)
and an upper (Uover) voltage threshold.
 If the voltage exceeds the value Uover, the meter increases the delay
time by 1 each second until it is full and then sets the overvoltage
event. When the voltage is below the value again, it reduces the
delay time by 1 until it is zero again (provided it was higher than
zero) and deletes the overvoltage event again.
 If the voltage falls below the value Uunder, the meter increases the
delay time by 1 each second until it is full and then sets the
undervoltage event. When the voltage is above the value again, it
reduces the delay time by 1 until it is zero again (provided it was
higher than zero) and deletes the undervoltage event again.

With under or overvoltage the meter can
 Record the number of the under or overvoltage,

 Use it as control signal internally or transmit to external devices,
 Record the start and also end of the under or overvoltage as events
with time and date in the memory for standard events or in its own
event log.
19.5.3 Phase Failure

The meter monitors the phase voltages for voltage failure, for which it uses
two thresholds fixed internally:
Umin For the failure of individual phases

At the same time the meter checks the associated phase
current. If the current has also failed (current absent) it records
the events as phase failure. If, however, current is present, this
produces the event current without voltage.
The threshold Umin can be selected separately for both events.
Utotal For the failure of all phases, which results in the disconnection
of the meter (total voltage failure).
Threshold Utotal is defined.
From firmware version P06 onwards the phase fail counters record the time
and date information of the last phase fail (C.7.x).
Voltage Failure If a phase voltage falls below the threshold for voltage failure Umin, the
meter records this after 2 to 3 seconds as voltage failure in the relevant
phase.
At the same time it increases the number of voltage failures in the relevant
phase by 1 and records the failure as event with time and date in the
memory for standard events or in its own event log.
Voltage Total Failure If all phase voltages fall below the threshold Utotal for total voltage failure
simultaneously, the meter switches off immediately as described in the
following.

At the same time it increases the number of total voltage failures by 1 and
records the failure as event with time and date in the memory for standard
events or in its own event log.
19.5.4 Behaviour with Total Voltage Failure (Power Down)

Like all electronic devices E550 meters also have a power supply. This is
always connected to all 3 phases, but also functions reliably with two or
only one phase. The voltage monitoring ensures reliable switching off in the
event of interruption in voltage and correct starting when voltages are
restored.
Voltage Total Failure In the event of a total voltage failure, the meter immediately blocks all
inputs and outputs, but remains ready for operation for 500 ms. If the
voltage is restored within this time, the meter continues operation without
interruption. It therefore bridges brief interruptions in voltage according to
the relevant requirements, as caused for example by rapid return to
operation following a temporary short-circuit.
If the voltage is absent for a longer time, the meter stores the data within
the next 200 ms in the memory, sets the meter out of operation and finally
switches off the system after approx. 1 second.
No data are lost.
The meter performs the following specific functions:
 Demand comparison for the maximum measurement, even if the

integration period is not yet completed
 Transmit contact for the integration period opens and remains open
during the voltage failure
 Transmission of valency pulses
– A pulse just sent is transmitted satisfactorily by the meter,
provided the pulse length is shorter than 200 ms.
– Further pulses are no longer transmitted, but these are not lost.
 Switches off communication interfaces
A readout just started or other communication is immediately
interrupted by the meter.
 Switches off effect of following functions
– Display and reset key
– Control inputs
– Time switch switching tables

 Switches off set mode if switched on

 Switches off reset lock if activated
The output signals used retain their status internally. On the other hand, the
solid state relays used in this meter cannot retain any active status.
Starting When Voltage

Restored
Depending on the duration of the voltage interruption, the meter requires 2

to maximum 5 seconds to restart normal operation. The relevant conditions
for this are
 All 3 voltages are present and

 Is between 0.8 and 1.15 ,of the nominal value Un
Switching on takes a little longer, but no longer than 60 seconds,
 With only one phase and neutral

 With two phases without neutral
The meter also performs the following functions as soon as it has reached
its normal operating state:
 Starts new integration and interval period, if so parameterised

 Closes contact for transmission of integration and interval period
with a delay of 1% of the integration period
 Switches on LCD operating display
 Resets communication interfaces and prepares for a communication

19.5.5 Voltage Quality

Four thresholds in percentage of the nominal voltage Un are provided to
determine the voltage quality:
 Upper voltage limit

 Maximum qualification voltage
 Minimum qualification voltage
 Lower voltage limit
The meter checks whether the phase voltage has fallen below the threshold
of minimum qualification voltage or lower voltage during the time delay of at
least 10 seconds.
Similarly it checks whether the phase voltage has exceeded the threshold
of maximum qualification voltage or upper voltage during the time delay of
at least 10 seconds.
The events thereby produced are recorded by the meter in its own event
log. This memory is only readable with dlms.

19.6 Power Quality Monitoring

19.6.1 Current Monitor
The current monitor provides the following functions:
 Display and readout

 Recording in load profiles
 Test for undercurrent
 Test for overcurrents
Display and Readout The instantaneous value of individual phase currents and neutral current
scanned every second is available for display and readout.
Recording in Load From the instantaneous values the meter determines a mean value of
Profiles current during the capture period of the load profile, which it can include in
the load profile similar to Prunning for demand measurement. The utility
therefore also has a current profile of the measuring point available there in
addition to the actual load profile. This permits a conclusion to be drawn
concerning the energy not measured in the relevant phase for the event
current without voltage.
Undercurrent The meter monitors the phase currents for “current failure” and for this
purpose uses the parameterised threshold Imin.
At the same time, the meter checks the associated phase voltage. If the
voltage has also failed, it records the event as “phase failure”. If, however,
the voltage is present, this produces the event “undercurrent”.
The meter records the number of events and enters their occurrence as
well as their disappearance with time and date in the memory for standard
events or in its own event log. This memory is only readable with dlms.

Overcurrent The utility can set a threshold each for the phase currents as well as for the
neutral current (only in M-circuit). If the relevant current exceeds the
threshold, an overcurrent or also overload event occurs. With the delay
time the utility can also regulate the monitoring sensitivity.
The meter records the events and enters their occurrence as well as their
disappearance with time and date in the memory for standard events or in
its own event log. This memory is only readable with dlms.
19.6.2 10 Highest Maximum Demands

In addition to the actual maximum Pmax, the meter can determine up to 10
next highest maximum values, i.e. second, third, fourth, etc. highest
maximum (Pmax 2 to 11). For this purpose it uses separate registers, they
are independent of the 8 max. demand registers. The sequence is as
follows:
If no new maximum is produced from the power comparison with the

previous Pmax, the meter compares the mean value of the last integration
period P last IP with the Pmax of the next demand register, provided the time
window is not activated. This procedure continues as long as lower maxima
Pmax 2, Pmax 3, etc. are present or until a new Pmax 2, Pmax 3, etc. is
produced.
If P last IP is greater than Pmax, a new Pmax is produced. The meter

compares instead of P last IP the previous maximum Pmax with the next
lowest Pmax 2, etc. by the method described above.
Comparison with the next lowest maxima is only performed, however, if the
time window is not activated.
Since firmware version P06, it has been possible to display and read out
(IEC Readout) the values of the 10 highest demands in a dedicated event
log:

Code Main Value Auxiliary Value

1-0:0.2.0 P06
0-0:0.2.2 C23
0-0:C.90.1 96819780
0-0:C.90.2 10780
P.98.A1*01 00.81 kW 00-01-02 15:15
P.98.A1*02 00.80 kW 00-01-03 23:00
P.98.A1*03 00.80 kW 00-01-03 21:30
…
P.98.A1*08 00.21 kW 00-01-01 04:20
P.98.A1*09 00.09 kW 00-01-03 00:00
P.98.A1*10 00.01 kW 00-01-02 01:00
P.98.A2*01 00.51 kW 00-01-01 02:59
P.98.A2*02 00.34 kW 00-01-01 04:13
P.98.A2*03 00.00 kW 00-01-01 01:52
…
P.98.A2*08 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A2*09 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A2*10 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A3*01 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A3*02 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A3*03 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
…
P.98.A3*08 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A3*09 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
P.98.A3*10 00.00 kW 00-00-00 00:00
Time Window
With immediate comparison of P last IP or previous Pmax with Pmax X, it is

then possible that with increasing load one Pmax follows immediately after
another. This could lead to next highest maxima close together in time. To
avoid this, the utility can use a time window within which no next highest
maximum can occur.
Within this time window no comparison with Pmax 2, Pmax 3, etc. takes place.
This time window can have a duration of up to 4 hours and always starts at
midnight (00:00 of the new day).

Conditions The meter can record the maximum only of one of the 8 measured values.
The meter records the individual maxima and enters their occurrence as
well as their disappearance with time and date in its own event log. This
memory is only readable with dlms.
The meter stores all maxima with time and date, even with a reset and then
resets them to zero.
19.6.3 Demand Monitor
Overview The demand monitor provides the following functions:
 Display and readout of active power and in combimeters also of

reactive and apparent power in the individual phases
 Display and readout of the total active power and in combimeters
also of reactive and apparent power
 Checking of rolling mean value Prunning or
 Checking of last mean value Plast with respect to exceeding of
demand
Display and Readout The instantaneous values of active power and in combimeters also of
reactive and apparent power scanned every second are available for
display and readout:
 As sum of the three phases

 As values for the individual phases
These are absolute values (without sign).
Exceeding Demand For demand monitoring the meter uses either the mean value of demand
Prunning or the mean value of the last integration period of one of the
measured value ME1 to ME8. Since it concerns a value determined over
the integration period, no delay time is required. For Prunning the event is
deleted automatically at the end of the integration period.
The utility can operate the demand monitoring continuously or release or

block it with the release signal. All signals present in the rate control are
available as release signal.

If Prunning or P last IP exceeds the fixed threshold value, the meter can
 Use the event as internal control signal, e.g. for rate control or
transmit to external devices, e.g. load shedding,
 Record the occurrence of the event with time and date in the
memory for standard events or in its own event log. This memory is
only read-able with dlms.
Running or Last
Average Value
As already mentioned it is possible to monitor either the current mean value

Prunning or the mean value during the last integration period P last IP.
Prunning With Prunning the event occurs exactly when the mean value exceeds the
threshold, i.e. at an unspecified time within the integration period. Prunning is
therefore less suitable for direct rate control.

Plast IP If the utility uses demand monitoring for rate control, it is recommended that
you monitor the mean value during the last integration period Plast IP. In this
case the meter only sets the event at the end of the integration period, i.e.
when the new Plast IP occurs. The rate switching is therefore synchronised
with the integration period and remains set throughout the entire next
integration period.
19.6.4 Power Factor Monitor

The power factor monitor of the E550 meters can monitor two mean power
factor values of the last integration period. For this purpose, the utility sets
a lower limit.
If a power factor value happens to be below the threshold, the meter

immediately sets the event signal “Power factor too low”. There is no delay
as the monitored values are the mean values of the last integration period.
Whether or not the event triggers an entry in the event log depends on the
parameterisation.
A soon as the mean power factor value exceeds the threshold the event
signal is cleared without any delay.
The threshold can be set by the utility. Using a control signal, the
monitoring function may be activated and deactivated at certain times or
under certain conditions.
The minimum power factors are only calculated and monitored if the
apparent power is above a parameterisable minimum value. This is to avoid
imprecise power factor values due to very low apparent power. Typically,
the threshold above which the power factor is measured is 10% of the
nominal apparent power.

If the power factor falls below the fixed threshold, the meter can
 Use the event as internal control signal, e.g. for rate control or
transmit to external devices,
 Record the occurrence of the event with time and date in the
memory for standard events.
19.7 Stored Values

For every event the meter can store various values:
 Time and date compulsory

 Status registers (only for standard events)
 Error registers (only for standard events)
 Energy total registers
For the event of current without voltage the ampere-hour registers can be
selected instead of the energy total registers.
19.8 Event Log for Parameter Changes

As part of operating monitoring and fraud detection the meter also records
all parameter changes. For this purpose it determines,
 At what time (date, time-of-day) a re-parameterisation occurred,

 Via which communication channel and
 At which security level it took place, as well as
 Which parameters were changed.
The parameter changes are stored in their own event log, which can record
around 200 entries and can be read via dlms. It has the following structure:
Date /Time Channel Security level Parameter group

Ch 1 Ch 2
21.06.2009 14:44:13 1 3 20
21.06.2009 14:16:47 1 3 21
19.04.2009 09:03:57 2 2 79
04.02.2009 10:26:05 1 3 27
Etc.

19.9 Parameterisation of Diagnostic Events

19.9.1 Fraud Detection
Strong DC Field No adjustment possible. The event is recorded in the dedicated event log.
Detection
Front Cover Removal No adjustment possible. The event is recorded in the dedicated event log.
Terminal Cover No adjustment possible. The event is recorded in the dedicated event log.
Removal
Phase Sequence
Reversal
Select the integrated occurrence duration between 10 and 1,000 seconds

after which the event is triggered.
Select whether the event is to be recorded in the dedicated event log or in

the standard event log.
Negative Active
Energy Flow
Select the minimum current from which the event is recorded.

The event is recorded in the dedicated event log.

Current with
Undervoltage
Select the undervoltage threshold as percentage of the nominal value. The

resulting deviation in absolute values is displayed but cannot be altered.
Select the minimum current in normal operation mode from which the event
is recorded.
Select the activation delay time between 10 and 1,000 seconds after which
the event is triggered.

Open/Shortened CT
Select the minimum current and the asymmetry of the current as a

percentage of the minimum current from when the event is recorded.

Overcurrent in Neutral
(only M-Circuit)
Select the maximum current from which the event is recorded.


Undercurrent
Select the minimum current from which the event is recorded.


19.9.2 Power Quality Monitoring
Overvoltage
Select the overvoltage threshold as percentage of the nominal value. The

Select the integrated occurrence duration between 2 and 1000 seconds



Undervoltage
Select the undervoltage threshold as percentage of the nominal value. The



Phase Fail

the standard event log. The integrated occurrence duration after which the
event is triggered is set to 2 seconds.
Power Down


Voltage Quality
Set the upper and lower limits as percentage of the nominal value. The


19.9.3 Demand Monitoring
Overcurrent
Select the overcurrent threshold as percentage of the nominal value, from

when the event is recorded.


10 Highest Maximum
Demands
Select the measured quantity whose demand values are to be monitored.
Select, whether a time window shall be used, within which no next highest
maximum can occur and enter the duration of the time window between 1
and 4 hours.

Demand Monitor
DM1 to DM6
Select the measured quantity whose demand values are to be monitored.
Select whether the average demand values of the last or of the current
integration period are monitored.
Enter the maximum demand (primary data) above which the event log entry
“demand too high” is made.
Select whether this demand monitor is “always active” or which signal is

used to activate it.

Enter the rate number that is used to identify this demand monitoring. A
monitored value can have several thresholds. The rate number is added as
suffix to the dlms logical name.
The dlms logical name is the identification of the demand monitor counter
code to automatically identify each measured value.
When defining a demand monitoring register it is allocated automatically.
The ID string appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC
readout. By default, the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name. The
users can set their own ID string for each object, if necessary.

Power Factor Monitor The average value of the power factor during the last integration period can
PMT1 and PMT2 be monitored. Set the tick “Power Factor Monitor Threshold” and define the
following parameters to do so.
Threshold Enter the minimum power factor below which the event log entry “power
factor too low” is made.
Control Signal Select whether the minimum power factor register is “always active” or
which signal is used to activate it (rate control).
Rate Number Enter the rate number that is used to identify the register for the power
factor monitoring. The rate number is added as suffix to the dlms logical
name (field E).
The event is recorded in the standard event log.
dlms Logical Name The dlms logical name is the identification of the minimum power factor
register according to the OBIS standard. The central station uses the
identification code to identify each measured value.
When defining a minimum power factor register the dlms logical name is
allocated automatically.

Display Code The ID string appears in the code field of the display and in the IEC read-
out. By default, the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name.
However, users can set their own ID string for each register, if necessary.
19.9.4 Format of Snapshot Buffer
Select whether recording should be performed with or without

instantaneous values (Ux, Ix, Power Factor).
19.9.5 Registers Captured in Dedicated Log
Select which registers are stored with every dedicated event log entry. All
total energy registers are available in the left-hand window. However, you
can only select three of them:
1. Click on the register you wish to add.

280/390 Event Log
20 Event Log
20.1 Overview
The event log is one of the various data profiles of the E550 meter, the
other ones being:
 A stored value profile (see section 17 “Stored Value Profile”)

 Load profiles (see section 18 “Load Profiles”)
Event If an event appears or disappears, the meter stores the following values:
 Time and date mandatory (accurate to the second)

 Various status registers
 Event number
 Error registers (selectable)
 Energy total registers (selectable)
20.2 Characteristics
The event log is an aperiodic memory in which irregular events are
captured that may occur in the meter or in the network the meter is
connected to.
Operating principle All events are collected in the event and error register of the meter. From
this register, event log entries are triggered. Each entry consists of the time
stamp, the status code, the event number which describes the event, the
event status and a selectable number of energy total registers.
The events triggered by an entry can be selected. An entry in the event log
always takes place when the event selected occurs and disappears again if
defined.
An event may also trigger an alert.
The event log entries can be displayed and read via communication.

Event Log 281/390
20.3 Structure of an Event Log Entry

An event log entry may consist of the following data:
 Instant of occurrence with time and date (always stored)

 OBIS status register as for a load profile (always stored)
 Event status register with following entries:
– Input signals
– Battery status
– System status
– Voltage failure and return
– Under and overvoltages
– Overcurrents
– Exceeding demand and power factor thresholds
– Etc.
 Event type number
 Error reports
 Status of energy total register for specified measured values (max.
12)
Date/time Status code Event Event status Error Energy Energy

(must) (must) number register total 1 total n
02-10-27 F.F 0000
0000 0000 018 0000 … 0000 0002 0000 052813.1 023621.2
01:32:07 0000
02-10-27 F.F 0000
0000 0000 019 0000 … 0000 0006 0000 052856.9 023666.8
02:13:43 0000
02-10-27 F.F 0000
0000 0008 009 0000 … 0000 0006 0100 052895.3 023699.7
03:00:00 0000
… … … … … …
Depending on parameterisation, the most recent or the oldest entry

appears first in the event log (on display and in the communication
protocol).
The event log is organised as a circular buffer. Once the buffer is full, the
oldest entry is overwritten by the most recent one.
Status code The status code is a 4 byte code according to OBIS whose bits indicate the
current status of the meter and the network it is connected to.
Event number The event number describes the event that has occurred.
Event status The event status is a 25 byte code whose bits indicate the current status of
all 96 possible events (a copy of the event and error register). Landis+Gyr
do not recommend that you add the event status to the event log entries.

282/390 Event Log
Error register The 4 byte error register (F.F 0000 0000 if no error is present). Landis+Gyr
do not recommend that you add the error register to the event log entries.
20.4 Triggers
20.4.1 Appearance and Disappearance of Events
Some events can trigger an event log entry when they appear and/or when
they disappear.
 When an event appears the relevant bit in the event and error
register is set and the status change of the bit triggers the event log
entry “Event appears”.
 When an event disappears the relevant bit in the event and error
register is cleared. The status change of the bit triggers an event log
entry “Event disappears”.
The user may select which events (i.e. the change of which bits) trigger an
event log entry upon appearance and which events trigger an event log
entry upon disappearance.
20.4.2 Event and Error Register

Each event is given a number. If the corresponding event appears (or
disappears) and the event is selected to trigger an entry in the event log,
the event is added to the event log.
The table below lists all events that can be selected to trigger an event log
entry.
Some events may never occur

 The event log is capable of capturing all listed events. Depending on the
functional range of the meter, some events may never occur.
Trigger The symbol in the trigger column indicates that an event log entry can
be made when the event appears.
The symbol in the trigger column indicates that an event log

entry can be made when the event appears and disappears.
The user may select which of these events trigger an event log entry upon
appearance and disappearance.
Alert Events that can trigger an alert are marked with an x in the alert column. An
alert can initiate an SMS message and activate a display arrow.
Error Events that can cause an error are marked with an x in the error column.
An F.F and the error code appear in the rolling display.

Event Log 283/390
Number Name Description Trigger Alert Error

2 All energy Energy registers were cleared (but not the
registers energy total registers). x
cleared
3 Stored values The two load profiles or the stored value
and/or load profile was cleared. x
profile cleared
4 Event log The memory of the standard event log has
x
cleared been cleared.
5 Battery voltage Indicates that the battery voltage fell below a
x
low set threshold.
7 Battery OK Indicates that the battery voltage returned to
x
a level above a set threshold.
8 Billing period A billing period reset has occurred.
x
reset
9 Daylight saving The change from or to daylight saving time
time enabled or occurred. The time stamp shows the time x
disabled before the change.
10 Clock adjusted The date/time has been adjusted. The time
(old time/date) that is stored in the event log is the old time x
before adjusting the time.
11 Clock adjusted The date/time has been adjusted. The time
(new time/date) that is stored in the event log is the new time x
after adjusting the time.
13 Status of The statuses of the input control signals
control input have changed. x
changed
17 Undervoltage An undervoltage has occurred on phase 1.
x
L1
x
L2
x
L3
20 Overvoltage L1 An overvoltage has occurred on phase 1. x
23 Power down A power failure has occurred in all phases. x
24 Power up A power up has occurred. x
25 Overcurrent L1 An overcurrent (overload) has occurred on
x
phase 1.
x
phase 2.
x
phase 3.

284/390 Event Log

29 Power factor The power factor is fallen below a set
x
monitor 1 threshold.
30 Power factor The power factor is fallen below a set
x
monitor 2 threshold.
33-38 Demand The demand has exceeded a set threshold.
x
monitors 1-6
45 Error register The entire error message or parts of it have
x
cleared been cleared.
49 Missing voltage Voltage U1 fallen below the threshold U min
x
L1 for longer than the time delay.
x
x
55 Current with Voltage U1 fallen below the threshold U min
undervoltage for longer than the time delay, but the x
L1 current I1 remains over the threshold I min.
59 All registers All registers affecting the billing have been
x
cleared cleared.
63 Phase Phase sequence reversed.
sequence x
reversal
66 Clock invalid F.F 02000000
x x
75 Measuring F.F 00040000

system x x
memory error
76 Time base flag F.F 00080000
x x
error
80 MMI board F.F 00004000
x x
error
89 Start-up F.F 00000001
sequence x x
invalid
93 General system F.F 00000010
x x
error
94 Communication F.F 00000020
x x
locked
95 EEPROM F.F 00000040
x x
identifier wrong

Event Log 285/390

104 One or more One or more count registers of the operating
count registers monitor has been cleared x x
cleared
106 Alert occurred An alert has occurred. x
121 Undercurrent Current I1 fallen below the threshold I min
x
x
x
128 Energy All energy registers were cleared
registers x
cleared
135 Front cover The front cover was opened after removing
opened the certification seal.
193 Load profile 2 Load profile 2 was cleared.
x
cleared
Note: Numbers 17-28, 49-51, 55-57 and 121-123 only appear in the event
trigger list if the events have been set to be captured in the event log.
20.4.3 Memory Requirement

The memory required for the event log depends on the following factors:
 Type and number of registers to be saved for every event (memory

width)
 Status information, error message, maximum 8 energy total
registers
 Number of events to be stored in the event log (memory depth),
maximum 256 events
Both quantities can be freely determined by the utility.
The memory required by the individual registers is:
 Time stamp of the event (always stored) 8 bytes

 OBIS status register (always stored) 4 bytes
 Event number (should always be stored) 1 byte
 Event status register 25 bytes
 Error message 4 bytes
 Energy total register 8 bytes per register
Example:
Registers: Time stamp, OBIS status, event number, error

message
Events: 250 events
Memory required: 17 bytes per event, total 4,250 bytes

286/390 Event Log
20.4.4 Clearing Registers

The meter records every clearance (reset) of the total energy, energy tariff
or maximum registers, even if only a single register is concerned.
20.5 Display
20.5.1 Structure of Display
The utility can have all entries in the event log displayed under menu item
P.98. This menu item is usually contained in the service menu. The
structure of the display depends on the registers selected. The parameter
setting determines whether the latest or oldest entry appears first.
20.5.2 Display Examples

Depending on parameter setting, the event log can be viewed in the display
menu and/or in the service menu. The following information can be
retrieved:
Menu point event log
Date of first entry
Time of first entry
Event number
(example: voltage failure)
Energy total registers

(example: +A)
Date of next entry
Time of next entry
20.6 Communication
The event log data can be read out with dlms or also with IEC 62056-21.
The utility can read the entire profile or only a part. For this purpose, the
part required must be entered with the readout command either by entering
 The last X days,

 The part from a specific date until today or
 The part between two dates.

Event Log 287/390
20.7 Parameterisation of Event Log
Format of Timestamp Select the format of the time stamp when reading the event log from the
in R5 / R6 Commands meter initiated by IEC commands: without seconds [hh:mm] or with
seconds [hh.mm.ss]
Sorting in Display Select whether the oldest or the most recent entry in the event log appears
and IEC-Readout first in the display and the IEC readout. It is recommended that you use the
most recent value first.
Trigger Sources Set a tick for each event that triggers an entry in the event log saying that
(Event Appears) the event has occurred.
Control Input of Select the control input for which change of status for event 13 is to be
Event 13 monitored. Select “not used” if event 13 has not been marked under
“Trigger Sources”.
Trigger Sources Set a tick for each event that triggers an entry in the event log saying that
(Event Disappears) the event has disappeared.
Registers Captured Select which registers are stored with every event log entry.
in Event Log
1. Click on the register you wish to add to the event log:

288/390 Event Log
To insert an additional register at a certain point, mark the entry after which
the additional register should be added, then add the additional register.
Maximum Number of The MAP tool states the maximum number of entries that can be captured
Entries Capturable in the event log depending on the number of registers that are stored in the
profile with each entry and on the size of the profile.
Entries Captured Landis+Gyr recommends that you enter a value corresponding to the
maximum number of entries capturable.

Alerts 289/390
21 Alerts
21.1 Overview
E550 meters can record important events and forward them as alerts.
These alerts can be used to report important events to the utility in order to
enable an appropriate reaction. They can be signalled in the following
ways:
 Transmission of an SMS message (short message service) to a

specific telephone number (e.g. to the number of the utility service
centre)
 By operating an arrow in the display
 By operating the alert symbol in the display
 By operating the alert diode
 By operating an output contact
 Recording in the event log
For the transmission of an SMS, the utility can use an external GSM
modem connected to the RS232 interface of the meter.
21.2 Recording of Alerts

The utility may select by parameterisation which important events are to be
recorded as alerts. The following events can be selected (the event
numbers are shown in parentheses):
 All energy registers cleared (2)

 Stored values and/or load profile cleared (3)
 Event log (standard events) cleared (4)
 Battery voltage low (5)
 Battery OK (7)
 Billing period reset (8)
 Daylight saving time enabled or disabled (9)
 Clock adjusted (old time/date) (10)
 Clock adjusted (new time/date) (11)

290/390 Alerts
 Status of control input changed (13)

 Undervoltage L1 (17)
 Overvoltage L1 (20)
 Power down (23)
 Power up (24)
 Overcurrent L1 (25)
 Overcurrent Neutral (28)
 Exceeding of power factor threshold 1 (29)
 Exceeding of power factor threshold 2 (30)
 Exceeding of demand threshold 1 (33)
 Error register cleared (45)
 Missing voltage L1 (49)
 Current with undervoltage L1 (55)
 All registers cleared (59)
 Phase sequence inversed (63)
 Clock invalid (66)
 Measuring system error (75)
 Time base flag error (76)
 MMI board error (80)
 Expired watchdog (89)
 General system error (93)
 Communication locked (94)
 EEPROM identifier wrong (95)
 One or more count registers cleared (104)
 SMS delivery to GSM initiated (107)
 Undercurrent L1 (121)
 Energy registers cleared (128)
 Terminal Cover opened (133)
 Strong DC Field detected (134)
 Front cover opened (135)

Alerts 291/390
 Voltage Quality (Extreme Undervoltage on L1) (137)Voltage Quality

(Extreme Undervoltage on L2) (138)
 Voltage Quality (Extreme Undervoltage on L3) (139)
 Voltage Quality (Undervoltage on L1) (140)
 Voltage Quality (Overvoltage on L1) (143)
 Voltage Quality (Extreme Overvoltage on L1) (146)
 Open / Shortened CT L1 (149)
 Profile 2 cleared (193)
Significance of alerts
 An alert only states that an important event has taken place. It is not
indicated which of the possible sources has led to the message. The utility
can only determine the cause from the event number in the event log.
21.3 Use of Alerts
Sending a SMS Alerts can trigger an SMS message for transmission to a specific telephone
Message number. When an alert is recorded, an SMS message is transmitted. This
may take a little time depending on the quality of the GSM connection and
on the number of necessary dialling repetitions.
If the meter is transmitting an alert, it cannot trigger an SMS. A new alert

only triggers a further SMS message when the first SMS message has
been fully completed.
Further Functions The alert activates an internal control signal in the meter, which can actuate
various meter functions:
 Control of an arrow in the meter display

 Control of the alert diode
 Control of an output contact
 Recording of the alert in the event log

292/390 Alerts
Clearing Alerts The internal control signal remains active until it is cleared by one of the
following actions:
 By a corresponding control command from the MAP120 Parameter

Editor. This may be performed on the spot by the service engineer
or via modem by the service department.
 By a reset if the meter is parameterised so that this resets the
alerts.
 Voltage failures do not clear alerts

The internal control signal is not cleared by a voltage failure.
Blocking Alerts While the internal control signal is active, further alerts have no effect.
Therefore, the event log can only record an alert again after the preceding
alert has been cleared.
Example The following diagram shows an example of the interaction between alerts,
SMS transmission and the internal control signal. In this example three
SMS messages are sent per alert (can be parameterised from 1 to 5) at a
time interval t (can be parameterised from 1 to 255 minutes).

Alerts 293/390
21.4 Sending an SMS Message

Alerts can be used to send SMS messages to a mobile phone via a GSM
modem. The text of the SMS message and the phone number of the
addressee can be set by parameterisation.
Usually the meter sends his serial number to the mobile phone number of
the service department of the utility. As a result, the service department
knows that an important event has taken place at the specified meter.
21.4.1 SMS Controller

The SMS controller provides the following functions:
 Initialising of the GSM modem by a corresponding AT command,

provided an external GSM modem without control lines is used.
 Transmission of a user-defined SMS message to a user-defined
telephone number. This information is supplied to the GSM modem
in the form of an AT command.
 If for any reason the GSM modem does not acknowledge a
successful SMS transmission (no acknowledge), up to three
attempts are made to send the SMS message.
 It can be determined by parameterisation how many SMS
messages are to be sent per event (maximum five).
 The time between repetitions of the SMS message can also be set
by the parameterisation (1 to 255 minutes).
 The utility can send a test SMS message to check the connection to
the service department after installation of the meter.
Voltage Failure If there is a voltage failure shortly after the recording of an alert and before
the SMS message could be fully transmitted, the condition is stored in the
meter. When the meter is switched on again, the transmission of the SMS
message is completed after a delay of 2 minutes. If, for example, three
SMS messages are parameterised per alert but only the first message
could be sent before the voltage failure, the two outstanding SMS
messages are sent after the voltage return.

294/390 Alerts
21.4.2 Meter Configurations
External Modem For E550 meters with integral RS232 interface, the utility can connect an
external GSM modem to this interface to send an SMS message.
Built-in Modem For E550 meters with integral powered RS232 interface, the utility can
connect as an option a GSM/GPRS modem (type ASL) fitted under the
terminal cover to this interface to send an SMS message.
GSM Modem When using an external GSM modem or the optional built-in GSM/GPRS
Boundary Conditions modem the following boundary conditions must be fulfilled to ensure
communication between the meter and an external GSM modem:
 The meter must communicate with the GSM modem via an RS232
interface (powered RS232 interface in case of the built-in modem).
 The external GSM modem can be operated both in transparent as
well as intelligent mode. The integrated RS232 interface must be
parameterised accordingly as intelligent or transparent.
 The built-in GSM/GPRS modem (Type ASL) can only be operated
in intelligent mode.
 The max. transmission rate at the RS232 interface should be set by
parameterisation to the communication speed of the GSM modem.
 The RS232 interface must either be set to “initial protocol
autodetection” or, in case of communication according to IEC
62056-21, the start transmission rate must be parameterised
identical with the maximum transmission rate.
 The AT commands used must have 7 bits fixed, even parity.

Alerts 295/390
21.4.3 AT Commands
Initialising External If an external GSM modem is connected in transparent mode to the RS232
GSM Modems with an interface of the meter, the GSM modem must be initialised by an AT
AT Command command. Any AT command with a maximum length of 40 characters can
be parameterised. The initialisation may also consist of several, individual
AT commands, all of which are concluded with <0D> (carriage return).
Using the MAP120 Parameter Editor the initialisation sequence can be
parameterised to the meter. The valid initialisation sequences for a specific
GSM modem can be found in the user manual of the relevant GSM modem.
 Treatment of AT commands
AT commands are treated as an ASCII character sequence (string).
The initialisation sequence for a GSM modem generally consists of two AT

commands as shown by the following example:
ATZ<0D>AT+CMGF=1<0D>
The two AT commands have the following significance:
ATZ Reset of GSM modem (previous initialisations are

cancelled)
AT+CMGF=1 The GSM modem is operated in string mode
Determination of The telephone number to which the SMS message is to be sent and the
Telephone Number text of the SMS message are combined in a single AT command. This can
and SMS Message be parameterised in the meter using the MAP120 Parameter Editor. This
AT command may consist of a maximum of 60 characters with the following
structure:
AT+CMGS=“+41vvnnnnnnn”<0D>xxxxxxxxx<1A>
The individual parts of the AT command have the following significance:
+CMGS= Communication instruction for the GSM modem

"+41vvnnnnnnn" Telephone number of SMS recipient with country
code (+41 for Switzerland), code vv without
preceding zero (e.g. 79) and 7-digit call number
nnnnnnn (e.g. 1234567). The telephone number
must be limited by initial and concluding characters.
<0D> Carriage Return
xxxxxxxxx Text of SMS message. This can comprise any
sequence of characters (without initial and
concluding characters). Usually the serial number of
the meter is entered. A special code defined by the
utility, which for example defines the current location
of the meter, can also be entered.
<1A> Concluding character (CTRL-Z)

296/390 Alerts
The waiting time between the transmission of the telephone number and
the SMS message to the GSM modem is one second. The waiting time for
acknowledgement from the GSM modem that the SMS has been sent is
15 seconds.
The telephone number and the text of the SMS message are thereby
permanently stored in the meter and can only be modified by re-
parameterisation. Therefore, it is not possible to send different SMS
messages depending on the event. The SMS recipient, e.g. the service
department of the utility, can determine from the meter number or the utility
code for the location of the meter, which meter has sent the SMS message
and can then take appropriate action.
21.4.4 Test SMS Message

After the installation a test SMS message can be sent with the aid of the
MAP120 Parameter Editor in order to check the correct function of the
meter and GSM modem. The installer can send any SMS message to any
desired telephone number (for example to his own mobile phone) to verify
that the installation is configured correctly.
The AT command for the test SMS message has the same structure as the
AT commands previously described for specifying the telephone number
and the SMS message. The test SMS message is only sent once, however,
and in the event that the GSM modem is not ready or cannot establish the
connection to the GSM network, no further attempts to transmit the
message are made.
21.4.5 Status Report of SMS Message

The SMS controller generates a status report, which can be read out at any
time using the MAP120 Parameter Editor. The current status of the SMS
controller can be checked in this way. The status report can contain the
following information:
 SMS transmission was successful (1)

 SMS transmission was not successful (0)
 GSM modem is busy (2)

Alerts 297/390
21.5 Parameterisation of Alerts

21.5.1 Setting and Clearing of Alerts
Trigger Sources Select the events that, upon appearing, must trigger an alert.
for Alert
Control Input of Select the control input for which change of status for event 13 is to be
Event 13 monitored. Select “not used” if event 13 has not been marked under
“Trigger Sources for Alert”.
Alert Output Tick each of the desired alert outputs: “on Display” and/or “on Alert LED”.
Automatic Clearing Select whether or not an alert is automatically cleared at the end of the
of Alert billing period.
21.5.2 Short Message System (SMS)
To activate the short message system, set the tick in field “Short Message
System” and define the following parameters:

298/390 Alerts
Phone Number Enter the phone number of the recipient of the alert.
Message Text Enter the message text that must be transmitted to the addressee.
Depending on the length of the phone number, approximately 40
characters can be sent.
Calling AT Message The AT message string is generated automatically based on the phone
String number and the message text. The user can, however, edit the string
manually.
Click and enter additional carriage returns (CR) and line feeds (^z) if
required. Some modems require a carriage return and line feed after a
specified number of characters.
AT Initialisation String The AT initialisation string is generated automatically. The user can,
however, edit the string manually.
Click and enter additional carriage returns (CR) and line feeds (^z) if
required.
Number of Messages Select how many times the message is repeated after the first message
per Alert has been sent. If, for instance, 1 repetition is selected, the message is sent
twice.
Time between Enter the time in minutes between the messages (only applicable if one or
Messages more repetitions are selected).

Display Lists and Protocols 299/390
22 Display Lists and Protocols

22.1 Display of Data
Like previous electronic meters and tariff units E550 meters also have an
LCD (liquid crystal display). This has the following features:
1 Index to OBIS
2 Value of the displayed object
3 Unit of the displayed object
4 Reserved for special applications
The various data appear on the display
 Menu-controlled
with a freely accessible display menu and a protected service menu
 With lists for free parameterisation (up to 200 values)
- Operating display (fixed value or several rolling values)
- Display list (freely accessible)
- Service list (under the utility seal, for installation check)
- Set list (e.g. time and date)
 Display of load profile data
 Display of events
including standard events, fraud detection, mains quality
22.2 Types of Display

The meter has the following three types of display:
Operating Display This is displayed by default while the display key is not pressed. It can
include one or more values which can be parameterised independently of
the manual display list. If the meter is stopped within a list of the display or
service menu, the display returns automatically to the operating display
after a defined interval (e.g. 2 minutes).
Display List It comprises of all values which appear in the display after pressing a key.
The values and their sequence can be parameterised.

300/390 Display Lists and Protocols
Service List This is protected under the utility seal and accessible via the service menu.
It mainly serves as an installation check. The values and also their
sequence are also determined here by parameter setting.
22.2.1 Operating Display

The operating display always appears
 If the display key has not been pressed.

 After a specified time from the display list if this is left displayed.
 After a specific time from the set mode if this is left displayed.
The operating display as can comprise of one value in fixed display or of
several values displayed consecutively at a specific time interval in rolling
display.
Fixed Display
Rolling Display
Error Message
The meter performs self-checks, above all when starting, but also during
operation, which run automatically in the background. If the meter detects
an error, it generates the relevant error message. In the event of a fatal
error it appears in the display, where it replaces the operating display.
 With an error of this kind, the meter must be replaced immediately.

22.2.2 Display Check

Starting from the operating display the display check appears after the first
press of the display key. Branching is possible from here
 To the display menu,

by pressing the display key again, or
 To the service menu,
by pressing the reset key R under the hinged cover.
These menus also appear if only one menu item is present.
Both menus have an “End” position. Return to the operating display is

made from here by pressing the display key longer.
To open a menu item, e.g. to enter the display list, the display key must be
pressed (more than 2 seconds) until the first value of the menu item, e.g.
the display list, appears.

22.3 Display Menu

The display menu always contains the display list under menu item
“Std_dAtA”. Further menu items are possible, e.g. load profiles.
The display list can be found under menu item “Std_dAtA” in the display
menu. The menu item is reached
 starting from the operating display by

– Pressing the display key twice briefly (via display check) or
– Pressing the display key once (> 2 seconds) until the first value
of the display list appears directly
 starting from the display control by
– Pressing the display key once (> 2 seconds) until the first value
of the display list likewise appears directly
The other menu items can all be obtained by briefly pressing a key.
To enter the display list, press the display key (> 2 seconds) until the first
value of the display list appears, usually the error message.
Within the display list
 Brief key press displays all values,

 Longer key press only the main values, i.e. no stored values.
If the display key is continuously pressed, the display rolls at one second
intervals from main value to main value (rapid traverse).
Exit from the display list is made either
 By a longer key press at the end of the list (“End” position) until the
menu item “Std_dAtA” re-appears, or
 By pressing the key twice (within 0.2 second) direct to the operating
display (interruption).

22.3.1 Display List

The display list can vary considerably depending on version, rate set,
country, etc. It can vary with respect to:
 Scope of data and

 Sequence of individual values
It can only be altered by re-parameterisation.
The starting point for the display list is always the operating display.
Display Check Brief press (< 2 seconds) of the display key causes change of the
operating display, e.g.:
To the display check:
All segments of the display are lit here. The index and value fields should
be checked each time for missing segments. This can prevent incorrect
readings.
Display Menu Pressing the display key again briefly changes to the display menu. The
first menu item appears, e.g. “Display list” with the designation Std_dAtA
(standard data):
The menu item also appears if only one menu item is present.
The next menu item appears for every further brief press of the display
key, e.g. “Load profile”, “Stored values”, etc. The first menu item appears
again after the last item “End”.

Opening List The first value of the list associated with the present menu is displayed by
pressing the display key for longer (at least 2 seconds). First item is
usually the error message:
The next list value appears for every further brief press of the display key.
The sequence of values in the list is determined by the parameterisation.
A longer key press (at least 2 seconds) jumps past any stored values.
Continuously pressing the display key starts rapid traverse from main value
to main value.
Typical Display List Examples of values in a display list:
Identification number
Reset counter
Date of reset number 26

(end of June)
Time-of-day of reset
number 26 (midnight)

Pmax cumulated, Rate 1

current Pmax, Rate 1
Date of current Pmax
Time-of-day of current
Pmax
Pmax of previous month

Stored value 26
Date of Pmax of previous

month
Time-of-day of Pmax of
previous month


Cumulative value, Rate 1
Cumulative value at end of

previous month


previous month
Reactive energy inductive


previous month
Reactive energy inductive


previous month
Current time-of-day
Current date
(18 July 2005)
End of display list
Exit from the display list is made either
 By longer key press at the end of the list (“End” position) until the
menu item “Std_dAtA” re-appears, or
22.3.2 Load Profiles

If the load profiles are contained in the display menu, they appear under
menu items P.01 and P.02:
The latest date with entries in the load profile, usually the present day, is
displayed by pressing the display key for at least 2 seconds.

Display Control of After opening the load profile by a two-second key press, the list of stored
Load Profiles days starting with the latest date is obtained. The desired day (date) is
selected and opened by longer key press. The first item appears in the
display, i.e. the first integration period (00:15 for an integration period of 15
minutes). The display simultaneously starts to roll from value to value for
this integration period (approx. 2 seconds interval). The desired integration
period for which the values are required is then selected with the display
key.
For further information about the display, refer to section 18.4 “Display of a
Load Profile”.

22.3.3 Readout Protocol

The utility can record the data stored in the meter at any time in two ways:
 Automatic data readout via the optical interface with the aid of a
hand held terminal or other readout device (e.g. laptop).
 Remote data readout via the electrical interface RS232, RS485 or
CS.
Readout Data For readout to IEC 62056-21, all data determined by the parameterisation
are read out in the specified sequence.
For readout according to dlms (Device Language Message Specification),

the data requested by the readout unit are read out.
22.3.4 Readout Without Voltage

The battery compartment of the E550 meters can accommodate two
batteries, battery 2 on the right as power reserve for the calendar clock,
battery 1 on the left for display control without voltage. This permits the
necessary data to be read via the optical interface from the meter without
having to apply voltage.
This battery also permits display control without voltage.
22.3.5 Readout to IEC 62056-21

The data read out according to IEC 62056-21 are recorded in the form
shown below. The scope and sequence of values in the log is determined
by the parameterisation.
Device Identification
/LGZ5\2ZMG410426b Designation of meter

or (reply on transmit request)
not part of the protocol
/LGZ5\2@P0x84762251

Log Example
Value Significance
F.F (00000000) Error message
0.0.0 (417242) 1st identification number
0.1.0 (28) Number of resets
0.1.2.04 (09-05-01 00:00) Time of last reset
1.2.1 (26068.7*kW) Pmax cumulated Rate 1
1.2.2 (15534.8*kW) Pmax cumulated Rate 2
1.6.1 (192.4*kW)(09-05-06 10:45) Current Pmax Rate 1
1.6.1*04 (202.4)(09-04-22 09:30) With April stored value Rate 1
1.6.2 (086.7*kW)(09-05-04 22:30) Current Pmax Rate 2
1.6.2*04 (100.9)(09-04-14 23:00) With April stored value Rate 2
1.8.1 (0244948*kWh) Active energy (import) Rate 1
1.8.1*04 (0234520) With April stored value Rate 1
1.8.2 (0082520*kWh) Active energy (import) Rate 2
5.8.1 (0106103*kvarh) Reactive energy (inductive) Rate 1
5.8.2 (0039591*kvarh) Reactive energy (inductive) Rate 2
1.8.0 (0327468*kWh) Total active energy
2.8.0 (0000000*kWh) Total active energy import
5.8.0 (0145694*kvarh) Total reactive energy (inductive)
8.8.0 (0001452*kvarh) Total reactive energy (capacitive)
0.9.1 (14:18:06) Time-of-day of readout
0.9.2 (09-05-20) Date of readout
C.2.1 (09-03-26) Date of last parameterisation
! End of log
Stored Values The hyphen following the identification number and the rate (1.6.1) denotes
the type of resetting:
E.g. 1.6.1*04 *04 Resetting made internally or remote controlled

E.g. 1.6.1&04 &04 Resetting performed manually or with reset key R

Notes By parameterisation, the utility can select between a standard identification

and its own identification. Standard identification has the following
structure:
/LGZ... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr)

/LGZ 5... Transfer rate 5 = 9,600 Baud
/LGZ5 \2... Extended communication possibility
\2 = dlms-compatible meter
/LGZ5\2 ZMG410... Meter Type of measuring unit
/LGZ5\2 ZMG410 4... Basic version tariff section
/LGZ5\2 ZMG4104 26... Number of inputs/outputs
/LGZ5\2 ZMG410426 b... Additional functions
/LGZ5\2 ZMG410426b .P0x Firmware version
Identification by the utility itself uses an identification number. ID1.1

(designation of ownership by the utility), ID1.2 (any desired number) or
ID2.1 (serial number) are available.
The identification is comprised as follows in this case:
/LGZ... Manufacturer (Landis+Gyr)

/LGZ 5... Transfer rate 5 = 9,600 Baud
/LGZ5 \2... Extended communication possibility
\2 = dlms-compatible meter
/LGZ5\2@P0x... Meter Firmware version
/LGZ5\2@P0x 84762251 ID number by parameterisation
(max. 8 characters)
22.3.6 Readout to dlms

While the readout according to IEC 62056-21 uses a protocol determined in
advance, readout to dlms enables the utility to configure the values to be
read out individually. The company therefore has systematic access to
specific values without being influenced by other values not required.
There are two possibilities for this purpose with E550 meters:
 Use of short names

For this purpose the utility first reads the contents list of the relevant
data available and then selects individual values or entire groups of
values for the readout.
 Use of long names
The long name represents the complete logical address of the item
concerned. In this way the utility can access individual values or entire
groups of values for the readout, without previously having to call up
the list of contents.

22.4 Service Menu

The service menu usually contains several menu items including set mode
“Set”, service list “SEr_dAtA”, test mode “TESt”, etc. Further menu items
are possible, e.g. the event log “P.98”.
The service menu is obtained from the operating display by
 Briefly pressing the display key and then

 Briefly pressing the reset key under the hinged cover
The other menu items can all be obtained by briefly pressing the display
key.
To enter for instance the service list, press the display key (> 2 seconds)
until the first value of the service list appears.
Within the service list
 Brief key press displays all values,

 Longer key press only the main values, i.e. no stored values.
If the display key is continuously pressed, the display rolls at one second
intervals from main value to main value (rapid traverse).
Exit from the service list is made either
 By longer key press at the end of the list (“End” position) until the
menu item “SEr_dAtA” re-appears, or
Pressing the reset key during the display check changes the display to the
service menu. The first menu item appears, usually the “Set mode” (SEt):

Set Mode
Values can be changed in the value display of the set mode with the aid of
the reset key and the display key (for setting time and date, identification
numbers, battery hours counter, etc.).
Service List
With every further brief press of the display key, the next menu item
appears, e.g. “Service list”, “Event log”, “Test mode on/off”, etc. The service
list appears under the designation “SEr_dAtA”:
Event Log The “Event log” menu item for selection in the service or display menu
(denoted P.98) is shown as follows:
The first value of the event log, usually the date of the latest event, is
displayed by pressing the display key for longer (at least 2 seconds).
Battery Symbol 1
ON/OFF
Battery Symbol 2
ON/OFF
With these functions the utility can switch the relevant figure over the
battery symbol and therefore also the associated monitoring of the relevant
battery on and off locally. By keeping the display key pressed longer (at
least 2 seconds) the display changes from “0” (digit over battery symbol
switched off) to “1” (digit over battery symbol switched on) or vice-versa.
If both functions bAt 1 and bAt2 are switched off (“0”), the battery symbol
itself also remains switched off.

Test Mode
The utility can switch on test mode by hand with this function.
Following the last menu item “End” the first item appears again. To return to
the operating display from the service menu, press the display key twice
briefly (double-click).
22.4.1 Service List

The service list can also vary considerably depending on version,
tariffication, country, etc. It can vary with respect to:
 Scope of data and

 Sequence of individual values
It can only be altered by re-parameterisation.
22.5 Parameterisation of Display Lists

For the following lists the utility can select the registers that are displayed in
the corresponding list:
 Operating display
 Display list
 Service list
 IEC readout
 Set mode data list
1. Select the list you wish to edit.

2. Click on the register you wish to add to the list.

 Register display
Each register may be displayed in several lists.
out. By default, the ID string corresponds to the dlms logical name.
However, the users can set their own ID string for each object, if really
necessary.
Display of Rate Set the tick “show rate registers only if active” to omit inactive registers in
Registers the operating display. The inactive registers are only omitted in the
operating display but not in the display list, the service list and in the IEC
readout list.
If, for instance, the tick is set and tariff 1 is currently active the registers for
tariff 2 are omitted in the operating display although they have been
selected to be part of the operating display.
Stored Values per Select the number of stored values that are displayed per measured value.
Register Shown This selection must be made separately for:
 Operation display
 Display list
 Service list
 IEC readout list

314/390 Display
23 Display
23.1 Display Characteristics
23.1.1 Basic Layout
The basic layout shows all elements of the display for E550 meters. It
always appears when first pressing the display key from the operating
display and is used for checking the display. It is recommended that you
ensure that all elements are always present, in particular those with
identification numbers and the values box.
The basic layout comprises the following elements:
1 Active energy direction +P = import

–P = export
2 Reactive energy direction +Q = positive
–Q = negative
(combimeters
ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR only)
3 Presence of phase voltages Flashing with reversed phase
sequence
4 Presence of phase currents
5 Battery indication 1 = Battery for interface
2 = Battery for calendar clock
Number flashing, if battery voltage
too low (battery discharged)
6 Display of a warning Appears flashing
7 Communication running
8 Units field
9 Index field Maximum 7 digits
10 Value field Maximum 8 digits
11 12 arrow symbols For status indications as rates
12 Reserved for special applications

Display 315/390
23.1.2 Individual Symbols
Energy direction Positive active energy (from power company to

consumer)
Negative active energy (from consumer to
power company)
One or two phases are reversed in direction
compared with the sum (here negative
opposite positive). The second arrow flashes.
The active energy arrow P continuously
displays the sum of the individual phases.
Quadrants
(combimeters II I The meter continuously indicates
the quadrants in which it measures
ZMG310CR/ZxG400CR the active and reactive energy.
only)
III VI
Voltages and currents Presence of phase voltages (L1, L2, L3) and
phase currents (I1, I2, I3)
The symbols L1, L2, L3 flash if the phase
sequence is reversed, whereby the correct
phase sequence (clockwise or counter-
clockwise) can be parameterised.
Examples of Current I1 of phase L1 missing
irregularities: Warning symbol can flash
Phase L2 failure (warning symbol can flash) or

current with undervoltage in phase L2 (warning
symbol flashes simultaneously)
Symbol I3 flashes: negative energy direction in
phase L3
Warning symbol can flash
Battery symbol
The relevant digit flashes if battery 1 or 2 is
discharged.
Warning symbol
Flashes if the meter has generated an alert
Symbol for communication running.
Appears when a readout runs via the optical or
electrical interface
The above symbols can be switched on and off via the parameterisation.
This is only recommended, however, for the last 3 symbols.

316/390 Display
23.1.3 Index System
Index Field
The identification number system is used for clear designation or

identification of the data displayed or readout. The unit displayed above the
value field represents additional information, but is not absolutely
necessary.
The majority of previous systems are now only of limited suitability for new
meters like the E550. A more comprehensive standard system for data
identification was needed, to depict all measuring possibilities of meters in
the ZMG series:
OBIS OBject Identification System

(former EDIS – Energy Data Identification System)
OBIS is described in detail in section 28 “OBIS Identification Codes”.
This system has the following structure with a maximum of 10 characters

and 5 separating symbols:
The medium – e.g. electricity, gas, water, heat – is not used, since the
E550 meter only provides electrical values. The measuring channel is also
usually omitted.

Display 317/390
23.1.4 Display Identification Symbols
Extended functions The display key basically has 3 functions:

with a key
Brief key press Move forwards Within a list

Long key press At least 2 seconds Until the display changes accordingly
- For operating display Direct to display list
- For display check Similarly direct to display list
- For a menu item Opens this and displays the first value
- Within a list Shows only the main values, but no stored
values (rapid passage), applies to display and
service lists
Double key press Within 0.3 second (double-click)
- At any position Direct return to operating display (end)
Read without Voltage With battery 1 inserted the display can be switched on to record specific
meter data without having to apply voltage. The display switches off again
automatically after a given time (1 minute) if the display key is not pressed
again.
The background lighting remains switched off.
Controlling Display If the meter is enclosed in a cabinet with glass front, the display key also
via Optical Interface remains locked. The display can, however, still be controlled with the aid of
a torch via the optical interface. It should be ensured that the torch gives
sufficient light to permit activation of the optical interface through the glass
front.
The functions are the same as for the display key, shorter or longer “key
press” or double-click.
Control of the display via the optical interface is only possible, however,
with the meter switched on.
Background To simplify reading, the meter display is provided with background lighting.
Illumination This is switched on when the display key is first pressed and remains on
while the display key is pressed. It switches off again when the key has not
been operated for a time (usually 1 minute). This time is parameterisable.
Display Check When the meter shows the operating display and a display key is pressed,
all segments of the display are illuminated (display check). Landis+Gyr
recommends that you perform a display check regularly in order to avoid
misinterpretations.

318/390 Display
23.1.5 Format of Date

The following date formats are possible for the display and readout
according to IEC:
 Year – Month – Day (YY-MM-DD)

Example:
Year Month Day

or
 Day . Month . Year (DD.MM.YYYY)

Example:
Day Month Year
23.2 Menus
The meter has the two following menus:
 Display menu
 Service menu
The individual menu items can be parameterised.
23.2.1 Display Menu

In principle several menu items are possible. The display menu is
accessible to anybody, however, and should therefore only contain data
which anybody may read.
The recommended menu items are therefore:
Std_dAtA Display list
The display list contains a selection of registers containing billing data

above all. Access to these registers is unrestricted. The number and the
sequence of the registers can be selected by parameterisation. The display
list can contain current values and stored values.
P.01 Load profiles

P.02
Load profiles in the display are of importance where rate control can take
place outside the meter. They list all the measured values that are captured
in the load profiles with time/date and the status code in chronological
order.

Display 319/390
The other menu items available comprise data for fraud detection and
mains quality, which are actually only of interest to the utility.
23.2.2 Service Menu

Various menu items are also available for the service menu. It is only
accessible, after opening the utility seal and the hinged cover (security level
3) and can therefore also contain data which should not be accessible to
everybody.
The various menu items are:
Set Set mode
The user can modify data assigned to set mode manually directly on the
meter. These are time and date, ID numbers and battery hours counter.
SEr_dAtA Service list
The service list contains a selection of registers, useful for performing

maintenance or which usefully supplement data in the normal display list
(e.g. several stored values instead of only one). The number and the
sequence of the registers can be selected by parameterisation.
bAt 1 Battery symbol 1 or 2 on/off

bAt 2
This menu item is used to switch the monitor of the relevant battery 1 or 2
on and off (see User Manual). With the battery monitor switched off, the
relevant figure does not appear above the battery symbol, even if it is
discharged or removed. If both monitors are switched off, the entire battery
symbol is not displayed.
ALErt Alert message on/off
The alert message on/off menu is used to switch on and off the alert
symbol in the display (see also User Manual).
tESt Test mode on/off
The test mode on/off menu is used to switch the test mode on and off. In
test mode the rolling operating display changes to a stationary list, which
the user can control manually using the display key. Any energy registers
appear with a higher resolution, which permits shorter test times.
Depending on the parameter settings, the LEDs of the optical test outputs
can change their function. While in the combimeter, the centre LED shows
active energy pulses in normal mode and the left LED reactive pulses, the
centre LED changes in test mode to reactive pulses if a reactive energy
value is shown in the display. This permits meter testing with only one
scanning head.

320/390 Display
P.98 Event log (standard events)
This menu item lists all events that are captured in the event log with
time/date and the status code in chronological order.
AntFS Antenna field strength on/off
The antenna field strength on/off menu is used to switch on and off the
modem feature to measure the GSM signal strength (see also User Manual
of the external modem used).
23.3 Display Character Set

Because of the use of a 7-segment display the meter cannot show all
characters of the 7-bit ASCII character set.
The following figures and characters can be shown. Unknown characters

are shown as <SPACE>.
Hex Dez ASCII LCD Hex Dez ASCII LCD
20 32 <SPACE> 43 67 C
-
2D 45 44 68 D
(minus)
_
5F 95 45 69 E
(underscore)
30 48 0 46 70 F
31 49 1 48 72 H
32 50 2 4A 74 J
33 51 3 4C 76 L
34 52 4 4E 78 N
35 53 5 4F 79 O
36 54 6 50 80 P
37 55 7 52 82 R

Display 321/390
Hex Dez ASCII LCD Hex Dez ASCII LCD
38 56 8 53 83 S
39 57 9 54 84 T
41 65 A 55 85 U
42 67 B 59 89 Y
23.4 Arrows in Display

The twelve arrows in the bottom line of the display may be used to indicate
the current operating conditions of the meter (e.g. active rates).
One of the following signal sources can be assigned to each arrow:
 The status of the time switch signals TOU

 The status of the control signals CS
 The status of the reset control signals KA and KB
 That the set mode is active
 That the test mode is active
 That the reset lock is active
 That a communication with the meter is running
 That the time/date is not valid
 The status of the synchronisation output
 The status of the monitor event signals (current, voltage, demand,
power factor monitor)
 The status of the fraud detection event signals (strong magnetic
field, terminal cover opened, current without voltage, etc.)
 That an alert has occurred
What the twelve arrows indicate is marked below the display on the face
plate.
The arrows can be displayed continuously or flashing to indicate the

various statuses.
Example
T1 T2 P1 P2 RS CLK SET Test

322/390 Display
Notations usually used:
Face plate Description Arrow on Arrow off Arrow flashing

T1, T2 Energy rates Corresponding rate Corresponding rate is
Not used
P1, P2 Maximum rates is active not active
Reset lock is not Reset lock is
RS Reset lock Not used
active active
Date and time are Power reserve
CLK Calendar clock Not used
valid has elapsed
SET Set mode Set mode is active Set mode is not active Not used
Test mode is not
Test Test mode Test mode is active Not used
active
23.5 Parameterisation of Display

23.5.1 Display List and IEC Readout Identification Number
You can distinguish between several lists by entering the identification

number for the display list and IEC readout (maximum 8 characters) here.
You can add the identification (C.9.0) to any of the lists.
23.5.2 Data Format
Format of Date Select the format of date for display and IEC readout: “YY-MM-DD” or
“DD.MM.YYYY”.
Use of Separators Select whether the time stamp in the IEC readout contains separators (e.g.
“YY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss”) or not (e.g. “YYMMDDhhmmss”).
Example:
1.6.1 (192.4*kW)(06-11-31 10:45:00) with separators

1.6.1 (192.4*kW)(061131104500) without separators
On the display, time and date are always displayed with separators.
Time Stamp of Select whether or not the time stamp is included in maximum demand and
Maximum Demand minimum power factor register entries.
and Minimum Power
Factor Registers

Display 323/390
23.5.3 Display Indicators
Low Battery Select whether or not the low battery indicator is lit when the battery 1 or 2
voltage drops below the minimum value.
Further Display Select whether the corresponding display indicators are always shown,
Indicators only in test mode or never.
23.5.4 Display Timers
Return Time to Enter the time between 10 and 2,500 seconds after which the meter returns
Operating Display to the operating display from the display menu or the service menu when
no button has been pressed.
Minimum time required

 A return time that is too short can be impractical, because a task in the
service menu might not be completed before the return to the operating
display.
Timer in Operating Enter the time interval between 1 and 100 seconds at which the display
Display automatically scrolls to the next measured value (in the operating display
only).
Backlight Duration Enter the time after which the backlight is switched off when no button has
been pressed.

324/390 Display
23.5.5 Menu Entries

The meter provides two menus, the display menu and the service menu.
For both menus the utility can select the lists that are available in the
corresponding menu.
1. Click on the list you wish to add to the display menu.
3. Repeat the procedure for the service menu.
23.5.6 Test Mode
Return Time to Enter the time after which the meter automatically returns from the test
Operating Display mode to the operating display (normal mode). Usually, it is the test person
who deactivates the test mode.
Recovery of Test Select whether or not the meter returns to the test mode after a power
Mode after Power Fail failure has occurred while in the test mode. If “no” is selected the meter
returns to the normal operating mode at start-up. Default setting is “no”.

Error Messages 325/390
24 Error Messages
24.1 Overview
The meter regularly performs an internal self-test which checks the correct
function of all vital parts of the meter.
In the event of an error, an entry to the event and error register is made and
the meter displays an error code. The error code appears in the display as
an F.F followed by an 8-digit figure. The error code is always included in
the readout log (e.g. error code F.F 0000 0000 = no error).
24.2 Structure of the Error Code

The error code is split up in four groups of two digits each.
The four groups represent the four error types (i.e. time base errors,
read/write errors, checksum errors and other errors).
Each digit of the error code represents four error messages (i.e. four bits of
the error register). The status of the four bits is displayed in hexadecimal
code, i.e. the single digits may display values between 0 (no error message
set) and F (all four error messages set).
Error codes are added

 As all errors are displayed in hexadecimal code a single error message
can appear in the display in various ways depending on the presence of
other error messages.
Example:
Two errors are displayed as: FF 01000200

Another two errors occur: FF 02000800
The display reads: FF 03000A00

326/390 Error Messages
24.3 Degree of Severity of Errors

A distinction is made between fatal, critical and non-critical errors.
Fatal Errors A fatal error indicates a severe problem, which prevents the meter
maintaining measuring operation, e.g. a defective hardware component.
The meter stops its operation and the error code is displayed
permanently.
The meter must be exchanged.
Critical Errors A critical error indicates a severe problem, but with which the meter
continues to function and measurement is still possible. The data are
stored in the memory and suitably marked in case of doubt. After a critical
error the error code is displayed until acknowledged with the display key or
the error register is reset, e.g. via the electrical interface. Depending on the
type of the error this can cyclically occur again, since with the
acknowledgement the error cause is not repaired.
The meter must be exchanged as soon as possible.
Non-Critical Errors Non-critical errors can influence the meter functions (temporarily or
permanently). These errors are recorded in the error register. The meter re-
mains serviceable and need not usually be exchanged.

24.4 Error Groups

24.4.1 Time-Base Errors (Clock)
The first digit in the first group has no significance, since no error messages
are assigned to it.
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and 3
(both error messages set). Significance:
F.F 01 00 00 00 Battery low

Battery missing or discharged. The calendar clock returns to the original
date 1.1.2000, when the supercapacitor is discharged following separation
from the mains.
The error is deleted automatically when the battery voltage has again
reached a sufficient value (e.g. after inserting a new battery).
This error message only appears if the meter is parameterised as “fitted

with battery”. Otherwise there is no check of the battery condition.
F.F 02 00 00 00 Invalid clock (time/date)

The calendar clock returns either to the original date 1.1.2000 (displayed
with 00 01-01 00:00:00) or to the date/time of the power-cut – depending on
parameterisation, see section 6.5.5 “Date and Time after Recover from
Total Loss Power Reserve” – as soon as the power reserve of the clock
battery and Supercap has been consumed. The calendar clock re-starts at
this date and time and therefore shows an incorrect time and date.
The error is deleted automatically when the time and date have been set
correctly by the relevant formatted command or manually in the set mode.

24.4.2 Write/Read Access Errors
The first digit in the second group can have the value 0 (no error message)
or 1 (error message set).
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F (all
four error messages set). Significance:
F.F 00 x1 00 00 Main memory (RAM) error

This appears in the display as a so-called critical error when starting the
meter if the RAM test fails.
The meter may contain erroneous data and must be replaced as soon
as possible.
The same applies to messages: F.F .. x3/x5/x7/x9/xB/xD/xF
F.F 00 x2 00 00 Backup/Parameter memory (EEPROM) error

The meter supplies this message in the event of a repeated memory test
failure. This is a critical error.
The meter may contain erroneous data and must be replaced as soon
as possible.
The same applies to the messages F.F .. x3/x6/x7/xA/xB/xE/xF
F.F 00 x4 00 00 Measuring system memory error

The meter supplies this message for repeated failure of the measuring
system test. The meter may contain faulty data or fail and must be
replaced.

F.F 00 x8 00 00 Time base error

The meter sets this message for repeated failure of the time base test. The
calendar clock can display an invalid time or date. Set the calendar clock
via communication according to IEC 62056-21 or dlms to delete the error.
F.F 00 1x 00 00 Load profile memory error

This message appears as a critical error in case the load profile memory
test fails repeatedly. Load profile data are marked in the status code
(invalid value and severe error).
The meter can contain incorrect data and must therefore be replaced.
24.4.3 Checksum Errors
The first digit in the third group can have the value 0 (no error message) or
1 (error message set).
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and F
(all four error messages set). Significance:
F.F 00 00 x1 00 Checksum error in program (ROM)

This also appears on the display as so-called fatal error if the respective
test fails.
The meter does not operate and must be replaced.
The same applies to messages: F.F .. x3/x5/x7/x9/xB/xD/xF
F.F 00 00 x2 00 Checksum error in backup data memory

This appears on the display as so-called critical error if the relevant
memory test fails.
Load profile data are marked in the status code (invalid value and severe
error).

The meter may not operate correctly and must be replaced as soon as
possible.
The same applies to the messages F.F .. x3/x6/x7/xA/xB/xE/xF
F.F 00 00 x4 00 Checksum error in parameter data memory

This also appears on the display as a so-called critical error if the relevant
memory test fails.
Load profile data are marked in the status code (invalid value and severe
error).
The meter may not operate correctly and must be replaced.
The same applies to messages F.F .. x5/x6/x7/xC/xD/xE/xF.
F.F 00 00 x8 00 Checksum error in load profile data memory

This message appears as a non-critical error in case the load profile
memory test fails repeatedly.
Load profile data of the defective memory area are marked in the status
code (invalid value).
The error is reset via communication according to IEC 62056-21 or

dlms. If it occurs repeatedly, the meter must be replaced as soon as
possible.
The same applies to messages F.F .. x9/xA/xB/xC/xD/xE/xF.
F.F 00 00 1x 00 Checksum error in stored values or in the event log memory

This message appears as a critical error if the checksum test for the
stored values or event log fails repeatedly.
Load profile data of the defective memory area are marked in the status
code (severe error).
The error is reset via communication according to IEC 62056-21 or

dlms. If it occurs repeatedly, the meter must be replaced as soon as
possible.
The same applies to messages F.F .. 5x.
F.F 00 00 4x 00 Checksum error in the calibration data

This message appears if the checksum test for the calibration data fails
repeatedly.
The meter may not operate correctly and must be replaced.
The same applies to messages F.F .. 5x.

24.4.4 Other Errors
The first digit in the fourth group can have values between 0 (no error
message) and 7 (all error messages set).
The second digit can have values between 0 (no error message) and 3
(both error messages set). Significance:
F.F 00 00 00 x1 Invalid start-up due to incorrect memorisation of data during power-down

The meter has detected that the last data storage was not performed
correctly. The meter may contain incorrect data. The error is reset via
communication according to IEC 62056-21 or dlms.
F.F 00 00 00 x2 Overflow or no activity in measuring system

The meter has detected an error in the data processing. It may not have
measured part of the energy and must therefore be replaced.
F.F 00 00 00 1x System error in microprocessor

The meter loses all data acquired since the last storage, i.e. for 24 hours at
the most. The error is reset via communication according to IEC 62056-21
or dlms.
F.F 00 00 00 2x Communication locked

The communication is locked, e.g. after an unauthorised access attempt via
the communication interfaces. The error is automatically cleared after the
inhibition time, via communication (according to IEC 62056-21 or dlms) or
at midnight.

24.5 Resetting Errors

Many of the error messages listed above require replacement of the meter,
since it has a functional disturbance.
Unless otherwise noted in the previous sections, error messages can be

reset only with formatted commands according to IEC 62056-21 or dlms.
Exceptions to the rule are:
 The error message F.F 01 000000 – battery low – disappears

automatically when the user inserts a new battery.
 The error message F.F 02 000000 – invalid clock – also disappears
automatically when the user sets time and date.
24.6 Parameterisation of Error Messages
Resettable Errors Select which error messages can be cleared via formatted commands
under Utility Seal according to IEC 62056-21 or according to dlms. The safety level used for
the access can be parameterised (typically level 4 – utility seal).
Visibility of Critical Select which critical error messages can be shown in the auto-scroll display
Errors (mask). If an error is not shown, the auto-scroll mode is not affected and
continues normal operation in case of an error.
Visibility Mask in Select whether or not the selection made under “Visibility of Critical Errors”
Display applies for the display.
If the visibility mask is active, the errors that have not been marked are not
visible. In this way you can prevent error messages from being shown on
the display if the meter is tampered with.
Visibility Mask in IEC- Select whether or not the selection made under “Visibility of Critical Errors”
Readout applies for the IEC readout.

Identification Numbers 333/390
25 Identification Numbers
Identification numbers can be used for several purposes. Some of them
can be set by the utility (e.g. utility number of the meter). Other
identification numbers are the result of an action or clearly identify a status
of the meter (e.g. the verification ID or the firmware ID).
Identification numbers are alphanumeric strings that can be read via

communication and, in some cases, viewed on display. All identification
numbers are given a display code according to the OBIS standard.
Display of an
Identification Number
Display code Number
Avoid letters
The identification number may contain letters. Some letters, however,
 cannot be displayed on the 7-segment display.
Landis+Gyr therefore recommends not to use letters as identification
numbers.
Name Description Availability OBIS Code

Utility numbers The utility numbers help the utility associate Display, readout ID1-1 =
1-1 meter data read with the customers 0.0.0
1-2 assigned. The utility determines these ID1-2 =
1-3 numbers and can therefore set them itself. 0.0.1
1-4 They may contain a maximum of 8 digits. ID1-3 =
2-1 0.0.2
2-2 ID1-4 =
0.0.3
ID2-1 =
C.1.0
ID2-2 =
C.1.1
Firmware ID The Firmware ID identifies the firmware Display, readout 0.2.0
version of the meter. This ID cannot be read only
changed. It must be noted if the user wants
to re-parameterise the meter with another
parameterisation file.
Firmware Firmware checksum gives the firmware Display, readout 0.2.8
checksum signature as, for example, 0x683b (e.g.
readout: 0.2.8(683b); display: 8.8.0.2.8.8.8
8888683b). The checksum verification is
done at every power-up of the meter. If a
checksum error is detected, the meter
displays the error code F.F 00 00 x1 00 and
stops operation

334/390 Identification Numbers
Name Description Availability OBIS Code

Parameterisation The parameterisation ID identifies the Display, readout 0.2.1
ID current parameterisation of the meter. The
utility can use it for internal data
management in order to permit rapid
determination of the current parameter
settings.
ID of active time The ID of the active time switch identifies the Display, readout 0.2.2
switch active switching tables of the time switch.
The utility can enter and alter the ID.
ID of passive time The ID of the passive time switch identifies Display, readout 0.2.7
switch the new passive switching table of the time
switch. The utility can enter and alter the ID.
ID of display list The ID of the display list and IEC readout Display, readout C.9.0
and IEC readout can also be used by the utility for internal
data management. The utility can enter and
change the ID, but it must contain a
maximum of 8 digits.
Configuration ID The meter calculates the configuration ID Display, readout C.90
based on the configuration selected. read only
Connection ID The Connection ID identifies the connection Display, readout 0.2.4
diagram of the meter according to
DIN43856. Can be used as installation aid.
dlms device ID The dlms device ID is a unique worldwide Communication 42.0.0
address that is used to clearly identify the read-only
meter. The dlms device ID is part of the
communication protocol and consists of the
letters “LGZ” and the 8-digit meter device
number.
HDLC device For multiple communications by dlms via the Readout C.90.2
address RS485 or CS interface, the HDLC device
address (physical HDLC device address)
identifies every meter within the connection.
By default, it consists of the last four figures
of the meter’s device number plus 1,000.
IEC device For multiple communications by IEC 62056- Readout C.90.1
address 21 via the RS485 or CS interface, the IEC
device address (physical IEC device
address) identifies every meter within the
connection. By default, the IEC device
address is the 8-digit device number of the
meter.
Metering Code ID The Metering Code ID is a 33-character Communication C.1.10
alphanumeric string that is unique to each
meter worldwide. The ID contains
information about the country and the utility.
The utility can enter and alter the ID.

Identification Numbers 335/390
25.1 Parameterisation of Identification Numbers

Where possible, enter the identification numbers as required.
Apart from entering the identification numbers themselves, no parameters

must be set.

336/390 Communication
26 Communication
E550 meters have 1 to 3 interfaces for communication:
 Optical interface (always present)

 Electrical interface in E550 meters with firmware version P01 to P04
(without, CS only, RS232 or RS485 with or without CS)
 Electrical interface 1 in E550 meters with firmware version P05 or
higher (without, RS232, powered RS232 or RS485)
 Electrical interface 2 in E550 meters with firmware version P05 or
higher (without, CS, RS485 or RS422)
26.1 Optical Interface
optical interface
The optical interface is provided for local communication with the meter,
including automatic readout of data, performance of service functions, re-
parameterisation, etc. The user employs a suitable device for this purpose,
such as handheld terminal or laptop and a suitable reading head. The
interface has the following characteristics:
 Physical characteristics according to IEC 62056-21

 Opening of communication always with start transmission rate of
300 bps
 Start protocol always according to IEC 62056-21 (mode C)
 As “optical key”, i.e. as receiver of a light signal, e.g. generated by a
flashlight acting like the “down” display key
 Also supports dlms, changeover performed at start
 Maximum transmission rate 19,200 bps
The optical interface is a serial, bi-directional interface. It is situated on the
face plate on the right below the display.
The optical interface is defined by the following IEC standards:
 IEC 62056-21: Optical and mechanical definitions and IEC protocol

 IEC 62056-42: dlms physical layer
 IEC 62056-46: dlms link layer (HDLC definitions)
 IEC 62056-53: dlms application layer (COSEM)

Communication 337/390
Parallel readout E550 meters can be read out by the utility via the optical or the electrical
interface. These interfaces can be used independently.
Readout without With battery 1, it is possible to read the meter out even in case of a power
power cut.
26.2 Electrical Interfaces

In addition to the optical interface always present, E550 meters can be
fitted with one or two additional interfaces for remote readout.
Characteristics The electrical interface has the following characteristics:
 Start transmission rate 300 up to 38,400 bps (bits per second)

 Automatic recognition of start protocol
 Maximum transmission rate 2,400 up to 38,400 bps
(CS only up to 9,600 bps)
Parallel Readout E550 meters can be read out via the optical and up to 2 electrical interfaces
simultaneously.
Series 1 Meters In E550 meters with firmware version P01 to P04, the available electrical
interfaces are located on the main board (channel 1: RS232 or RS485) and
on the extension board (channel 2: CS). Channel 1 is referred to as
electrical interface 1. Channel 2 is referred to as electrical interface 2.
The following versions are available for Series 1 meters:
.00 No interface
.02 RS232 interface alone (transparent/intelligent)
.03 RS485 interface alone
.40 CS interface alone
.42*) RS232 interface together with CS interface
.43*) RS485 interface together with CS interface
*) Only available for extension boards 260 and 440

Only One Interface With firmware version P01 to P04 for the versions RS232 with CS (.42) and
Active in Series 1 RS485 with CS (.43), the utility must define which of the two interfaces is to
Meters be used (parameter “Active Electrical Interface”). This is performed with the
MAP120 Parameter Editor. Adaptation in the field is therefore possible at
any time.
Series 2 Meters In E550 meters with firmware version P05 or higher, the available electrical
interfaces are located on the main board (base: RS232 or RS485) and on
the extension board (position 1: powered RS232 or RS422, position 2:
RS485 or RS422). The connector denoted base is also referred to as
electrical interface 1. The connector that is part of the extension board is
referred to electrical interface 2.
The following versions are available for Series 2 meters:
.00 No interface
***)
.07 Powered RS232 alone on interface 1
.37*) Powered RS232 on interface 1 and RS485 interface on
interface 2
.40**) CS alone on interface 2
**)
*)
.60 Dual jack RS422 on interface 2
*)
.62 RS232 on interface 1 with dual jack RS422 on interface 2
.63*) RS485 on interface 1 with dual jack RS422 on interface 2

26.2.1 RS232 Interface

The RS232 interface is an asymmetric, serial, asynchronous, bi-directional
interface.
The RS232 interface is used:
 For the connection of an external modem (intelligent or transparent),

e.g. for remote reading of meter data or performance of service
tasks from a central station.
 To provide a direct connection to the RS232 interface of a
computer.
The RS232 interface is available in 2 different versions:
 As RS232 without handshake, i.e. transparent (basic version

without control lines) for the connection of an external modem with
sufficient intelligence of its own or
 As RS232 with handshake, i.e. intelligent (extended version with
control lines) for the connection of a transparent external modem.
The use of this version has the following advantages:
– Application of commercially available modem possible easily
– Usage of maximum possible transfer rate without danger of
buffer overflow
– Limiting of maximum connection and idle time possible
– Optimum behaviour with poor connections
– Support of time windows.
26.2.2 Powered RS232 Interface

The powered RS232 interface is intended to be used with MSM (Multi
Source Modems) fitted under the terminal cover of the meter. It provides
the necessary power supply over the same RJ45 connector.
The powered RS232 interface is not available with firmware versions P01
to P04.
Landis+Gyr has worked with independent modem suppliers in the

specification and validation of these modems in systems. The MSM product
line defines a standard set of features that each MSM modem must support
and in addition, optional features that are outside of the scope of the MSM
product may be implemented by the supplier.
The MSM product supports:
 Electrical interface compatibility with powered RS232 interface of

the meter in terms of baud rate and power consumption
 Meter management of modem in terms of modem reset and
GPRS/GSM mode selection by time of day
 Installation support using signal strength measurement
 MAP tool configuration of meter to support modem types
 GSM CSD communication at 9600 baud
 AT command configuration

 Vendor specific modem tools

 Installation under the terminal cover. No additional space or power
supply needed.
 Flow controlled RS232 interface using CTS interface
 GCF radio certification
 SMA co-axial antenna connector
 SMS alerts
 Quad band modem (850/900/1800/1900 MHz)
 -20 °C to +55 °C operating temperature
 Remote firmware updateability
Optional features that may vary depending on vendor may amongst other
include:
 Dynamic IP support
 Fixed IP support
 GPRS class of operation (Class 2, 4, 8 or others)
 RS485 interface to connect multiple meters
 GSM CSD calls accepted when modem in GPRS mode
 LED Display
 Self-cleaning SIM card holder
 Antenna solutions under the terminal cover
Powered RS232 port is designed only for MSM modems

The interface provides pins that can be used to power various kinds of
equipment. Landis+Gyr has verified that MSM modems conform to all
 relevant standards and norms regarding emissions and safety for metering
environments. Landis+Gyr does not provide any guarantees regarding
about measurement, emissions or safety when third party equipment is
connected.

The RS485 interface is a serial, bi-directional interface according to ISO-
8482. It is used to link a master and a maximum of 31 meters (slaves) in a
daisy-chain network.
The RS485 interface is half-duplex, i.e. data can be transmitted in both

directions, but only one-way at a time.
The number of meters attached depends on the bus length, communication

speed and on the type of wiring. This local network may then be connected
to a modem in order to read out the meter data or perform service tasks
(such as setting start values, time/date, etc.).

RS485 Multi-Drop RS485 multi-drop connection allows communication with up to 32 meters

Connection on one bus. All configurations are pre-set including the meter addresses.
Multi-drop configurations are extendable and use standardised connection
technology.

The RS422 interface is a serial, symmetrical, asynchronous bi-directional
interface according to ISO-8482.It is available alone or together with the
RS232 or RS485 interface.
The RS422 interface is full-duplex, i.e. data can be transmitted

simultaneously in both directions.
Depending on the application and the equipment that is connected, the use
of termination resistors and crossover cables are needed. When using the
RS422 option, position 1 and 2 are RS422 ports. If other interface options
are needed (RS232 or RS485), these are available only in the base meter.
A maximum of 10 locally installed meters can be connected in a parallel

network and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data
or perform service functions (such as setting initial values, time/date, etc.).
26.2.5 CS Interface
The CS interface is a serial, bi-directional, passive current interface (current
loop).
It is available alone or together with the RS232 or RS485 interface.
A maximum of 4 locally installed meters can be connected to a bus system

and then centrally to a modem, in order to read out the meter data or
perform service functions (such as setting initial values, time/date, etc.).

26.3 Addressing the Meters

When using the RS485, the RS422 or the CS interface, several meters are
linked in a network. Therefore, the individual meters must be addressed by
a unique identification.
HDLC device address For communication with dlms, every meter can be addressed using the
HDLC device address (Physical HDLC Device Address). By default, it
consists of the last four figures of the meter device number plus 1000.
Meter device number 83 72 1033

1000
HDLC device address 2033
Therefore, the device address can be a number between 1000
(0000+1000) and 10999 (9999+1000).
Default setting
 This is the default setting and meters are shipped with default settings
unless ordered otherwise.
The utility may adapt the device addresses of the meters according to their
requirement. However, the range of numbers which can be used for device
addresses is limited. Only the numbers between 16 and 16381 can be used.
IEC device address For communication according to IEC 62056-21, the meters require an IEC
device address with multiple readout. By default, the IEC device address is
the 8-digit device number of the meter.
If required, the utility may modify the device addresses of the meters.
IEC Identification The utility can select by parameterisation between the IEC identification
and its own identification. The IEC identification has the following structure:
/LGZ... Manufacturer Landis+Gyr

/LGZ 5... Transmission 5 = 9600 bps
speed
/LGZ5 \2... Communication \2= dlms-compatible meter
possibility
/LGZ5\2 ZMG410... Meter Type of measuring unit
/LGZ5\2ZMG410 4 Basic version tariff section
/LGZ5\2ZMG4104 26... Number of inputs/outputs
/LGZ5\2ZMG410426 b... Additional functions
/LGZ5\2ZMG410426b .P0x Firmware version

Own Identification Identification by the utility itself uses an identification number. The
identification numbers 1.1, 1.2 or 2.1 are available.
/LGZ... Manufacturer Landis+Gyr

/LGZ 5... Transmission 5 = 9600 bps
speed
/LGZ5 \2... Communication \2= dlms-compatible meter
possibility
/LGZ5\2 \@P0x Firmware version
/LGZ5\2\@P0x 83721033 Identification number
specified by
parameterisation (max. 8
characters)
26.3.1 Readout to dlms

While the readout according to IEC 62056-21 uses a protocol determined in
advance, readout to dlms enables the utility to configure the values to be
read out individually. The company therefore has systematic access to
specific values without being influenced by other values not required.
dlms Specification Various meter manufacturers – including Landis+Gyr – have compiled the
language specification dlms (device language message specification)
together with related organisations and committed themselves to use it in
their equipment (meters, tariff units, systems, etc.). This specification is
standardised in:
 IEC 62056-42: dlms physical layer

 IEC 62056-46: dlms link layer (HDLC definitions)
 IEC 62056-53: dlms application layer (COSEM)
Objective The objective of dlms is to use a common language for data exchange in
the energy measurement and other sectors. In addition to end units, such
as meters, tariff units, etc., dlms also concerns the interfaces, transmission
channels and system software.
Principle dlms can be compared with sending a letter: the sender writes the address
of the recipient on the envelope and hands it to the post office for transport.
The way in which the postal department transports the letter is of no
consequence to sender and receiver. What matters is that the address
clearly indicates the recipient, that the letter is received and read and that
the recipient can read the sender’s name.
Devices using dlms operate in a similar way. They provide the values –
termed items – required by the receiver (e.g. central station) and pass them
to the transport medium (channel) via an interface. How the values reach
the recipient is again immaterial for both parties.

dlms Objects dlms is an object-oriented language. The dlms objects
 Have a unique name in the form of the OBIS identification number

 Contain the value in an exactly defined form and
 Are configured in an exactly defined format.
Objects like these are, for instance, number of resets with date and time,
cumulative maximum values, sliding mean values, maximum values,
energy statuses, associated stored values, etc.
The sender hands over the objects to a transport medium, e.g. the
telephone network. The objects are transmitted to the receiver via the
telephone network in a way that they arrive at the recipient in the same
form as supplied by the sender.
26.4 Monitoring of Password Input

The meters are provided with a password input monitoring which can be
activated or deactivated. With the input monitor activated, every defined
password is individually monitored every time it is entered (see table in
section 27.4.6 “Modification of Passwords”).
Every wrong password entered sets a flag in a 16-bit status word (bit 0 for
IEC W5-password, bit 1 for password 1, bit 2 for password 2, etc.). The flag
is reset when the correct password is entered, provided communication is
not yet inhibited.
If a flag is set, all further wrong inputs of all passwords are counted. If the
parameterised number of permitted wrong inputs (max. 15) is exceeded,
communication is inhibited in all channels for a specific time (max. 24 h).
Inhibition of communication
 Sets the error message F.F 00000020,

 Can be shown in the display with an arrow and
 Can be recorded in the standard event log (event 94).
The flags and counters are reset and inhibition cancelled,
 When the voltage in all phases is disconnected or

 If the next full hour (01:00, 02:00, etc.) is reached before expiration
of the parameterised inhibition time or
 If the date changes (at midnight).
The first of these events to occur causes resetting of flags and counters, in
addition to cancellation of the communication inhibition.

Example 1 The diagrams below show the method of operation of the input monitor with
a parameterised inhibition time of 1 h and with 7 permitted wrong password
inputs before inhibition of communication. All accesses are made via the
same channel and at the same access level.
21:00 22:00 23:00 00:00 01:00 02:00
1 2 1 4 1 4 1 4
Flag
3 4
Communication
locked
= wrong password = correct password = inhibited communication attempt
1 1st wrong password sets flag and starts counter

2 Correct password resets flag and counter provided count < 7
3 7th wrong password starts inhibition (count = 7)
4 Next full hour resets flag, counter and inhibition
Example 2 The diagrams below show the method of operation of the input monitor with
a parameterised inhibition time of 2 h and with 5 permitted wrong password
inputs before inhibition of communication. All accesses are made via the
same channel and at the same access level.
t
21:00 22:00 23:00 00:00 01:00 02:00
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 3
Flag
2 3
Communication
locked
= wrong password = correct password = inhibited communication attempt
1 1st wrong password sets flag and starts counter

2 5th wrong password starts inhibition (count = 5)
3 Next full hour before expiration of inhibition resets flag, counter and inhibition
4 Midnight resets flag and counter
5 Correct password resets flag and counter, provided count < 5

IEC R5/R6 Commands Readout of load profiles for each channel with IEC R5/R6 commands
with Password according to VDEW is described in section 18.5.2 “Readout for each
Channel with R5/R6 Commands”.
Depending on whether the password input monitoring is activated or

deactivated, the meter reacts as follows to IEC R5/R6 commands:
Password input Correct Incorrect No

monitoring password password password
Activated Access No access No access
Deactivated Access* Access* Access
* Since the password input monitoring is deactivated, the meter interprets

the password as an OBIS identification number. Since the password
hardly corresponds to a valid OBIS identification number, the values of
the last OBIS identification numbers are invalid.

26.5 External Modem Connected to an RS232 Interface

The central station calls the measuring point periodically to read the meter
data, synchronise the time or to transmit time switch tables and other
parameters. The reception readiness of the modem for incoming calls can
be limited either by a user-defined communication time window (see
section 26.5.1 “Communication Time Window for Modems”) or by the caller
identification function (see section 26.5.2 “Calling Line Identification”).
26.5.1 Communication Time Window for Modems

As access protection the receive readiness to incoming calls can be limited
by a user-defined communication time window. The communication time
window defines at what times the central station can communicate with the
meter (see also section 26.6.7 “External Modem Configuration”).
It can be defined, for example, that the modem should accept incoming
calls within the communication time window immediately after the first ring,
but not outside the communication time window or only after multiple rings.
Communication between central station and meters can take place in the
ways illustrated above:
 At any time (operation without time window)

 Daily, weekly or monthly during a defined time window (outside the
time window the modem does not accept incoming calls at all or
only after a specific number of rings)
 Weekly or monthly during a defined time window with additional
emergency window (this is open to the central station for 24 hours
after the regular time window, if no call is made during the regular
time window)
It can be determined by selecting the mode of operation whether a defined
time window should be fixed, disconnectable (e.g. by dlms service, if the
readout is ended or is not to take place) or have an emergency window.

26.5.2 Calling Line Identification

The calling line identification (CLI) enables the communication unit to
identify the number of the caller. If the number corresponds to one of the
parameterised call identification numbers, the call is accepted.
It is possible to use both a time window (see section 26.5.1

“Communication Time Window for Modems”) as well as call identification.
The time window set then functions in the same way as for calls without call
identification activated, but always has priority. This provides the following
behaviour:
 Within the time window the call is always accepted after the number
of rings set for this purpose, regardless of whether the call number
is valid or not (calling line identification is ineffective).
 If the number of rings outside the time window is set greater than 0,
the call is always accepted after the corresponding number of rings,
regardless of whether the call number is valid or not (calling line
identification is similarly ineffective).
 If the number of rings outside the time window is set to 0, a call from
a valid call number is accepted after the 1st ring, but a call from an
invalid call number not at all (calling line identification effective).
26.6 Parameterisation of Communication

26.6.1 General Communication Parameters
Type of Identification Select the type of identification message:

Message
 Programmable (default, you have to enter the IEC identification

string subsequently)
 Fixed with ID number (VDEW, an ID number must also be selected)
IEC Identification Select “programmable (standard)” as “Type of identification message” and

String enter the IEC identification string.
ID Number Selection Select “fixed with ID” as “Type of identification message” and select which
ID number should be used as identification number.
 ID1.1
 ID1.2
 ID2.1

The identification string then consists of the following information:
\LGZx\2\@Pxx.abcdefgh
ID (8 characters)
Software version
Communication protocol according to VDEW
Communication protocol according to dlms
Baudrate
26.6.2 Password Input Monitoring
Number of Attempts Select the number of wrong password inputs permitted before
before Inhibition communication is inhibited (maximum 15, default 7).
Recover from Select the duration of communication inhibition following too many wrong
Inhibition After password inputs (range 1 to 24 h, default 1 h). Note the criteria specified in
section 26.4 “Monitoring of Password Input” for elimination of the
communication inhibition.
26.6.3 Return Time to Sleep Mode
Select a time between 10 and 100 seconds, after which return is made to
Sleep Mode.

26.6.4 Data Format of R6 Command
Select the desired data format for the block command R6.
With selection “including header information between blocks” a CRLF is

inserted at the end of the last line and the header (address field) repeated
at the start of each new block, contrary to the relevant IEC standard.
With selection “according to IEC62056-21 (R4)” no CRLF is inserted at the

end of the last line and only the first block has a header, as defined in IEC
standard 62056-21.
26.6.5 Optical Interface
Parameters for the

Optical Interface
Initial Protocol Select IEC 62056-21 if communication can be performed according to IEC
or dlms.
Only select dlms (HDLC), if communication is performed exclusively

according to dlms, i.e. the data receiver does not use the IEC-protocol.
Start Transmission Fixed setting of 300 bps according to IEC.

Rate
Maximum Select the maximum transmission rate with which the optical interface
Transmission Rate communicates (maximum 19,200 bps).

IEC Inter Character Select the maximum time between two characters or two blocks after which
Timeout a time-out error is generated. Default setting is 1.5 s.
HDLC Transmit Buffer Enter the HDLC transmit buffer size for the dlms communication (62 ... 248
Size bytes).
Recommended HDLC transmit buffer size

The normal size of the HDLC transmit buffer is 248 bytes. Landis+Gyr
 recommends that you reduce this value only in case of communication
problems, since automatic HDLC transmit buffer size adaptation is
supported. With this function it is recognised when an external device
requires a smaller HDLC transmit buffer size and adaptation is made.
Parameters for the

Exclusive Use of the
dlms Protocol
Transmission Rate Select the transmission rate with which the optical interface communicates
(maximum 19.200 bps).
Size bytes).

The normal size of the HDLC transmit buffer is 248 bytes. Landis+Gyr
 recommends to reduce this value only in case of communication problems,
since automatic HDLC transmit buffer size adaptation is supported. With
this function it is recognised when an external device requires a smaller
HDLC transmit buffer size and adaptation is made.

26.6.6 Electrical Interface(s)
Available Parameters The parameters of the electrical interfaces depend on the configuration
(see section 1.2 “Configuration of Measuring Unit”) and on the firmware
version.
Active Electrical This parameter is only available with firmware versions P01 to P04. Define
Interface whether you would like to use the interface of the base meter (RS232 or
RS485) or of the extension board (CS). You can use only one of them.
External device on This parameter is only available, if RS232 or powered RS232 is selected as
Electrical Interface 1 electrical interface (firmware version P01 to P04) or electrical interface 1,
respectively (firmware version P05 and higher).
Select with RS232 which external device you would like to connect: “none”,
“DTE direct”, “external modem DCE” or “GSM”. With firmware version P01
to P04, this parameter is only present if you have set the “Active Electrical
Interface” to “Interface on Base Meter”.
Select with powered RS232 which external device you would like to
connect: “none”, “DTE direct” or “3rd party modem” (this is a device type of
MSM (Multi Source Modems), which can be fitted under the terminal cover
and supplied with power via the powered RS232 interface).
If “external modem DCE”, “GSM” or “3rd party modem” is selected the

external modem must be configured (see section 26.6.7 “External Modem
Configuration”).

Electrical Interface 1
(Example RS232,
DTE direct)
Electrical Interface 2
(Example RS422)
Initial Protocol Select the protocol with which the communication is to be initialised or
select “Autodetect”.
Autodetect
 Landis+Gyr recommends the use of automatic detection. This makes a
later change of protocol easier.
Transmission Rate Select the transmission rate with which the electrical interface shall
communicate (maximum 38400 bps).
If the optical interface is set to 19200 bps, you can also select a maximum
rate of 19200 bps here.
IEC Inter Character After this time the transmission is automatically ended if no further data are
Timeout transmitted (time-out). This parameter only applies to the IEC protocol.
Default setting is 1.5 s.
The parameters for the electrical interface(s) are always the same,
regardless of which interface is used (RS232, RS485, RS422 or CS).
Size bytes).


 The normal size of the HDLC transmit buffer is 248 bytes. Landis+Gyr
recommends that you reduce this value only in case of communication
problems.
Handshake Select for RS232 interfaces, whether a DTR control line (DTR = Data
(only RS232) Terminal Ready) is present or not. The meter can perform a reset of the
external device with the DTR control line, e.g. at the end of the
communication connection, following expiration of the maximum
communication time or for a disturbed connection. If the external device is
not known, the “disabled” setting should always be selected.
Select for RS232 interfaces, whether a CTS control line (CTS = Clear To
Send) is present or not. With the CTS control line an external device can
signal to the meter that it is ready to receive further data. If the signal from
the external device is not correctly processed, no communication is
possible. If the external device is not known, the “disabled” setting should
always be selected.
Select for RS232 interfaces, whether a DSR control line (DSR = Data Set
Ready) is present or not. With the DSR control line an external device can
signal to the meter that a connection is established. When the DSR signal
returns to “Low”, the meter is aware that the connection has been
interrupted and can re-initialize the device.
Depending on the selected electrical interface 1 and the setting of

parameter “External Device on Electrical Interface 1” the handshake
settings can be preset and/or not available. The following setting is made
for an electrical interface 1 “Powered RS232” if “3rd party modem” is
selected.
IEC Access Protection This parameter is only valid for the IEC-protocol.
The setting “protected with IEC address” has an access protection which
prevents meter data from being read if the meter address is unknown. The
meter only responds to calls that are addressed according to IEC62056-21
(/?n!, n has to correspond to the meter address). If a wrong meter address
is used for an addressed call, the meter does not respond (not even in the
setting “off”).
A meter with the setting “off” responds to all calls, whether they are
addressed or not, according to IEC62056-21 (/?!).

dlms Response Delay Each response is sent after the set delay time (0 to max. 255 ms). Only
specify a delay time if an external communication device, e.g. a converter,
switches between transmission and reception. This parameter is only valid
for the dlms-protocol.
26.6.7 External Modem Configuration
Predefined Modem This parameter is either preset to “user defined” (for electrical interface 1 =
Settings RS232) or not available (for electrical interface 1 = Powered RS232).
If “3rd party modem” has been selected as external device on electrical

interface 1 the modem default settings can be loaded by clicking on the
corresponding button “Load”.
Delay between The initialisation sequences are transmitted with a pause between the
Initialization Strings individual AT commands corresponding to the set time (0 to maximum
25.5 s). Values between 0 and 255 can be entered with each unit
corresponding to 0.1 s. A delay of 0.2 s is recommended for GSM modems.
Maximum Connection It can be ensured with this parameter that the connection time is not too
Time long, i.e. no high fees are incurred if the connection is not properly
terminated some time. The modem connection is automatically interrupted
after expiration of the set time (0 to maximum 255 min.) even with the
communication running. The maximum duration of communication should
therefore be selected so that a load profile readout for a desired time range
can be reliably performed.
Maximum Idle Time The modem connection is automatically interrupted after expiration of the
set time when idle or when using an invalid protocol (0 to maximum 255 s).
This permits a guaranteed disconnection of poor connections. The
maximum duration of idle time should be selected so that a repetition can
be made without making the connection again for a faulty telegram. For
GSM modems a maximum idle time of 120 s is recommended.

Modem Reset With the initialisation function is switched on (setting not 0), the modem
receives a reset command from the clock of the communication unit at the
time defined under “Modem reset start time” and each time following
expiration of the set time (maximum 24 h) and is re-initialised provided no
communication is in progress.
With the “Modem reset start time” parameter set to 03:59 and with a 24 h
setting, only the daily re-initialisation at 03:59 takes place. This takes place
more frequently with other settings, e.g. with the 6 h setting each time at
03:59, 09:59, 15:59 and 21:59. A more frequent reinitialisation (e.g. every 6
h) is recommended for the internal GSM modem, since an interruption in
the connection to the cell often occurs and this interruption cannot be
detected.
Modem reset start From firmware version P07, it is possible to define the initial reset time
time (between 00:00 and 23:59 in 1 minute steps).
Calling Line Enable or disable the calling line identification. With calling line
Identification identification enabled, up to 5 call identifications can be recorded in the
parameter group “Call Identifiers” (see section 26.6.8 “Call Identifiers”).
Network ID A number or a string of characters (e.g. designation of meter location or

telephone number of the GSM modem) can be entered as network ID (max.
16 characters, no spaces).
26.6.8 Call Identifiers

The parameter group “Call Identifiers” is only present with parameter
“Calling Line Identification” enabled.
Call Identification Enter all valid call identifications (maximum 5). Any blank positions in the
call identification are ignored.

26.6.9 PIN Code Handling

The PIN code on the SIM card can be enabled or disabled. With “GSM PIN
code” enabled the SIM card inserted in the communication unit is protected
from unauthorised access. The PIN code and expected answer can be
recorded with correct input after activating the corresponding checkboxes.
GSM PIN Code Enter the PIN code of the SIM card used.
Expected Answer Enter the expected answer of the GSM modem after setting the GSM PIN
code.
26.6.10 PIN Profile

The parameter group “PIN Profile” is only displayed with parameter
“External Device on Electrical Interface 1” set to “GSM”.
Command for PIN Enter the command for the status request of the PIN code.
Status Request
Answer if SIM Card Enter the expected answer of the GSM modem with PIN protection
Pin protected switched on.
Answer if SIM Card Enter the expected answer of the GSM modem if PIN protection switched
not Pin protected off.
26.6.11 Initialisation Strings
AT Command 1...10 The initialisation strings for the external modem can be set. The AT
commands of the initialisation strings must be entered without preceding
AT. This is added automatically where necessary by the meter firmware.
Answer to Enter the expected answer of the external modem to the corresponding AT
AT Command 1...10 command.

26.6.12 Check Modem Strings
Check Modem String The check modem string for the external modem can be set.
Check Modem String Enter the expected answer of the external modem to the check modem
Answer string.
26.6.13 Modem Answers
OK, CONNECT, RING, These parameters indicate the answers of the modem to various events.
NO CARRIER, etc.
26.6.14 Time Window for Modems Connected to RS232 Interface

The following explained parameter group “Time Window” is only displayed
if the electrical interface 1 is set to “RS232 (external modem supported)”.
If the electrical interface 1 is set to “Powered RS232” the explanations in
section 26.6.15 “Time Window for Modems Connected to Powered RS232
Interface” apply.
Time Window Setting Select the setting “user defined” if a time window is to be set for remote
scanning (see also section 26.5.1 “Communication Time Window for
Modems”) or the setting “always activated”, if no time window is required,
i.e. when the modem must accept calls at all times. With the time window
always activated, the parameter group “Time Window” is faded out.
Time Window The time window parameters are only displayed if the parameter “Time
Communication Time Windows Setting” has been set to “user defined”. Enter the start and end
and Recurrence times of the communication time window. The duration of the time window
Pattern
is calculated and displayed by the program.

Select the repetition form of the communication time window under

“Recurrence Pattern”:
 Daily
 Weekly on the weekday selected
 Monthly on the day selected
Number of Rings Enter the number of rings before the modem is to accept the call within the
within Time Window time window (with 0 the modem does not accept the call at all). This
parameter is only displayed if the parameter “Time Windows Setting” has
been set to “user defined”.
Number of Rings Enter the number of rings before the modem is to accept the call outside
outside Time Window the time window (with 0 the modem does not accept the call at all). This
parameter is only displayed if the parameter “Time Windows Setting” has
been set to “user defined”.
Operating Mode The operating mode is preset to “with fixed communication window”. It can
be changed to “with controllable communication window” (allowing
disconnection, for example, by dlms service after the readout occurs or is
not to take place) or “with emergency window”.

26.6.15 Time Window for Modems Connected to Powered RS232 Interface

The following explained parameter group “Time Window” is only displayed,
if the electrical interface 1 is set to “Powered RS232”, and parameter
“External Device on Electrical Interface 1” is set to “3rd party modem”. If the
electrical interface 1 is set to “RS232 (external modem supported)”, the
explanations in section 26.6.14 “Time Window for Modems Connected to
RS232 Interface” apply.
Time Window Enter the start GSM and end GSM times of the communication time
window. The duration of the time window is calculated and displayed by the
program.
GPRS/CSD Switching Switching from GPRS mode to CSD mode is only possible with the
parameterised command, while switching from CSD mode to GPRS mode
is possible either with reset or with a parameterised AT command.
The entry fields for the commands are released by clicking on .

Security System 361/390
27 Security System
27.1 Introduction
The data and parameters of E550 meters are protected against unintended
or improper access by a flexible, multi-stage security system. It is very
similar to the one in computer systems and consists of several access
levels (users) with different access rights.
Definition of the security system is the duty of the utility

If not ordered otherwise all meters are delivered by Landis+Gyr with a
standard security system. It is the duty of the utility to set up the security
 system in a way that all local legal requirements and the needs of the utility
are fulfilled.
Landis+Gyr is not responsible for any abuse due to incorrect settings of
the security system.
Changing the security system

The security system should be defined according to the requirements of
 the utility and the national regulations when ordering the meter. There are
only very limited changing possibilities in the field and special tools are
required.
27.2 Overview
The various security levels determine which functions are accessible with
what access authorisation. As an example, the meter data can be read out
without special security, but a password is required to permit the
performance of formatted commands, or the meter must be opened (after
removing the certification seal) in order to re-parameterise it.
Level 0
Uncoded
Level 1
password P1
Coded
Level 2
password P2
Hand-held
Utility seal
terminal Level 3
Reset button R
or PC
Verification seal
Level 4
switch S2
User specific Level A
Coded password PE
Level E
+ verification seal / S2

362/390 Security System
Access authorisation is defined by the following security levels:
 Level 0
Accessible to all at all times.
 Level 1
Accessible only after entering the uncoded password P1.
 Level 2
Accessible only after entering the coded password P2.
 Level 3
Accessible only after removing the utility seal and entering the
service menu (by pressing the reset key R under the hinged cover).
 Level 4
Accessible only after removing the certification seal and the front
cover and activating the security switch (apparent by the 7 flashing
arrows in the display).
Security levels 0 to 4 comply with IEC 62056-21.
 Levels A and E
These levels are provided for specific user groups and are only
accessible with dlms (IEC 62056-46).
27.3 Security Levels
Level Access Interfaces Application

Verification seal
stat. password
cod. password
Factory seal
0 all Read acces to all data

1 P1 all Write acces to noncritical data such as
time/date setting, reset release etc.
2 P2 all Write access to noncritical parameters
such as calendar clock, time switch etc.
3 X all Write access to critical data and parameters,
if change is allowed in the field
4 X all Write access to critical data and parameters,
if a following verification is necessary
A selectable both Access to data and parameters user defined
selectable
E PE X all Access to data and parameters for specific users,
subsequent verification necessary
Level 0 This security level is accessible at all times without special measures. It
mainly includes the billing data, which anyone can read on the display or
via an interface. It purely concerns a read access.

Level 1 This security level can only be reached by entering the correct password
P1 via one of the interfaces. P1 is uncoded, i.e. it consists of an 8-digit
character sequence, which is sent to the meter by a unit (hand-held
terminal or PC). If the character sequence corresponds to that of the meter,
access is provided by the meter.
Application Typically non-critical write accesses are assigned here, such as setting
time and date, trigger reset, etc.
Characters Permitted 0 to 9 and A to F.
In addition to access to security level 1, password P1 also gives access to

the lower level 0.
Level 2 This security level is only reached by entering the correct password P2 via
one of the interfaces. Password P2 is coded by the manufacturer, i.e. it
consists of a 7-digit character sequence. It represents a higher security
than the uncoded password P1. It can only be used with units (hand-held
terminals) or software from Landis+Gyr AG. An algorithm specific to the
meter derives the final password, which finally gives access, provided the
P2 entered was correct.
Application Typical parameter groups are assigned here, which are not used for billing,
such as calendar clock, time switch, etc.
In addition to access to security level 2, password P2 also gives access to

the lower levels 1 and 0.
Wrong Password If an incorrect password P1 or P2 is entered several times, the meter

considers this an impermissible manipulation attempt and displays an error
message. The meter blocks all further access, which would require one of
the two passwords, until midnight of the same day.
Access with a password is not apparent. Its protection is therefore lower

than that of the factory seal and reset key.
Level 3 This security level is reached via service menu. For this purpose the utility
seal of the hinged cover must be removed and the cover opened to provide
access to the reset key R below. From the operating display the display
check is selected by pressing the display key. If the reset key is then
pressed, service menu is reached.
Since the reset key under the sealed hinged cover is protected against
unauthorised access, such access can be detected if the utility seal has
been removed on the hinged cover.

If the reset key R is pressed on the display check, access is obtained to

security level 3 and at the same time to all lower levels 2 to 0, but not to 4.
Application This security level is used by utilities authorised to re-parameterise meters

in the field. The parameterisation may include functions affecting billing.
Level 4 This security level is only reached if the security switch, located under the
inspection window sealed with a certification seal at top right of the meter,
is in the activated status. For details see section 27.3.1 “Security Switch
Protected by the Certification Seal”.
Application This security level is necessary when an alteration to parameters affecting

the billing is only permitted if the utility subsequently officially tests or
verifies the meter.
Level A Users can parameterise these security levels freely for their own purposes.
It can be selected whether a static, a coded or no password shall be used.
Application Here the user can determine write/read access to specific data and
parameters, which differ from write/read access for levels 0 to 4.
Characters Permitted For one password: 0 to 9 and A to F.
Level E This security level is reached like level 4 by removing the calibration seal
and activating the security switch. In addition, the coded password PE must
also be entered.
Application This level is provided above all for distributors and utilities, which prepare
or adapt meters for other utilities.
27.3.1 Security Switch Protected by the Certification Seal

Under the main face plate, protected by the certification seal, there is a
push button security switch. To operate it, remove the certification seal at
the top-right of the meter and the window with the face plate. An opening in
the upper part of the case provides access to the push button switch.
The upper part of the case remains closed and is locked by the
manufacturer or certification seal at top-left of the meter. This prevents
undesired contact with active components on the printed circuit board of the
meter.

The picture above shows the location and depicts the push button security
switch that is visible through the opening only for illustration purposes.
If this button is depressed for between 2 and 3 seconds with power applied,
flashing arrows appear in the display. The meter remains in this state until
the button is pressed for another 2 to 3 seconds. The push button security
switch provides access to security level 4 and at the same time to all lower
levels 3 to 0.
Operate the push button security switch only using an insulated tool
The push button security switch is located on the printed circuit board
 about 5 cm behind the opening in the top part of the casing. Inappropriate
manipulations, particularly with metal objects, can lead to a dangerous
contact with live parts. Use a thin insulated tool.
27.4 Security System Parameters

When ordering the meter, the whole security system must be defined
according to the requirements of the utility and the national regulations.
Modifications are no longer possible in the field.
27.4.1 Security Attributes

Most of the security attributes have been fixed. Nevertheless, some of them
can be changed if required. In the table below you find a detailed
description of all access levels with the associated settings.
The following syntax is used:
Value can be changed at ordering time

Value is fixed

Level 0 Description Value Remark

Public Access (Level 0) read access
only
Password not used
Password Type no password no password
Service Menu (Utility Seal) not required
Switch Under Certification Seal not required
Optical Interface access allowed
Electrical interface access allowed
Level 1
Data Collection (Level 1)
Password 00000000 Default
password
Password Type static password
Electrical interface access allowed Default value
Level 2
Utility Field Service (Level 2)
Password 1234567 Default
password
Password Type coded password
Electrical interface access allowed Default value
Level 3
Utility Service (Level 3)
Password not used
Service Menu (Utility Seal) required

Level 4
Extended Utility Service (Level 4)
Password not used
Switch Under Certification Seal required
Level A
User specific (Level A)
Password selectable
Password Type selectable
Service Menu (Utility Seal) selectable
Switch Under Certification Seal selectable
Optical Interface access
selectable
Electrical interface access
selectable
Level E
Remote Service (Level E)
Password EF12345 Default
password
Password Type coded password
Switch Under Certification Seal required
Handling of passwords
All meters are delivered with standard passwords as listed above. The
 utility is responsible for the change of these passwords. If you order the
meters with customer specific passwords Landis+Gyr is not able to
guarantee the secrecy of such passwords throughout the whole
manufacturing process.

27.4.2 Allocation of Access Rights to Data and Parameter Groups
Data and parameter groups
Parameter group N
Parameter group 2
Parameter group 3
Parameter group 1
Data group N
Data group 1
Data group 2
Data group 3
parameterisable link
up to
up to
Security levels
Level 0
Level 1 Access according
Level 2 to IEC 62056-21
and DLMS
Level 3
Level 4
Level A Access according

Level E to DLMS
Various data and parameter groups are assigned to the individual security
levels. For levels 0 to 4 all higher levels also permit access to the lower
levels according to IEC 62056-21. E.g. levels 2, 1 and 0 are accessible
from level 3, but not level 4.
Assignment is basically free for level A. For level E, however, access is

determined to all data and parameters. The utility can use these levels or
not as required.
In order to simplify the handling of the access rights, all registers and
parameters have been grouped. Read and write access for every group
can be allocated to the individual access levels by the utility.
The allocation is defined by the application in the utility and by the national
approval regulations.
In the tables below, a list of all data and parameter groups is given.

27.4.3 Data Groups (Registers and Profiles)
No. Name Content

00 Error messages Error message of the meter
01 Identification number 1 Identification numbers 1.1 to 1.4
02 Identification number 2 Identification numbers 2.1 to 2.2
03 Device addresses (IEC and IEC and HDLC device address
HDLC) used to address the device in IEC
and dlms communication protocols
04 Parameterisation ID, Parameterisation ID, time of last
timestamp and counter parameterisation and number of
parameterisations
05 Reset counter and Content of the reset counter and
timestamp the timestamps of all resets
06 Energy total registers Content of all energy total registers
07 Energy registers Content of all energy registers
without total registers
08 Time and date Date, time and status of the clock
10 Battery (time, voltage and Battery related items as battery
symbol) operating time register, battery
voltage and enabling/disabling of
the battery low symbol
11 Connection ID Connection ID to identify the type
of connection
13 Power factor Content of all power factor
registers, e.g. minimum power
factor
14 Event log Content of the standard event log
profile
15 Stored values Content of the stored value profile
48 Operating time registers Content of operating time registers
and total operating time
70 Maximum demand Content of all maximum demand
registers registers with value, date and time
71 Cumulative maximum Content of all cumulated maximum
registers demand registers
73 Load profile 1 Content of load profile 1
74 Load profile 2 Contents of load profile 2
86 Current hour registers Content of all current hour registers
87 Current hour register Format of the current hour registers
format
88 Fraud detection Content of the memory concerning
functions of fraud detection

No. Name Content

89 Power quality monitoring Content of the memory concerning
power quality monitoring
90 Demand monitoring log Content of the memory concerning
demand monitoring
16 All other registers All registers not listed in the table
elsewhere, e.g. phase fail counters
Read Access to Data Usually all users have access to all billing-relevant data. In liberalised
markets different users may have different access rights.
Write Access to Data Write access to data (alteration or deletion) requires at least security level
1.
Data relevant to billing are basically
 Assigned to level 3, if modification is permitted in the field, or

 To level 4, if subsequent verification is necessary.
27.4.4 Parameter Groups
No. Name Content

W09 Calendar clock Parameters of calendar clock with
(synchronisation, daylight clock base, synchronisation
saving) source and interval, daylight
saving time
W19 External pulse input External voltage used for rate
configuration control
W20 Pulse output configuration Parameters of output contacts,
pulse output with energy and
valency, signal output with control
signal, energy direction
W21 Primary values (transformer All values related to primary data
ratio) adaptation: Primary voltage and
current, resolution of energy and
demand registers, pulse length
and pulse constant of transmitting
contacts
W22 Power factor configuration Threshold and control signal for
power factor registration and
power factor monitoring
W23 Event log configuration Trigger sources and registers
captured in event log
W24 Reset tables Date and time of resets

No. Name Content

W25 Energy register format Assignment of measured quantity,
type of register and register
resolution of all energy and
energy total registers, display
code
W26 Demand register format Assignment of measured quantity,
and register resolution of all kind
of demand registers, rate control,
display code
W27 Display and IEC readout list Content of the display list, the
service list, the IEC readout and
the set mode list. The display
code of every entry with exception
of energy and demand registers
can be modified.
W28 Control table Assignment of the signal sources
in the control table to the control
signals for rated registers, output
contacts, arrows, etc.
W72 Stored value configuration Registers captured in stored value
profile
W74 Power quality monitoring Thresholds and activation delay of
under and overvoltage monitors,
phase failure, total voltage failure,
voltage quality
W75 Fraud monitoring Type of detection, thresholds and
activation delay of the different
monitors
W76 Overcurrent monitor Thresholds and activation delay of
thresholds overcurrent monitors
W77 Integration/Capture Period Type and duration of the
integration and the capture period
W78 Load profile configuration Registers captured in load profile
W79 TOU and special days and Passive TOU and special day
communication inputs table, emergency settings
Active TOU table is always read
only
W80 Communication parameters IEC and dlms communication
settings of the optical interface
with exception of the device
address
W81 Demand monitor thresholds Threshold of demand monitors,
type of energy, control signal
W82 Electrical interface/SMS IEC and dlms communication
system settings of the electrical interface
(1) with exception of the device
address. All parameters (e.g.
phone number) necessary to send
an SMS.

No. Name Content

W92 Electrical interface 2 IEC and dlms communication
settings of the electrical interface
2 with exception of the device
address.
W29 All other parameters All parameters not listed in the
table elsewhere
For parameters read access is always possible, only the write access can
be selected.
Write access to parameters (alteration or deletion) requires at least security

level 1.
Parameters relevant to billing are basically
 Assigned to level 3, if modification is permitted in the field, or

 To level 4, if subsequent verification is necessary.
27.4.5 Access to Commands

Please note that the security concept is based on protection of data and not
on protection of commands, i.e. the data itself is protected not the
command.
No. Name Content

W30 Register reset Reset command to all energy and
demand registers. Deletion of the
register is only possible at the
security level set.
W31 Billing period reset Defines the level necessary to
permit a reset via the interface. All
other sources (e.g. control inputs,
key, etc.) are not affected.
W50 Neutralise reset control After verification the status of the
inputs KA/KB control input can be reset. No un-
wanted reset is executed at
installation time.
W91 Communication inputs The communication inputs can be
set via .MAP110 (see section
8.4.1 “Setting via .MAP110”.

27.4.6 Modification of Passwords

Passwords cannot be read from the meter.
No. Name Content

W33 Password 1 (=IEC P1) Static password of level 1. This is
used in dlms as well as in IEC
communication protocol.
W34 Password 2 (=IEC P2) Coded password of level 2. This is
used in dlms as well as in IEC
communication protocol.
W42 Password A Static or coded password of level
A.
W46 Password E Coded password of level E.
W12 IEC W5 password Password used in IEC W5
commands.
Usually every level is allowed to change its own password. Make sure that
at least one administrator access is available to reset the passwords.
27.5 Parameterisation of Security System

When ordering the meter, the whole security system must be defined
according to the requirements of the utility and the national regulations.
There are only limited changing possibilities in the field and special tools
are required.
All changes that have any influence on the billing require a new verification
of the meter.

374/390 OBIS Identification Codes
28 OBIS Identification Codes

E550 meters possess more comprehensive measuring functions and
evaluation possibilities than previous meters. They permit communication
both according to IEC 62056-21 as well as dlms (IEC 62056-46). Both
require a correspondingly more comprehensive and above all clear
designation of the various values.
dlms is a universal form of communication valid for all manufacturers and

requires clear designation of the values recorded. In other words, a utility
finds the same value under the same address in every meter. Together with
the introduction of dlms, this has also led to a designation system according
to OBIS.
In principle a utility could also use an existing designation system for E550
meters. It is recommended, however, also to use the new designation
system with the new meter series.
Further details can be found in the document “COSEM – Identification

System and Interface Objects” of the dlms user association.
28.1 Identification Code Structure
A B C D E F Value group
M- KK : GG . AA . R* VV according VDEW
A M Medium 1 ... 9 not necessary to use when 1 medium only

- Separating sign
B KK Channel 1 ... 64 not necessary to use when 1 channel only
: Separating sign
C GG Measured quantity 1 ... 99 must always be used
. Separating sign
D AA Measuring type 1 ... 99 must always be used
. Separating sign
E R Rate 1 ... 9
* Separating sign (also &)
F VV Stored value 01 ... 99
The OBIS identification comprises the following elements depending on

necessity:
Medium E.g. electricity, gas, water, etc. The medium should only be entered if the
unit or meter records several media simultaneously.
The following line as separation from the further digits indicates that it
concerns a medium.

OBIS Identification Codes 375/390
Channel E.g. for several meter functions. Several meters can be connected,
particularly for subsidiary positions. The data of the individual meters are
clearly assigned by the relevant figure. Units with only one meter function,
usually all E550 meters, do not use a channel number.
The following colon as separation from the other digits indicates that it
concerns one channel.
Measured Quantity The measured quantity must always be present. It describes, e.g. for
electrical quantities the type of demand, single or multi-phase, voltage,
current, frequency, etc.
The following dot as separation from the type of measurement likewise

always present indicates that it concerns a measured quantity.
Measuring Type This shows which value of the relevant measured quantity is represented,
e.g. Prunning, Pmax, energy status, instantaneous value, etc. This too must
always be present.
If further digits follow, particularly rates, the following dot serves as

separation.
Rate This digit indicates the relevant rate for the measured quantity and type of
measurement, provided rates are present. The digit “0” usually appears for
energy total values and for values without rate.
Stored Value If stored values are to be shown, the corresponding number is followed by
the rate with a separation between. This separation is
 A dot for stored values in the display

 An asterisk (*) for stored values in the readout, if they have been
produced by an automatic reset or
 An ampersand (&) for stored values in the readout, if they have
been produced by a manual reset.
The stored value number usually consists of two digits.

28.2 Individual Elements

28.2.1 Medium
The following items determined so far are used for medium:
0 Abstract objects
1 Objects concerning electricity
4 Objects concerning heating cost account
5 Objects concerning cooling systems
6 Objects concerning heating systems
7 Objects concerning gas
8 Objects concerning cold water
9 Objects concerning hot water
All electrical quantities in E550 meters therefore appear under medium 1.
28.2.2 Channel
A total of up to 255 channels could be defined. Of these, however, only
numbers 1 to 64 are released for general applications and numbers 128 to
254 for channels specific to the manufacturer.
Numbers over 99 appear in hexadecimal form 0 to 9 and A to F for the

values 10 to 15.
The data for the E550 meters themselves is always assigned to channel 1.
28.2.3 Measured Quantity

The following table shows the possible measured quantities for the medium
electricity (1), which has by far the greatest diversity of all the media. The
following should be noted:
General data 0
Active power + (Import) Li 1 L1 21 L2 41 L3 61
- (Export) 2 22 42 62
Reactive power + 3 23 43 63
- 4 24 44 64
QI (Quadrant I) 5 25 45 65
QII 6 26 46 66
QIII 7 27 47 67
QIV 8 28 48 68
Apparent power + (Import) 9 29 49 69
- (Export) 10 30 50 70
Current 11 31 51 71
Voltage 12 32 52 72
Power factor 13 33 53 73
Frequency 14
Service data C
Error message F
Load profile P

0 General data
These refer to the meter or unit, but not to the medium or channel
recorded by it.
C Service data
These include data specific to the manufacturer, such as number of
voltage failures, battery hours, etc.
P Profile data
These include the actual load profiles (P.01 and P.02) and the event
log (P.98). In the E550, however, the stored values are also
combined in a profile, but are not shown under their own number.
11 Current in each phase (mean value) or single phase meter
12 Voltage in each phase (mean value) or single phase meter
13 Mean value of the 3 phases or single phase meter
Further Measured
Quantities
Active energy Li L1 L2 L3

Import + export 15 35 55 75
QI + QII + QIII + QIV
Import – export 16 36 56 76
QI + QII – QIII – QIV
in quadrant QI 17 37 57 77
in quadrant QII 18 38 58 78
in quadrant QIII 19 39 59 79
in quadrant QIV 20 40 60 80
Phase angle 81
Neutral current 91
Manufacturer-Specific Landis+Gyr:
Definitions
130 = Sum of all phases: reactive energy quadrant I+IV+II+III

131 = Sum of all phases: reactive energy quadrant I+II-III-IV
132 = Sum of all phases: reactive energy quadrant I+IV
133 = Sum of all phases: reactive energy quadrant II+III
150 = Phase 1: reactive energy quadrant I+IV+II+III
151 = Phase 1: reactive energy quadrant I+II-III-IV
152 = Phase 1: reactive energy quadrant I+IV
153 = Phase 1: reactive energy quadrant II+III


28.2.4 Type of Measurement

The types of measurement shown here also refer to the medium electricity
and together with the measured quantity always form one unit. They
describe exactly what is shown for the measured quantity, for example the
maximum, energy status, etc.
Capture Period Normally this concerns here the integration period of the demand
maximum. Units with several integration periods must denote this by the
corresponding figures 11 to 16, 21 to 26, etc.
Time Integral 1 Time integral 1 forms the energy status similar to mechanical counters and
the majority of former electronic meters.
Capture period 1 2 3
Cumulative minimum 1 11 21
Cumulative maximum 2 12 22
Minimum 3 13 23
Current mean value 4 14 24
Last mean value 5 15 25
Maximum 6 16 26
7
Time integral 1 (energy status) 8
Time integral 2 (energy import) 9
Time integral 3 (excess consumption) 10
Test mean value 55

Test time integral 4 58
Error message F
Load profile 01
Time Integral 2 For energy consumption – also termed advance – the meter resets the
current energy registers to zero after saving the contents as stored value.
In this way they directly record the consumption during the relevant
resetting or billing period. The energy consumption requires that the meter
is provided with stored values.

Time Integral 3 Time integral 3 corresponds to the excess consumption previously used.
For this purpose the meter uses one or more power thresholds. If the
power exceeds one of these thresholds, the meter switches to the
corresponding rate. This then records the energy above the threshold in a
separate register.
Further Types of Further types of measurement particularly concern under and overvoltages
Measurement and overcurrents:
Lower threshold 31
Number of shortfalls 32
Cumulated duration of shortfalls 33
Magnitude of shortfalls 34
Upper threshold 35
Number of times exceeded 36
Cumulated duration of times exceeded 37
Magnitude of excesses 38
Failure threshold value 39
Number of failures 40
Cumulated duration of failures 41
Magnitude of failures 42

28.2.5 General Data

The following data can be found under “measured quantity” 0 – General
data:
0.0 Complete identification number

0.0.0 Identification number 1
to
0.0.9 Identification number 10

0.1.0 Reset counter
0.1.1 Number of stored values or reset periods available
0.1.2.V1 Date of last reset
0.1.2.V2 Date of last but one reset
0.1.2.V3 Etc.
0.2.0 Program version number configuration
0.2.8 Firmware checksum
0.2.1 Parameter-set number
0.2.2 Time switch program number
0.2.3 Ripple control program number
0.2.4 Switching type number

0.3.0 Meter constant active energy (for test diode)
0.3.1 Meter constant reactive energy (for test diode)
0.3.2 Meter constant apparent energy (for test diode)
0.3.3 Pulse constant active energy for pulse output
0.3.4 Pulse constant reactive energy for pulse output
0.3.5 Pulse constant apparent energy for pulse output

0.4.0 Reading factor demand
0.4.1 Reading factor energy
0.4.2 Transformer ratio current (numerator, if also denominator)
0.4.3 Transformer ratio voltage (numerator, if also denominator)
0.4.4 Total transformer ratio (numerator, if also denominator)
0.4.5 Transformer ratio current (denominator)
0.4.6 Transformer ratio voltage (denominator)

0.4.7 Total transformer ratio (denominator)

0.6.0 Nominal voltage
0.6.1 Base current for direct connection or
Nominal current for transformer connection
0.6.2 Mains frequency
0.6.3 Maximum current
0.6.4 Reference voltage for measurement of power quality

0.7.0 Pulse constant active energy for pulse input
0.7.1 Pulse constant reactive energy for pulse input
0.7.2 Pulse constant apparent energy for pulse input

0.8.0 Integration period 1
0.8.1 Integration period 2
0.8.2 Mean value period for instantaneous value
0.8.3 Mean value period for test value
0.8.4 Capture period 1 for load profile
0.8.5 Capture period 2 for load profile
0.8.6 Billing period (reset period)

0.9.0 Day counter (time since last reset)
0.9.1 Current time
0.9.2 Current date
0.9.5 Weekday
0.9.6 Time-of-day of last reset
0.9.7 Date of last reset
0.9.8 Output pulse length
0.9.9 Synchronising window for clock
0.9.10 Type of synchronising

28.2.6 Service Data

The following data can be found under “measured quantity” C – Service
data:
C.1 Complete unit identification (serial number)
C.1.0 Device identification 1
to
C.1.9 Device identification 10

C.2.0 Number of parameterisations
C.2.1 Date of last (re-)parameterisation
C.2.2 Date of last (re-)parameterisation of time switch
C.2.3 Date of last (re-)parameterisation of ripple control receiver
C.2.4 Status of security switch
C.2.5 Date of last verification
C.2.6 Date of next (re-)parameterisation
C.2.10 Number of protected parameterisations
C.2.11 Date of last protected (re-)parameterisation

C.3.3 Status of control signals at inputs
C.3.4 Status of control signals at outputs

C.4.0 Status of internal control signals
C.5.0 Internal operating statuses
C.6.0 Battery hours counter
C.6.1 Battery change indicator
C.6.2 Date of last battery change
C.6.3 Battery voltage

C.7.0 Number of total voltage failures
C.7.1 Number of voltage failures phase L1

C.8.0 Total operating time of meter
C.8.1 Operating time rate 1

Etc. to

C.9.0 Ambient temperature (not used by E550 meters)
C.50. Other data specific to manufacturer
28.2.7 Example Combimeter

A combimeter ZMG410CR with 1 maximum, 2 energy rates and one stored
value each produces the following list with OBIS identifications:
Identification Value Significance

F.F (00000000) Error message
0.0.0 (450076) Identification number 1
0.1.0 (27) Reset counter
0.1.1 (1) Number of stored values
0.1.2*05 (05-06-01) (00:00) Date of reset
1.2.1 (254791 kW) Cumulated maximum
1.4.0 (034,6 kW) Prunning
1.6.1 (089.7 kW) (05-06-04) (11:30) Pmax with date/time
1.6.1*05 (092.5 kW) (05-05-13) (10:45) Pmax stored value may
1.8.1 (1670067 kWh) Status active energy rate 1
1.8.1*05 (1658540 kWh) Stored value may
1.8.2 (0827744 kWh) Status active energy rate 2
1.8.2*05 (0780341 kWh) Stored value may
5.8.1 (0466204 kvarh) Status reactive energy ind. rate 1
5.8.1*05 (0461994 kvarh) Stored value may
5.8.2 (0338223 kvarh) Status reactive energy ind. rate 2
5.8.2*05 (0336755 kvarh) Stored value may
1.8.0 (2497811 kWh) Energy total active
5.8.0 (0804427 kvarh) Energy total reactive
0.9.1 (08:43:22) Time-of-day and
0.9.2 (05-06-05) Date of readout

28.3 dlms Address

For data recording according to dlms the meters use an object address,
which largely corresponds to the OBIS identification. It comprises 12 digits
with the following structure:
01 Medium Here electricity

01 01 Channel Here 1, basic meter
0101 01 Measured quantity Here active power import L
010101 08 Type of measurement Here energy status
01010108 01 Rate Here rate 1
0101010801 FF Stored values
In all meters with dlms communication, the utility can read out the energy
status from the active energy import for all three phases independent of the
manufacturer under address 0101010801FF.

Index 385/390
29 Index
.MAP110 ..................................................... 131 Connection type ............................................ 16

Accuracy of the meter ................................... 16 Control input diagram .................................... 79
Activating the passive TOU settings ........... 113 Control table ................................................ 115
Active energy ................................................ 51 Control sources ...................................... 126
Addressing the meters ................................ 342 Logic operations ..................................... 125
Alerts ................................................... 282, 289 Output signal names .............................. 128
Parameterisation .................................... 297 Parameterisation .................................... 125
Ampere-hour registers .................................. 69 example ............................................. 129
Ampère-hours register .................................. 34 Signal assignment .................................. 118
Annual table ................................................ 105 Copper losses ............................................... 64
Apparent energy ........................................... 56 Critical errors ............................................... 326
Arrows in Display ........................................ 201 CS interface ................................................ 341
Parameterisation .................................... 203 Current (nominal, basic, maximum value)..... 18
AT commands for GSM modem control ...... 295 Current ratio primary/secondary.................... 41
Automatic data readout ............................... 307 Current sensor .............................................. 46
Average power factor .......................... 177, 179 Current terminals .......................................... 77
Average sliding value .................................. 165 Data write protection ................................... 361
Backlight timer ............................................ 323 Day change in load profile .......................... 236
Battery symbol ............................................ 323 Day table ..................................................... 105
Block schematic diagram .............................. 43 Definition of ............................................ 111
Calculated vectorial ....................................... 56 Daylight saving time ...................................... 98
Calendar clock .............................................. 86 Demand inhibition ....................................... 141
Accuracy................................................... 87 External control ...................................... 142
Backup time.............................................. 89 Internal control ........................................ 143
Battery status ........................................... 96 Demand registers .................................. 35, 162
Clock status .............................................. 95 Definition of ............................................ 172
Handling the deviations ............................ 92 Format .................................................... 170
Setting the time ........................................ 92 Parameterisation .................................... 172
Summer/winter ......................................... 88 Resolution ........................................ 42, 171
Synchronisation ........................................ 90 Size ........................................................ 170
Time functions .......................................... 86 Demand registration .................................... 161
Time stamp............................................... 95 Intervals .................................................. 166
Time-setting.............................................. 90 Maximum demand .................................. 168
Calling line identification ............................. 348 Sliding average value ............................. 165
Capture period ............................................ 216 Display ........................................................ 314
Changing of TOU settings ........................... 114 Arrows ............................................ 201, 321
Clock structure .............................................. 86 Basic layout ............................................ 314
Communication ........................................... 336 Character set .......................................... 320
Addressing the meters ........................... 342 Display menu .......................................... 302
CS interface............................................ 341 Index system .......................................... 316
Electrical interface .......................... 337, 338 Operating display ................................... 300
Parameterisation .................................... 348 Parameterisation ............................ 312, 322
Powered RS232 interface ...................... 339 Register selection for display lists .......... 312
RS232 interface...................................... 339 Service menu ......................................... 310
RS422 interface...................................... 341 Symbols .................................................. 315
RS485 interface...................................... 340 Display examples
Communication inputs ................................ 131 Ampère-hours register .............................. 70
Communication time window ...................... 347 Demand registers ................................... 171
Configuration................................................. 14 Energy registers ..................................... 157
Extension board ....................................... 23 Event log ................................................ 286
Measuring unit .......................................... 15 Operating time register ........................... 195
Tariff functions .......................................... 21 Power factor register .............................. 181
Configuration ID ............................................ 25 Display lists ................................................. 299
Connection diagrams .................................... 77 Parameterisation .................................... 312

386/390 Index
Display menu ...................................... 302, 318 Functional range ........................................... 17

Display protocols ........................................ 299 South Korea ............................................. 17
Electrical interface .............................. 337, 338 Hand held terminal ..................................... 307
Diagram ................................................... 79 Harmonics .................................................... 63
Electrical interface 1 ................................. 19 Identification numbers................................. 333
Electrical interface 2 ................................. 24 Individual primary data ................................. 29
Selection of .............................................. 19 Input mB ..................................................... 142
Energy advance .......................................... 155 Inputs ............................................................ 43
Energy consumption ................................... 154 Installation check .......................................... 62
Energy direction output Instantaneous power factor ........................ 180
Definition of .............................................. 84 Instantaneous values of voltage/current ....... 58
Energy direction power factor ....................... 65 Integration period ........................................ 133
Energy pulse count registers Control ................................................... 134
South Korea ........................................... 160 Definition of ............................................ 146
Energy recording .......................................... 51 External control ...................................... 135
as advance............................................. 155 Internal control ....................................... 134
as consumption ...................................... 154 New start ................................................ 137
Energy registers ........................................... 30 Parameterisation .................................... 146
Definition of ............................................ 158 Interface
Display ................................................... 157 Selection of .............................................. 19
Parameterisation .................................... 158 Internal control
Resolution ........................................ 42, 156 Demand inhibition .................................. 143
Size ........................................................ 156 Integration period ................................... 134
Energy registration ..................................... 150 Iron losses .................................................... 64
Error groups ................................................ 327 Jalaali calendar ............................................. 87
Checksum errors .................................... 329 Laptop ......................................................... 307
Other errors............................................ 331 Line losses .................................................... 64
Time-base errors.................................... 327 Load profile
Write/read access errors ........................ 328 Capture period ....................................... 216
Error handling ............................................. 325 Communication ...................................... 239
Structure of error code ........................... 325 Deleting .................................................. 240
Error messages .................................. 282, 325 Display ................................................... 237
Parameterisation .................................... 332 Measured values .................................... 218
Reset...................................................... 332 Memory depth ........................................ 219
Errors Parameterisation .................................... 241
Critical errors.......................................... 326 Registers captured ................................. 242
Fatal errors............................................. 326 Status code ............................................ 221
Non-critical errors ................................... 326 Status code entries ................................ 224
Event and error register .............................. 282 Structure of entries ................................. 217
Event log ..................................................... 280 Time stamp ............................................ 218
Display ................................................... 286 Load profiles ............................................... 216
Memory requirement .............................. 285 Logic operations of control table ................. 125
Parameterisation .................................... 287 Losses .......................................................... 64
Registers captured ................................. 287 Mains ............................................................ 28
Sorting in display and IEC readout ........ 287 Mains frequency ........................................... 59
Structure of entries................................. 281 Maximum coincidental demand
Trigger sources ...................................... 287 Definition of ............................................ 174
Triggers .................................................. 282 Maximum demand ...................................... 168
Example of a rate control .................... 107, 122 Maximum demand registers
External control Definition of ............................................ 172
Demand inhibition .................................. 142 Measured quantities ............................... 43, 48
Integration period ................................... 135 Parameterisation ...................................... 65
External Modem ......................................... 347 Measurement base ........................................ 15
External modem configuration .................... 355 Measuring principle ...................................... 46
Fatal errors ................................................. 326 Measuring system ........................................ 43
Firmware version .......................................... 16 Parameterisation ...................................... 39
Fraud detection ..................................... 46, 251 Meter constant R2 ........................................ 20
Frequency ............................................... 19, 59 Minimum power factor ................................ 178

Index 387/390
Monitoring functions .................................... 245 Parameterisation .................................... 181

10 highest maximum demands .............. 265 Power factor registration ............................. 176
Current monitor ...................................... 264 Power supply ................................................ 46
Current with undervoltage ...................... 255 Powered RS232 interface ........................... 339
Delay time .............................................. 248 Primary data .................................................. 28
Demand monitor ..................................... 267 Primary value meters .................................... 40
Demand monitoring ................................ 276 Primary values .............................................. 40
Fraud detection ...................................... 251 Pulse constant .............................................. 36
Front cover ............................................. 253 Calculation of ............................................ 37
Monitoring sequence .............................. 247 Pulse output
Negative active energy ........................... 254 Definition of .............................................. 82
Open/short-circuited current transformer 256 Pulse length .............................................. 81
Overcurrent in neutral conductor ............ 257 Pulse output contacts
Parameterisation .................................... 271 Pulse constant .......................................... 82
Phase failure .......................................... 260 Purpose of this manual ................................. 12
Phase sequence reversed...................... 254 Rate control ................................... 45, 115, 156
Power factor monitor .............................. 269 Rate registers .............................................. 152
Power quality .......................... 258, 264, 273 Definition of ............................................ 158
Principle.................................................. 246 Reactive energy ............................................ 54
Strong magnetic fields ............................ 251 Readout device ........................................... 307
Terminal cover........................................ 253 Recording of alerts ...................................... 289
Thresholds.............................................. 250 Recording types .......................................... 153
Total voltage failure ................................ 261 Reference documents ................................... 12
Undercurrent .......................................... 257 Reference for Phase Current Angle ............ 199
Voltage monitor ...................................... 258 Register resolution ........................................ 29
Voltage quality ........................................ 263 Registration of demand ............................... 161
Multi-drop connection.................................. 341 Registration of energy ................................. 150
Network type ................................................. 16 Registration of power factor ........................ 176
New start of integration period .................... 137 Reset ........................................................... 204
NLA ............................................................... 64 Display .................................................... 207
No load active ............................................... 64 Parameterisation .................................... 208
Nominal voltage ............................................ 19 Procedure ............................................... 206
Non-critical errors ........................................ 326 Types ...................................................... 205
OBIS identification codes ............................ 374 Reset lock ................................................... 204
OLA ............................................................... 64 Rotating field direction .................................. 65
On load active ............................................... 64 RS232 interface .......................................... 339
Opening list ................................................. 304 RS422 interface .......................................... 341
Operating display ........................................ 300 RS485 interface .......................................... 340
Auto-scrolling timer................................. 323 Running average value ............................... 164
Operating time registers ...................... 184, 195 Season table
Parameterisation .................................... 196 Definition of ............................................ 111
Optical test output ......................................... 38 Secondary data ............................................. 28
Pulse length.............................................. 19 Secondary data meters ................................. 39
Output contact Security system ........................................... 361
Diagram .................................................... 79 Access to commands ............................. 372
Pulse length.............................................. 81 Data groups ............................................ 369
Output pulse constant ................................... 82 Modification of passwords ...................... 373
Outputs ......................................................... 45 Parameter groups ................................... 370
Overflow time ................................................ 33 Parameterisation .................................... 373
Parameter write protection .......................... 361 Parameters ............................................. 365
Password input monitoring .......................... 344 Security attributes ................................... 365
Period Security levels ........................................ 362
Capture period........................................ 216 Security switch ....................................... 364
Phase angle measurement Self-test ....................................................... 325
Reference ............................................... 199 Service menu ...................................... 310, 319
Phase angles ................................................ 59 Signal assignment ....................................... 118
Phase sequence direction ............................. 62 Signal output synchronisation ..................... 101
Power factor registers Signal processing .......................................... 44

388/390 Index
Signed ........................................................ 157 TDL ............................................................... 63

Sliding average value ................................. 165 Terminal status information ........................ 184
Sliding maximum ........................................ 163 Terminals ...................................................... 71
SMS message ............................................ 293 Designations ............................................ 76
Special day table ........................................ 105 Layout ...................................................... 72
Definition of ............................................ 112 Parameterisation ...................................... 81
Starting current ............................................. 18 Test SMS message .................................... 296
Static output Threshold
Definition of .............................................. 83 Monitoring functions ............................... 250
Status code in load profile Time Base .................................................... 97
Midnight time stamp ............................... 236 Time of Use ................................................ 104
Status registers ........................................... 184 Annual table ........................................... 105
Parameterisation .................................... 196 Day table ................................................ 105
Terminal status information .................... 184 Emergency settings ............................... 113
Status report of SMS message ................... 296 Parameterisation .................................... 110
Stored values .............................................. 210 Special day table .................................... 105
Deleting .................................................. 213 Time switch signals with fault ................. 106
Memory requirement .............................. 211 Time stamp in load profile........................... 218
Numbering ............................................. 212 Time switch ................................................. 104
Parameterisation .................................... 213 Time window ....................................... 358, 360
Registers captured ................................. 214 Total distortion level ...................................... 63
Sequence ............................................... 213 Total registers ............................................. 152
Structure of entries................................. 211 Transformer losses ....................................... 64
Switching tables .......................................... 104 Transformer ratio influence ........................... 28
Synchronisation Transmission of valency pulses .................... 36
Parameterisation .................................... 102 Triggers of events ....................................... 282
via control input ........................................ 90 Types of display .......................................... 299
via remote readout ................................... 92 Types of recording ...................................... 153
Synchronisation output ......................... 94, 101 Unsigned .................................................... 157
System error in microprocessor .................. 331 Valency pulses ............................................. 36
Tariff control Voltage range ............................................... 17
Control signals ......................................... 21 Voltage sensor .............................................. 46
Tariffication ................................................... 44 Voltage terminals .......................................... 77

Index 389/390

Contact:
Landis+Gyr AG
Theilerstrasse 1
CH-6301 Zug
Switzerland
Phone: +41 41 935 6000
www.landisgyr.com

ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR E550 Series 2

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR E550 Series 2

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

ZMG310AR/CR, ZxG400AR/CR

Electricity Meters IEC/MID

Electricity Meters IEC/MID

Nothing in this document shall be construed as a representation or guarantee in respect of the

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

Nothing in this document shall be construed as a representation or guarantee in respect of the

Revision History ..................................................................................................................................... 2

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

4 Ampere-Hour Registers ............................................................................................................. 69

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

7.3.4 Activating the Passive TOU Settings .............................................................................. 113

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

10.2.7 Primary and Secondary Data ........................................................................................ 156

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

13.4 Internal Operating Status Register C.5.0 ............................................................................. 190

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

18.3.3 Power Down ................................................................................................................. 227

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

19.9.1 Fraud Detection............................................................................................................. 271

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

23 Display ................................................................................................................................... 314

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

26.6.2 Password Input Monitoring ............................................................................................ 349

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

About this Document

Purpose This document describes the detailed functionality of the Landis+Gyr

The document serves as both a functional description and as on-line help

 The functional description of the meter is a paper-based

 Specification of a metering system

 D000029781 “User Manual E550 Series 2 ZMG310AR/CR”

Typographical The following typographical conventions are used in this document:

 Symbol for additional information, hints and other important

The following conventions are employed in this document for representing

 The lower case letter “x” can be used as a wildcard character to

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

Hardware Hardware configuration parameters specify the physical meter hardware,

The hardware/software configuration cannot be altered in the field by

The configuration ID that reproduces the configuration settings is displayed

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

1.2 Configuration of Measuring Unit

Measurement Base Measurement base is determined by the basic type of measurement.

Active energy consumption ZMG310AR and ZxG400AR

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

Network Type The type of network the meter is connected to.

Four-wire network M Three-phase four-wire network

Transformer connection ZxG400xR

Active energy meter Class 1.0 – ZMG310AR, ZxG410AR

Active energy meter Class B – ZMG310AR, ZxG410AR

© Landis+Gyr D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description

Extended functional range increases the number of energy registers to up

SME is a subset of Standard (with fixed settings, e.g. combimeter,

TNB is a modification of Standard (with maximum load recording (see

South Korea allows you to restrict the functionality to this region.

Nominal Voltage The following nominal voltages are available:

 3 x 110/190…133/230 V (firmware version ≥P05)

 3 x 58/100…69/120 V (firmware versions ≥P04)

 3 x 100…120 V (firmware version P04 only)

D000029785 en k – E550 Series 2 – Functional Description © Landis+Gyr

ZxG410xR 1(1.2, 2, 6) – 5(6, 10) A

ZMG310xR Basic current Ib 5 – 10 – 20 – 40 A

ZxG410xR typical 0.2% In 2 mA for 1 A

The starting current can be selected within the following ranges:

ZMG310xR typical 0.5% Ib 25 mA

The starting current can be selected between 15 and 200 mA.